To

50
ta

Pr
lm

0
ot
L

oc
ol
Nam
e
0:0
To

O min
ta

Ti
ptiB g
l Ti
0:0
En
m

ol Bolu
ab
e

us s

19
1
le

7
A
Pe
ak
32

Sc 0
PS

an
5

In
I

Del

je
ct
ay

Del
0

Ch
ec
ay

k
fo
r ai
r
125
129
mL
Protoc Debug
ol Nam Phase
PH1: e & Side
50
Peak
PH2: PSI Inject
0 Check
for air
Delay syrin in
0 ge and
PH3: - 0.1
Scan Delay
Tota l
tubing
Enable [Link]Time
- 1
mL/s
PH4: 0.1 mL 10 0
Duration

+
mL/s
1
mL 10
Dura Phase 0
tion Delay

OptiBol
Mem us
ory
Timing
Setup Bolus

Results

Main

Service and Parts Manual 847503-E

INTRODUCTION ii

This page intentionally left blank.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 iii

FOREWORD
Congratulations on the purchase of your OptiOne Single-Head Contrast

INTRODUCTION
Delivery System. The OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System
represents our effort to provide a quality product to support better health care
throughout the world.
Regardless of how well equipment is designed, misuse or abuse will deny
its owner the expected quality of service. Misuse or abuse may occur
unintentionally because the proper method of operating the equipment is
unknown. Read this manual carefully before operating the OptiOne Single-
Head Contrast Delivery System. Retain this manual for future reference.
MALLINCKRODT TECHNICAL SUPPORT Phone No. 1-800-877-0791

RECORDING MODEL NUMBER, PART NUMBERS, AND SERIAL NUMBERS

The model number (Mod. No.), part numbers (P/N), and serial numbers (S/N)
must be supplied when requesting replacement parts or optional accessories.
For convenience, record the requested information below:

Power Supply

Mod. No. -

P/N -

S/N C N

Powerhead

P/N -

S/N C N

Console S/N

P/N -

S/N C N

Date of Installation / /

Installing Company___________________________________________

Address_____________________________________________________

Phone No. ___________________________________________________

847503-E 2017-04-21
 iv

TRADEMARK INFORMATION
TIMING BOLUS, OPTIBOLUS, and OPTIRAY are trademarks of Mallinckrodt LLC.
INTRODUCTION

This product is covered by one or more U.S. patents. See [Link].

com/patents for details.

MEANINGS OF SYMBOLS

SYMBOLS LOCATED IN THE MANUAL

Please regard any message that follows a Danger, Warning, or Caution
symbol.
DANGER!

DANGER!—Hazards which could result in severe personal injury or death.

WARNING!

WARNING!—Hazards which could result in personal injury.

CAUTION!

CAUTION!—Hazards which could result in equipment or property damage.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 v

SYMBOLS LOCATED ON THE POWER CONTROL

Connections (Back of Power Control)

INTRODUCTION
Connection Symbol Definition

J1 Powerhead Cable Connector

J2 Startswitch Cable Connector

J3 Ethernet Port

J5 RS232/
RS422
RS232/RS422 Port

J6 Universal Interface Connector

J10A Console Cable Connector

TM

J10B OptiBolus™ Console Cable Connector

P4 CAN Controller Area Network Port

Equipment sensitive to Electrostatic Discharge.

DO NOT TOUCH exposed connectors.

! ATTENTION! Consult User's/Service Manual.

CAUTION! Risk of electrical shock. Do not remove cover.

Refer servicing to qualified personnel.

T 4AH , 250 V Fuse Rating (Type, Amperage, Voltage)

847503-E 2017-04-21
 vi

Rating Label (Bottom of Power Control)

Connection Symbol Definition

INTRODUCTION

Mod. No. Model Number

S/N Serial Number

P/N Part Number

V/A Volts Amps

Electrical and Electronic Equipment.

Separate collection required.

! ATTENTION! Consult User's/Service Manual.

China RoHS Directive; EFUP = 20

Refer to instruction manual

SYMBOLS LOCATED ON THE CONSOLE

Case (Located on the right side of screen)

Connection Symbol Definition

Push ON / Push OFF

Screen

Connection Symbol Definition

5 Patient delivered volume of contrast

847503-E 2017-04-21
 vii

Label (Back of Unit)

Connection Symbol Definition

INTRODUCTION
ANG
IOM
AT ILLU

J1 Power Supply Cable Connector

MEN
A

J2 Handswitch Cable Connector

SYMBOLS LOCATED ON THE POWERHEAD

Screen

Connection Symbol Definition

5 Patient delivered volume of contrast

Label (Located on back of Powerhead)

Connection Symbol Definition

Syringes and Tubing classified EN 60601-1, Type CF

Manual Knob

Connection Symbol Definition

Manual Knob Light Status

Flashing Blue: Injector Powering Up
Solid Yellow: Enabled or
injecting contrast (yellow)
Flashing Yellow: Injector Paused
Flashing Red: Alarm condition
Flashing Blue quickly: Injector rotated vertically or
30 degrees below horizontal.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 viii

200 mL Syringe Holder

Connection Symbol Definition

INTRODUCTION

Install syringe holder / load syringe

Lock syringe

Remove syringe holder

SYMBOLS LOCATED ON THE REMOTE STAND

Connection Symbol Definition

Powerhead, remote stand and 2.25 lbs (1 kg) on each IV pole

hook creates a total load of 45 lbs (20.4 kg).

45 lbs
(20.4 kg)

Each IV pole hook can maintain 2.25 lbs (1 kg) maximum.

2.25 lbs 2.25 lbs

(1 kg) (1 kg)

847503-E 2017-04-21
 ix

CLASSIFICATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH EN 60601-1

TYPE OF PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK

INTRODUCTION
Class I equipment
DEGREE OF PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK

Type CF applied part (Syringes and Tubing).

DEGREE OF PROTECTION AGAINST INGRESS OF WATER

Ordinary Equipment
DEGREE OF SAFETY OF APPLICATION IN THE PRESENCE OF A FLAMMABLE
ANAESTHETIC MIXTURE WITH AIR OR WITH OXYGEN OR NITROUS OXIDE
Equipment not suitable for use in the presence of a flammable anaesthetic mixture
with air or with oxygen or nitrous oxide.
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
The OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System meets the radiated
emissions (Class A) and immunity standard IEC 60601-1-2 for medical devices

UL/CSA CLASSIFICATION

OPTIONE (Medical Equipment)

WITH RESPECT TO ELECTRICAL SHOCK,
FIRE AND MECHANICAL HAZARDS ONLY
IN ACCORDANCE WITH ANSI/AAMI ES 60601-1:2005, /(R) 2012
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60601-1 (2008), IEC 60601-1:2005, +A1
IEC 60601-1:1998, A1:1991, A2:1995
33SL

OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System

847503-E 2017-04-21
 x

CE MARK INFORMATION
INTRODUCTION

0123
GUERBET
BP 57400
95943 Roissy CdG Cedex
France
(located at : 15 rue des Vanesses,
93420 Villepinte, France)

Conforms to the European Medical Device Directive (MDD)

Liebel-Flarsheim Company LLC, 2111 E. Galbraith Road, Cincinnati, OH 45237-1640 USA

Note: Changes or modifications to the OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery

System not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
All copyright, confidential information, patents, design rights and all other
intellectual property right of whatsoever nature contained herein are and
shall remain the sole and exclusive property of a Mallinckrodt company
(“Mallinckrodt”). The information furnished herein is believed to be accurate
and reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed by Mallinckrodt for its use,
or for any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties resulting
from its use. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted,
transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language, in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or
otherwise, without prior written permission from Mallinckrodt.
Mallinckrodt, the “M” brand mark and the Mallinckrodt Pharmaceuticals logo
are trademarks of a Mallinckrodt company. Other brands are trademarks of a
Mallinckrodt company or their respective owners. © 2013 Mallinckrodt.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 xvii

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Foreword............................................................................................................................ iii
Recording Model Number, Part Numbers, and Serial Numbers.................................... iii
Trademark Information..................................................................................................... iv
Meanings of Symbols........................................................................................................ iv
Symbols Located in the Manual.........................................................................................................iv
Symbols Located on the Power Control...........................................................................................v
Connections (Back of Power Control).................................................................................v
Rating Label (Bottom of Power Control)...........................................................................vi
Symbols Located on the Console.......................................................................................................vi
Case (Located on the right side of screen)......................................................................vi
Screen............................................................................................................................................vi
Label (Back of Unit)................................................................................................................. vii
Symbols Located on the Powerhead.............................................................................................. vii
Screen.......................................................................................................................................... vii
Label (Located on back of Powerhead)........................................................................... vii
Manual Knob............................................................................................................................. vii
200 mL Syringe Holder......................................................................................................... viii
Symbols Located on the Remote Stand....................................................................................... viii
Classification in accordance with EN 60601-1................................................................. ix
Type of protection against electric shock.......................................................................................ix
Degree of protection against electric shock..................................................................................ix
Degree of protection against ingress of water..............................................................................ix
Degree of Safety of Application in the Presence of a Flammable Anaesthetic Mixture
with Air or with Oxygen or Nitrous Oxide.......................................................................................ix
Electromagnetic Compatibility...........................................................................................................ix
UL/CSA Classification..............................................................................................................................ix
CE Mark Information...........................................................................................................x

847503-E 2017-04-21
 xviii

SYSTEM OVERVIEW...........................................................................................................1-1-1
1.1 Indications for Use.................................................................................................1-1-2
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.2 Service Technician Qualifications.........................................................................1-2-1

1.3 System Features.....................................................................................................1-3-1
1.3.1 Versatility..................................................................................................................................1-3-1
1.3.2 OptiBolusTM Feature (Optional).........................................................................................1-3-1
1.3.3 Auto-Fill Feature ...................................................................................................................1-3-1
1.3.4 Touch-Screen Displays.........................................................................................................1-3-1
1.3.5 Protocol Memory With Password Protection..............................................................1-3-2
1.4 Safety Features.......................................................................................................1-4-1
1.4.1 Self-testing Design.................................................................................................................1-4-1
1.4.2 Timing Bolus™ Feature...........................................................................................................1-4-1
1.4.3 Pointing Powerhead Downward prior to Starting an Injection.............................1-4-1
1.4.4 Start/Stop Key on Powerhead............................................................................................1-4-1
1.4.5 Remote Control Operation.................................................................................................1-4-1
1.4.6 Electrically Isolated Syringe................................................................................................1-4-1
1.4.7 Syringe Clarity..........................................................................................................................1-4-1
1.4.8 Positive Positioning of the Powerhead...........................................................................1-4-2
1.4.9 Physical Stability.....................................................................................................................1-4-2
1.5 Specifications.........................................................................................................1-5-1
1.5.1 Dimensions..............................................................................................................................1-5-1
1.5.2 Weight.......................................................................................................................................1-5-1
1.5.3 Power Requirements............................................................................................................1-5-1
1.5.4 Electrical Leakage..................................................................................................................1-5-1
1.5.5 Environmental........................................................................................................................1-5-2
1.5.6 Compatible Syringe Sizes...................................................................................................1-5-3
1.5.7 Syringe Heater........................................................................................................................1-5-3
1.5.8 Flow Rate..................................................................................................................................1-5-3
1.5.9 Peak Pressure Limit...............................................................................................................1-5-3
1.5.10 Phase Delay...........................................................................................................................1-5-3
1.5.11 Inject Delay...........................................................................................................................1-5-4
1.5.12 Scan Delay.............................................................................................................................1-5-4
1.5.13 Total Time ..............................................................................................................................1-5-4
1.5.14 Stored Protocols.................................................................................................................1-5-4

847503-E 2017-04-21
 xix

1.6 Consumables...........................................................................................................1-6-1
1.6.1 Compatible Syringes............................................................................................................1-6-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Single Head Procedures...................................................................................................1-6-1
1.6.2 Low Pressure Tubing............................................................................................................1-6-2
1.6.3 OptiVantage dh transfer set..............................................................................................1-6-2
1.6.4 Catheters, Connectors and Tubing..................................................................................1-6-2
1.7 Accessories..............................................................................................................1-7-1

SYSTEM COMPONENTS POWER ON/OFF........................................................................2-1-1

2.1 General...................................................................................................................2-1-1
2.1.1 Powerhead...............................................................................................................................2-1-2
2.1.2 Console.....................................................................................................................................2-1-3
2.1.3 Remote Start...........................................................................................................................2-1-4
2.1.4 Power Supply..........................................................................................................................2-1-4
2.1.5 Turning the System Power ON..........................................................................................2-1-5
2.1.6 Homing the Ram....................................................................................................................2-1-6
2.1.7 Turning the System Power OFF........................................................................................2-1-6

CONSOLE AND POWERHEAD ...........................................................................................3-1-1

3.1 Console ..................................................................................................................3-1-2
3.1.1 Console Power Button.........................................................................................................3-1-2
3.1.2 Console Display Modes of Operation............................................................................3-1-2
3.1.3 Console Main Screen (Protocol Parameter Entry Screen).......................................3-1-4
3.1.4 Enabled Console Main Screen (Start Screen)..............................................................3-1-8
3.1.5 Memory Screen......................................................................................................................3-1-9
Recall a Protocol............................................................................................................... 3-1-10
Store a Protocol in Memory......................................................................................... 3-1-11
Move a Protocol in Memory........................................................................................ 3-1-12
Delete a Protocol from Memory................................................................................. 3-1-12
Rename (Edit Name) a Protocol Name or Page ................................................... 3-1-12
3.1.6 Setup....................................................................................................................................... 3-1-13
Time/Date........................................................................................................................... 3-1-17
Language............................................................................................................................ 3-1-18
Alarms.................................................................................................................................. 3-1-19
3.1.7 Results Screen Parameters and Symbols................................................................... 3-1-20

847503-E 2017-04-21
 xx

3.2 Powerhead..............................................................................................................3-2-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS

3.2.1 Powerhead Power ON Display..........................................................................................3-2-1

3.2.2 Manual Knob...........................................................................................................................3-2-2
3.2.3 Powerhead Syringe Load Latches...................................................................................3-2-4
3.2.4 Heater Blanket Connection................................................................................................3-2-5
3.2.5 Powerhead Display Modes of Operation......................................................................3-2-6
3.2.6 Powerhead Main Screen ....................................................................................................3-2-8
3.2.7 Powerhead Protocol Parameter Entry Screen.......................................................... 3-2-11
3.2.8 Enabled Powerhead Main Screen ................................................................................ 3-2-15
3.2.9 Powerhead Memory Screen........................................................................................... 3-2-16
Recalling a Protocol........................................................................................................ 3-2-16
3.2.10 Powerhead Results Screen........................................................................................... 3-2-17

MAINTENANCE AND CHECKOUT PROCEDURES.............................................................4-1-1

4.1 Maintenance Schedule..........................................................................................4-1-2
4.1.1 Daily Inspection.....................................................................................................................4-1-2
4.1.2 Preventive Maintenance.....................................................................................................4-1-2
4.2 Operational Checkout Procedures.......................................................................4-2-1
4.2.1 Items Required.......................................................................................................................4-2-1
4.2.2 Power Supply Check.............................................................................................................4-2-1
4.2.3 Console Operations..............................................................................................................4-2-2
4.2.4 Powerhead Overview...........................................................................................................4-2-2
4.2.5 Powerhead Operations........................................................................................................4-2-3
4.2.6 Remote Start Operations....................................................................................................4-2-3
4.2.7 Powerhead Stop Button Check........................................................................................4-2-4
4.2.8 Faceplate Detection Check................................................................................................4-2-4
4.2.9 Flow Rate Check.....................................................................................................................4-2-5
4.2.10 Pressure Limit Check..........................................................................................................4-2-6
Verifying Calibration..........................................................................................................4-2-6
Pressure Limiting Example for Testing .......................................................................4-2-6
4.3 Electrical checks.....................................................................................................4-3-1
4.3.1 Ground Continuity ...............................................................................................................4-3-1
4.3.2 Electrical Leakage ..................................................................................................................4-3-1
4.3.3 Ground Impedance................................................................................................................4-3-2

847503-E 2017-04-21
 xxi

4.4 Suspension Arm Operational Checks...................................................................4-4-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.4.1 Suspension Arm Travel Adjustment................................................................................4-4-1
4.4.2 Suspension Arm Balance Adjustment............................................................................4-4-2
4.4.3 Suspension System Checks.................................................................................................4-4-3
J-Bow Arm Visual Inspection..........................................................................................4-4-3
Suspension System Visual Inspection.........................................................................4-4-4
Vertical Column Inspection............................................................................................4-4-4
J-Bow Safety Collar Inspection......................................................................................4-4-5
4.5 Cleaning Procedures..............................................................................................4-5-1
4.5.1 Syringe Holder and Adapter..............................................................................................4-5-1
200 mL....................................................................................................................................4-5-1
125 mL....................................................................................................................................4-5-1
4.5.2 Powerhead...............................................................................................................................4-5-1
4.5.3 Console.....................................................................................................................................4-5-1
4.5.4 Power Supply..........................................................................................................................4-5-2
4.5.5 Cleaning 200 mL Pressure Sleeve....................................................................................4-5-2

TROUBLESHOOTING..........................................................................................................5-1-1
5.1 Overview.................................................................................................................5-1-1
5.1.2 General Troubleshooting Guidelines.............................................................................5-1-2
5.2 System Generated Alarms.....................................................................................5-2-1
5.3 Console Alarms 1000 Series.................................................................................5-3-1
5.4 Powerhead Alarms 2000 Series............................................................................5-4-1
5.5 OEM Alarms 3000 Series.......................................................................................5-5-1

847503-E 2017-04-21
 xxii

FIELD REPLACEABLE PARTS.............................................................................................6-1-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

6.1 General information...............................................................................................6-1-1

6.1.1 Terminology..............................................................................................................................6-1-1
6.1.2 Replaceable Parts..................................................................................................................6-1-1
6.2 Console...................................................................................................................6-2-1
6.2.1 Console Replacement Components...............................................................................6-2-1
KIT: CONSOLE CPU BOARD (P/N 844101-1S)............................................................6-2-1
KIT: TOUCHSCREEN 10.4” (P/N 802104S)....................................................................6-2-1
KIT: CONSOLE COVERS (P/N 844198S)........................................................................6-2-1
KIT: CONSOLE SWITCH ASSEMBLY (P/N 802114S)...................................................6-2-1
KIT: INTERFACE CABLE ASSEMBLY (P/N 802110S)...................................................6-2-1
KIT: COMM. PCB, OPTIONE SINGLE-HEAD (P/N 844102-1S)................................6-2-2
KIT: DISPLAY SUB ASSEMBLY (P/N 802116S).............................................................6-2-2
INSTALLATION CONSOLE COVER KIT (844198S)......................................................6-2-7
INSTALLATION CONSOLE CPU KIT (844101-1S).......................................................6-2-8
INSTALLATION DISPLAY SUBASSEMBLY KIT (802116S).........................................6-2-9
INSTALLATION TOUCHSCREEN KIT (802104S)....................................................... 6-2-10
INSTALLATION SWITCH KIT (802114S)...................................................................... 6-2-11
INSTALLATION INTERFACE BOARD KIT (844102-1S)............................................ 6-2-12

847503-E 2017-04-21
 xxiii

6.3 Powerhead..............................................................................................................6-3-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.3.1 Powerhead Kit Components.............................................................................................6-3-2
KIT: TOP COVER, (P/N 847181S).....................................................................................6-3-2
KIT: BOTTOM COVER, (P/N 847190S)...........................................................................6-3-2
KIT: BEZEL ASSY (P/N 847180S).....................................................................................6-3-2
KIT: KNOB (P/N 844395S).................................................................................................6-3-2
KIT: POWERHEAD CABLE (P/N 847150S)....................................................................6-3-2
KIT: GASKETS (P/N 847224S) (Some parts under P/N 847110)..................................6-3-3
KIT: PCB ASSY, KNOB LED (P/N 847140-1S)................................................................6-3-3
KIT: PCB ASSY, LOGIC (P/N 847170-1S)........................................................................6-3-3
KIT: PCB ASSY, MOTOR DRIVER (P/N 847160-1S).....................................................6-3-3
KIT: HORIZONTAL PIVOT (P/N 847210S).....................................................................6-3-3
KIT: LCD DISPLAY, (P/N 847203S)...................................................................................6-3-3
KIT: PULLEY (P/N 844372S)..............................................................................................6-3-4
KIT: MOTOR (P/N 844376S)..............................................................................................6-3-4
KIT: BELT (P/N 844377S)....................................................................................................6-3-4
KIT: PIVOT BUSHING (P/N 844369S).............................................................................6-3-4
KIT: 125 ML FACEPLATE (P/N 844425)..........................................................................6-3-5
KIT: 200 ML FACEPLATE (P/N 844850)..........................................................................6-3-5
KIT: 200 ML THUMB KNOB (P/N 844856S)..................................................................6-3-5
KIT: FASTENER POWERHEAD (P/N 847225S).............................................................6-3-5
KIT: HEATER BLANKET CABLE ASSY (P/N 844381S).................................................6-3-5
KIT: LED PCB ASSY, CABLE ASSY (P/N 847141S).......................................................6-3-6
KIT: LCD FLEX CABLE KIT (P/N 847208S).....................................................................6-3-6

847503-E 2017-04-21
 xxiv

6.3.2 Powerhead Removal/Installation from Stand.......................................................... 6-3-12

TABLE OF CONTENTS

INSTALLATION TOP COVER, KIT (P/N 847181S) .................................................. 6-3-14

INSTALLATION BOTTOM COVER, KIT (P/N 847190S) ........................................ 6-3-14
INSTALLATION BEZEL ASSEMBLY, KIT (847180S).................................................. 6-3-16
INSTALLATION KNOB, KIT (P/N 844395S) ............................................................. 6-3-17
INSTALLATION POWERHEAD CABLE KIT (P/N 847150S) ................................. 6-3-18
INSTALLATION KNOB LED PROCESSOR BOARD KIT (P/N 847140-1S) ........ 6-3-20
INSTALLATION LOGIC BOARD, KIT (847170-1S).................................................... 6-3-22
INSTALLATION MOTOR DRIVER BOARD, KIT (847160-1S).................................. 6-3-24
INSTALLATION LCD DISPLAY KIT (P/N 847203S) ................................................ 6-3-26
INSTALLATION PULLEY KIT (P/N 844372S) ........................................................... 6-3-28
INSTALLATION MOTOR KIT (P/N 844376S) ........................................................... 6-3-30
INSTALLATION BELT KIT (P/N 844377S) ................................................................. 6-3-32
INSTALLATION PIVOT BUSHING KIT (P/N 844369S) .......................................... 6-3-34
INSTALLATION HORIZONTAL PIVOT KIT (P/N 847210S) .................................. 6-3-36
INSTALLATION LCD FLEX CABLE KIT (P/N 847208S)............................................ 6-3-38
INSTALLATION HEATER BLANKET CABLE KIT (P/N 844381S)............................ 6-3-40
INSTALLATION LED PCB CABLE ASSEMBLY KIT (P/N 847141-1S).................... 6-3-42
125 ML FACEPLATE KIT (P/N 844425)....................................................................... 6-3-44
200 ML FACEPLATE KIT (P/N 844850) .................................................................... 6-3-44
INSTALLATION 200 ML FACEPLATE THUMB
KNOB KIT (P/N 844856S) ............................................................................................ 6-3-45
INSTALLATION GASKET KIT (P/N 847224S) .......................................................... 6-3-46

847503-E 2017-04-21
 xxv

6.4 Power Supply.........................................................................................................6-4-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.4.1 Power Supply Replacement Components ..................................................................6-4-1
KIT: FUSE (P/N 172L0078S)..............................................................................................6-4-1
KIT: AC INLET MODULE, FILTERED, 6A (P/N 240E3335S).......................................6-4-1
KIT: POWER SUPPLY, +25.2VDC (P/N 844483S)........................................................6-4-1
KIT: COVER, POWER SUPPLY (P/N 844452S)..............................................................6-4-2
KIT: PCB ASSEMBLY, POWER SUPPLY (P/N 84446-1S).............................................6-4-2
KIT: WIRE HARNESS, POWER SUPPLY (P/N 844470S)..............................................6-4-2
KIT: FASTENER, POWER SUPPLY (P/N 844651S)........................................................6-4-2
INSTALLATION FUSE KIT POWER SUPPLY (P/N 172L0078S).................................6-4-5
INSTALLATION POWER SUPPLY KIT (P/N 844483S) ................................................6-4-5
INSTALLATION PC BOARD KIT (P/N 844460-1S).......................................................6-4-6
INSTALLATION AC INLET MODULE KIT (240E3335S)..............................................6-4-6
INSTALLATION WIRE HARNESS KIT (844470S)..........................................................6-4-7
INSTALLATION COVER KIT (844452S)...........................................................................6-4-8
6.5 Remote Stand.........................................................................................................6-5-1
KIT: REMOTE STAND CASTERS (P/N 844527S)...........................................................6-5-1
KIT: PEDESTAL TRAY (P/N 844531S)..............................................................................6-5-1
KIT: STRAIN RELIEF (P/N 844539S)................................................................................6-5-1
KIT: IV POLE (P/N 844552S)..............................................................................................6-5-1
KIT: PEDESTAL HARDWARE (P/N 844557)...................................................................6-5-1
6.6 Suspension System................................................................................................6-6-1
6.7 Accessory Items......................................................................................................6-7-1
HAND BUTTON START SWITCH ASSEMBLY ...............................................................6-7-1
DATA CABLE POWER SUPPLY TO CONSOLE...............................................................6-7-1
POWERHEAD EXTENSION CABLE TO POWER SUPPLY..........................................6-7-1
SERIAL COMMUNICATION CABLE
(SERVICE KEY/SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD)....................................................................6-7-1
FLOW CONTROL VALVE FIXTURES................................................................................6-7-2
QUICK DISCONNECT FOR PRESSURE GAUGES.........................................................6-7-3
PRESSURE GAUGES............................................................................................................6-7-3
FACEPLATES AND ACCESSORIES...................................................................................6-7-3
SYRINGE CALIBRATION KIT..............................................................................................6-7-4
REMOTE STAND...................................................................................................................6-7-4
SUSPENSION SYSTEM........................................................................................................6-7-4
MANUALS..............................................................................................................................6-7-4
CD SERVICE PRODUCTION SOFTWARE KIT................................................................6-7-4

847503-E 2017-04-21
 xxvi

THEORY OF OPERATION....................................................................................................7-1-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS

7.1 Theory of Operation...............................................................................................7-1-1

7.2 System Overview Block Diagram..........................................................................7-2-1
7.3 Power Supply.........................................................................................................7-3-1
7.4 Powerhead Overview.............................................................................................7-4-1
7.4.1 Interconnection Descriptions............................................................................................7-4-1
[Link] Logic to Motor Board to Board Interconnect.............................................7-4-1
[Link] LED Cable................................................................................................................7-4-1
[Link] LCD Cable................................................................................................................7-4-1
[Link] Backlight Power Cable........................................................................................7-4-1
[Link] Touch Cable............................................................................................................7-4-2
[Link] DB25 Cable Termination to Logic PCB Wiring............................................7-4-2
[Link] Faceplate Cable.....................................................................................................7-4-2
7.4.2 Powerhead Subassemblies.................................................................................................7-4-2
[Link] Logic PCBA Subassembly..................................................................................7-4-2
[Link] Motor..................................................................................................................... 7-4-10
[Link] Motor PCBA Subassembly.............................................................................. 7-4-10
[Link] LED PCBA Subassembly.................................................................................. 7-4-16
7.5 Console Overview..................................................................................................7-5-1
7.5.1 Console CPU............................................................................................................................7-5-1
7.5.2 Circuit Descriptions..............................................................................................................7-5-2

847503-E 2017-04-21
 xxvii

CALIBRATION.....................................................................................................................8-1-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS
8.1 Overview.................................................................................................................8-1-1
8.1.1 Required Tools........................................................................................................................8-1-1
8.1.2 Frequency of Calibration....................................................................................................8-1-2
8.1.3 Entering SERVICE Mode......................................................................................................8-1-2
8.1.4 Exiting SERVICE Mode..........................................................................................................8-1-4
8.2 Touch Screen Calibration.......................................................................................8-2-1
8.3 Powerhead Tilt Position Calibration.....................................................................8-3-1
8.4 Powerhead Ram Position Calibration...................................................................8-4-1
8.5 Pressure Calibration - 125 mL...............................................................................8-5-1
8.5.1 Overview..................................................................................................................................8-5-1
8.5.2 Required Tools........................................................................................................................8-5-1
8.5.3 Pressure Gauge Calibration...............................................................................................8-5-2
8.5.4 Pressure Sleeve and Syringe Inspection.......................................................................8-5-2
8.5.5 Pressure Calibration Instructions.....................................................................................8-5-4
8.6 Verifying calibration..............................................................................................8-6-1
8.6.1 Verifying Calibration..............................................................................................................8-6-2
Pressure Limiting Example for Testing .......................................................................8-6-2
8.7 Other Adjustments................................................................................................8-7-1
8.7.1 Powerhead WEAR IN/BURN IN...........................................................................................8-7-1

SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD AND UPGRADE........................................................................9-1-1

9.1 Overview.................................................................................................................9-1-1
9.1.1 Software Transfer from CDTWARE Transfer from CD................................................9-1-2
9.1.2 Unintall the OptiOne Single-Head Loader Utility......................................................9-1-5
9.1.3 Download and Upgrade Procedures..............................................................................9-1-8
9.1.4 Loader Program Troubleshooting................................................................................ 9-1-13

847503-E 2017-04-21
 xxviii

SCHEMATICS.................................................................................................................... 10-1-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS

10.1 Overview.............................................................................................................10-1-1
Power Supply Schematic 844460-2 Rev D (1 of 2)............................................................ 10-2-1
Power Supply Schematic 844460-2 rev D (2 of 2)............................................................. 10-2-2
Console Schematic 802101-2 rev G (1 of 5)......................................................................... 10-3-1
Console Schematic 802101-2 REV F (2 of 5)........................................................................ 10-3-2
Console Schematic 802101-2 Rev G (3 of 5)........................................................................ 10-3-3
Console Schematic 802101-2 REV F (4 of 5)........................................................................ 10-3-4
Console Schematic 802101-2 REV F (5 of 5)........................................................................ 10-3-5
Console Interface Schematic 844102-2 REV C (2 of 2)..................................................... 10-3-6
Powerhead logic board Schematic 847170-2 (1 of 7)...................................................... 10-4-1
Powerhead Logic Board Schematic 847170-2 (2 of 7)..................................................... 10-4-2
Powerhead logic board Schematic 847170-2 (3 of 7)...................................................... 10-4-3
Powerhead logic board Schematic 847170-2 (4 of 7)...................................................... 10-4-4
Powerhead logic board Schematic 847170-2 (5 of 7)...................................................... 10-4-5
Powerhead logic board Schematic 847170-2 (6 of 7)...................................................... 10-4-6
Powerhead logic board Schematic 847170-2 (7 of 7)...................................................... 10-4-7
Powerhead Motor Driver PCBA 847160-2 (1 of 2)............................................................. 10-4-8
Powerhead Motor Driver PCBA 847160-2 (2 of 2)............................................................. 10-4-9
Hand Button 802620/802622................................................................................................... 10-5-1
Powerhead Extension Data Cable............................................................................................ 10-6-1

APPENDIX A
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION
INFORMATION.................................................................................................................A-1

ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY TABLES...................................................................B-1

INDEX...................................................................................................................................... I-1

847503-E 2017-04-21
 1-1-1

1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW

1—SYSTEM OVERVIEW
To
50
ta

Pr
lm

0
ot
L

oc
ol
Na
m
e
0:0
To

O min
ta

Ti
pt g
l Ti

Ena
0:0

iB Bo
m

ol lu
e

bl

us s

19
1
e

7
A
Pe 2
ak 5

Sc 0
3
an
PS

In 0
je
I

De

ct
lay

De

Ch
lay

ec
k
fo
r air
125
129
mL
Protoco Debu
g Phas
PH1: l Nam e & Side
e
50
Peak
PH2:PSI Inject
0 Chec
k for
air in
Delay syrin
0 ge and
PH3: - 0.1
Scan
Delay Tota
l Time
tubin
g
mL/s
1
Enab [Link]
PH4: - 0.1 mL 10
Durati
le
0
+
mL/s
1 on
mL 10
Durati Phase 0
on Delay

OptiB
Mem olus
ory
Timing
Setup Bolus

Resu
lts

Main

Figure 1-1-1 OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System

The purpose of this manual is to provide instructions for servicing the OptiOne
Single-Head Contrast Delivery System. For further information about operation
and daily maintenance of the unit, refer to the OptiOne Single-Head Contrast
Delivery System Operator’s Manual.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 1-1-2

1.1 INDICATIONS FOR USE

The OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System is a contrast delivery
system and is designed to inject radiopaque contrast media into a patient’s
1—SYSTEM OVERVIEW

vascular system to obtain diagnostic images when used with computed

tomography (i.e. “CT”) equipment.
Contra indications for the use of this device are determined by the prescribing
physician at the time of use based upon the contrast media package inserts.

WARNING!

No modification of this equipment is allowed.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 1-2-1

1.2 SERVICE TECHNICIAN QUALIFICATIONS

The OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System should be installed,
serviced and calibrated ONLY by qualified personnel who:

1—SYSTEM OVERVIEW
have been factory trained
are completely familiar with the unit
have read and understood Installation and Service Manuals
Failure to follow these guidelines could result in serious injury to the service
technician.

WARNING!

Federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a physician.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 1-2-2
1—SYSTEM OVERVIEW

This page intentionally left blank.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 1-3-1

1.3 SYSTEM FEATURES

1.3.1 VERSATILITY
The injector is microprocessor-controlled and can perform injections within the

1—SYSTEM OVERVIEW
following variable parameters:
• Flow Rate
• Volume
• Pressure Limit
• Inject Delay
• Scan Delay
• Phase Delays
1.3.2 OPTIBOLUSTM FEATURE (OPTIONAL)
The OptiBolus feature is used to deliver an exponentially decaying flow
rate injection that optimizes the contrast usage and provides an extended
period of uniform enhancement of the area of interest. The End Flow Rate is
automatically calculated by the injector and displayed only on the console
Main screen.
1.3.3 AUTO-FILL FEATURE
This feature is designed to fill one 200 mL syringe automatically while
minimizing the introduction of air into the syringe. Upon loading
the-200 mL syringe, the powerhead has the capability to start filling the syringe
automatically, then expel excess air before filling completely to the operator
programmed Auto-Fill Volume.
1.3.4 TOUCH-SCREEN DISPLAYS
The console and powerhead both contain touch screen displays for operator
interaction. Refer to Chapter 3-1-1 for detailed descriptions.
When using the touch screen displays, keep the following information in mind

847503-E 2017-04-21
1-3-2

CAUTION!
Do not press on the touch screens with sharp or pointed items such as
fingernails, pens or pencils. Using items of this type may cause damage to your
1—SYSTEM OVERVIEW

screen, resulting in a nonworking unit. Do not allow objects, such as pens and
pencils, to lay on the touch screen.

NOTE: Rapid touches on the console screen’s blue background may cause a
console screen refresh.
1.3.5 PROTOCOL MEMORY WITH PASSWORD PROTECTION
A convenient, user-friendly feature of the OptiOne Single-Head Contrast
Delivery System is its ability to store the parameters of as many as 40 protocols
in its memory. Password protection is also available.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 1-4-1

1.4 SAFETY FEATURES

The OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System has been designed to
enhance the safety of both patient and operator. Specific safety features

1—SYSTEM OVERVIEW
include:
1.4.1 SELF-TESTING DESIGN
When the injector is switched ON, it automatically performs a series of
power-up tests to monitor the status of all systems. If a problem is detected,
an appropriate message will appear in the system display. Also, during the
enable process and during an injection, all necessary functions are constantly
checked. If a fault is detected, the system will automatically shut down and an
appropriate message will be displayed.
1.4.2 TIMING BOLUS™ FEATURE
Prior to the delivery of the main injection, a Timing Bolus injection—an
injection of a small volume of contrast can be delivered to the patient to
determine the optimal scan delay needed to capture the contrast agent in the
area of interest.
1.4.3 POINTING POWERHEAD DOWNWARD PRIOR TO STARTING AN INJECTION
After completion of the Enable sequence, the [Enable] key is only active after
tilting the powerhead to the downward position. Pointing the powerhead in
the downward position allows any trapped air in the syringe to move to the
plunger end of the syringe, away from the syringe tip, possibly preventing it
from being inadvertently injected into the patient.
1.4.4 START/STOP KEY ON POWERHEAD
Because the powerhead is near the patient during an injection, both the [Start]
key and the [Stop] key are integrated into the powerhead for starting or quickly
stopping an injection.
1.4.5 REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION
Use of the remote hand switch allows the operator to perform injections from
outside the area of direct radiation.
1.4.6 ELECTRICALLY ISOLATED SYRINGE
All syringes are isolated from any electrical contact with the injector.
1.4.7 SYRINGE CLARITY
Semitransparent syringes are used on the OptiOne Single-Head Contrast
Delivery System. Small air bubbles can be seen with careful observation.

847503-E 2017-04-21
1-4-2

1.4.8 POSITIVE POSITIONING OF THE POWERHEAD

A preset friction device on the powerhead holds the syringe in the desired
position during injection.
1—SYSTEM OVERVIEW

1.4.9 PHYSICAL STABILITY

The wide stance of the base of the pedestal assembly reduces the possibility of
tipping. The casters may be locked to prevent unwanted rolling and turning.

WARNING!

Maintain a constant hold on the pedestal when moving over door thresholds,
injector cables, or other obstacles on the floor to help prevent the injector from
tipping over.

WARNING!

To prevent operator injury, note that injector cables laying on the floor could
possibly cause a trip hazard..

847503-E 2017-04-21
 1-5-1

1.5 SPECIFICATIONS
1.5.1 DIMENSIONS
Console A ������������������������������������������12.25 W x 2.5 H x 8.5 D inches

1—SYSTEM OVERVIEW
(311 W x 64 H x 216 D mm)
Console Base B ��������������������������������9.5 W x 2.5 H x 7 D inches
(241 W x 64 H x 178 D mm)
Powerhead C ������������������������������������7 W x 6 H x 12.25 D inches
(178 W x 152 H x 311 D mm)
D
Power Supply �������������������������������10 W x 4 H x 9 D inches
(267 W x 102 H x 228 D mm)
12.25" 7"
A 311mm C 178mm
12.25”
8.5" A:

311mm 6"
216mm
125

To
129

50
ta

Pr
B:

lm

0
ot
mL

oc
ol
0 129

152mm

Na
m
0 mL

e
Scan

0:0
To
Delay
0

Op in
ta
PH1:

Tim 7
Start

l Tim
Inject

0:0
En

tiB g Bo
Delay

A 50

ol lu
ab
e
Protocol

us s
4.0

19
1
PH2: Peak

le
PSI Name

A
mL/s
30 Total

A
AB 5.0 [Link]
Time
PH3: mL
8

Pe
B
mL/s
50 Duration

ak
32

Sc
3.0

PS

an 0
PH4: mL
10

In
I

De

jec
-
mL/s
20 Duration
50

lay

t De
0
% contrast

Ch
PH5: mL
7 25 0

lay

ec
k
Duration Contrast
25 Phase

fo
(ml) Delay

r air
PH6: Saline
(ml)
Phase 0
Delay

Drip

Timing
Bolus

Disable

2.5"
2.5" 64mm
64mm
B D 10"
7" 267mm
178mm
4"
102mm

9.5" 9"
241mm 228mm

1.5.2 WEIGHT
Console w/Base ���������������������������������5.8 lbs (2.6 kg)
Powerhead ������������������������������������������10.4 lbs (4.7 kg)
Power Supply �������������������������������������6 lbs (2.7 kg)
1.5.3 POWER REQUIREMENTS
Standby ������������������������������������������������less than 1 A
Rating ���������������������������������������������������100-127 / 220-240 V~, 4 amps, 50/60 Hz
Mode of Operation ��������������������������Continuous Operation
1.5.4 ELECTRICAL LEAKAGE
Chassis ��������������������������������������������������less than 300 microamps/115 V~
less than 500 microamps/230 V~
WARNING!

To avoid risk of electric shock, this equipment must only be connected to a

supply mains with protective earth.

847503-E 2017-04-21
1-5-2

1.5.5 ENVIRONMENTAL
Transport / Storage Temperature....-40° to +158° F (-40° to +70° C)
10% to 95% relative humidity
1—SYSTEM OVERVIEW

Operating Temperature �����������������50° to +104° F (10° to +40°C)

30% to 75% relative humidity
Btu Output ������������������������������������������453 Btu
Biohazard Disposal: Dispose of biohazards in accordance with the requirements
of your hospital, facility or local regulations.
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC): The OptiOne Single-Head Contrast
Delivery System meets EN60601-1-2 for Class A conducted and radiated
emissions and EMI immunity.

NOTE: If any anomalies in the injector performance are noticed, identify

devices within the immediate area that are capable of producing
electromagnetic interference and call a qualified service representative.

NOTE: Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Tables and additional warnings

and cautions can be found in Appendix B.
NOTE: The emissions characteristics of this equipment make it suitable for use
in industrial areas and hospitals (CISPR 11 class A). If it is used in a residential
environment (for which CISPR 11 class B is normally required) this equipment
might not offer adequate protection to radio-frequency communication
services. The user might need to take mitigation measures, such as relocating
or re-orienting the equipment.
Disposal Instructions: Disposal of the OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery
System at the end of its useful life: To minimize the risk to the environment
associated with the disposal of this equipment, its disposal should be
performed in compliance with local, state and federal regulations. Disposal of
accessories and consumables associated with this equipment should also be
performed in compliance with local, state and federal regulations.

DANGER!
Possible explosion hazard if used in the presence of flammable anesthetics. The
unit is not designed for use in explosive environment.

WARNING!
The injector may only be operated in an area that is located beyond the 20
gauss limit. Operating the unit within magnetic fields that are higher than this
limit may cause the unit to malfunction, resulting in operator or patient injury.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 1-5-3

WARNING!
The console and power control are not spill-proof. Fluid spilled in these
components can cause the unit to malfunction, resulting in patient or operator

1—SYSTEM OVERVIEW
injury. If fluid is spilled on the console or power control, remove the unit from
operation and contact your authorized service personnel.

WARNING!
Collision with other equipment can cause structural failure of suspension
arm, resulting in operator or patient injury. Visually inspect the J-Bow Arm,
be sure all fasteners are secure. Observe system for cracks or defects. Check
the suspension arm for movement. If defects are observed or adjustment is
required, immediately contact your authorized service personnel.

1.5.6 COMPATIBLE SYRINGE SIZES

Refer to Section 1.6 Consumables for more information.
125 mL, 100 mL, 75 mL, 50 mL pre-filled
200 mL empty
1.5.7 SYRINGE HEATER
98° ± 6° F (37° ± 3° C) nominal. Maintains the temperature of pre-heated
contrast (not intended to heat cold/room temperature contrast).
1.5.8 FLOW RATE
Flow Rate Parameters ���������������������0.1 – 10 mL/s adjustable in increments
of 0.1 mL/s
Flow Rate Running Tolerance �������+/-0.05 mL/s for Flow Rates <1 mL/s
+/-5 % for Flow Rates 1 mL/s to 10 mL/s
1.5.9 PEAK PRESSURE LIMIT
Pounds per Square Inch (psi) �������50 – 325 adjustable in 5 psi increments
kPa ���������������������������������������������������������345 – 2240 adjustable in 34 kPa increments
1.5.10 PHASE DELAY
Phase Delay Parameters �����������������0 – 600 seconds adjustable in increments
of 1 second or permanent pause

847503-E 2017-04-21
1-5-4

1.5.11 INJECT DELAY

Inject Delay Parameters �����������������0 – 600 seconds adjustable in increments
of 1 second
1—SYSTEM OVERVIEW

1.5.12 SCAN DELAY

Scan Delay Parameters ������������������� 0 – 600 seconds adjustable in increments
of 1 second
The Scan Delay timer shall count down in one second increments. Three beeps
(250 ms) occur when the timer reaches 10 seconds. Two beeps (440 ms) occur
when the timer reaches 5 seconds. One beep (1000 ms) occurs during the last
second. If the scanner is interfaced with the injector, a signal is sent to the
CT Scanner indicating that scan delay time has expired when the timer reaches
0 seconds. If no OEM interface is present, only an audible beep will be heard,
instructing the user to start the scanner. 
1.5.13 TOTAL TIME
Total Time Display Parameters �����0 – [Link] (hours:minutes:seconds)

1.5.14 STORED PROTOCOLS

Forty (40) protocols can be stored and recalled.
NOTE: Liebel-Flarsheim Company LLC reserves the right to change product designs
and specifications in the continuing effort to improve their products.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 1-6-1

1.6 CONSUMABLES

1—SYSTEM OVERVIEW
WARNING!
This device has been approved for use with only the consumables listed. Use
of other consumables could result in patient injury, operator injury, equipment
damage, and/or injector performance issues (i.e. incorrect volume delivery,
incorrect flow rate delivery, incorrect pressure, etc.).

1.6.1 COMPATIBLE SYRINGES

WARNING!

BLACK BOX WARNING FOR Optiray TM Ioversol Injection

See Optiray Package Insert for full prescribing information. Package Insert
enclosed with drug.

WARNING: NOT FOR INTRATHECAL USE

• 50 mL Optiray 350 (Ioversol Injection USP 74%) 350 mgl/mL

• 75 mL Optiray 350 (Ioversol Injection USP 74%) 350 mgl/mL
• 100 mL Optiray 350 (Ioversol Injection USP 74%) 350 mgl/mL
• 125 mL Optiray 350 (Ioversol Injection USP 74%) 350 mgl/mL
• 50 mL Optiray 320 (Ioversol Injection USP 68%) 320 mgl/mL
• 75 mL Optiray 320 (Ioversol Injection USP 68%) 320 mgl/mL
• 100 mL Optiray 320 (Ioversol Injection USP 68%) 320 mgl/mL
• 125 mL Optiray 320 (Ioversol Injection USP 68%) 320 mgl/mL
• 100 mL Optiray 300 (Ioversol Injection USP 64%) 300 mgl/mL
• 125 mL Optiray 240 (Ioversol Injection USP 51%) 240 mgl/mL

Single Head Procedures

• P/N 800099 CT 9000™ ADV CT Multipack. Contains: Front Loading 200 mL
Syringe; Handi-Fil™ Straw Coiled Tube
• P/N 800096 CT 9000 ADV Front Load Syringe with Handi-Fil™ Straw;
200 mL

847503-E 2017-04-21
1-6-2

1.6.2 LOW PRESSURE TUBING

• P/N 601195 Coiled Extension Tubing; 152 cm (60”); PMax 400 psi (2758 kPa)
1—SYSTEM OVERVIEW

1.6.3 OPTIVANTAGE DH TRANSFER SET

• P/N 810551 Transfer Set, OptiVantage DH

1.6.4 CATHETERS, CONNECTORS AND TUBING

It is recommended that catheters, connectors and tubing used with the
OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System be rated for a minimum of 325
psi (2241 kPa). If such products are rated at a pressure below 325 psi (2241 kPa),
it is the responsibility of the user to use manual mode to select a pressure limit
that is appropriate for the product. The selection of manual mode is covered
in section 3.1.6. Setting of the peak pressure limit is discussed in Sections 3.1.3
and 3.2.6 of this manual.
Use only safety-approved catheters suitable for connection to the LLN-K-A Luer
male-threaded locking coupler (DIN 13 090).

Figure 1‑6-1
Luer Male-threaded Locking Coupler of the LF Spiral Extension Tubing

847503-E 2017-04-21
 1-7-1

1.7 ACCESSORIES
A list of the accessories for use with the OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery
System is below.

1—SYSTEM OVERVIEW
NOTE: The use of accessories not complying with the equivalent safety
requirements of this equipment may lead to a reduced level of safety of the
resulting system. Consideration relating to the choice shall include:
• use of the accessory in the patient vicinity
• evidence that the safety certification of the accessory has been
performed in accordance to the appropriate EN 60601-1 and/or
EN 60601-1-1 harmonized national standard.
HAND BUTTON START SWITCH ASSEMBLY:
P/N 802620 Hand Switch Cable 1.8 m (6.0 feet)
P/N 802622 Hand Switch Cable 6 m (19.68 feet)

DATA CABLE POWER SUPPLY TO CONSOLE *

P/N 800113 Cable length 3 m (10 feet)
P/N 800105 Cable length 15 m (50 feet)
P/N 800106 Cable length 23 m (75 feet)
P/N 800107 Cable length 30 m (100 feet)

POWERHEAD EXTENSION CABLE TO POWER SUPPLY *

P/N 844410S Cable length 3 m (10 feet)
P/N 800109 Cable length 15 m (50 feet)
P/N 800110 Cable length 23 m (75 feet)
P/N 800111 Cable length 30 m (100 feet)

ACCESSORIES
P/N 844850 200 mL Faceplate assembly
P/N 844425 125 mL Faceplate assembly (without RFID)
P/N 800114 200 mL Heater Blanket
P/N 844500 Remote Stand Assembly
P/N 802617 Power Supply Wall Mount Kit
P/N 844200 OptiBolus Domestic
P/N 844210 OptiBolus International

POWER CORDS
P/N 800120 115 VAC Power Cord
P/N 800180 Brazil Power Cord Assembly (8 ft)
P/N 800935 220 VAC European Line Cord

847503-E 2017-04-21
1-7-2

SUSPENSION SYSTEM
P/N 241079S J-bow Arm

See Section 1.6 for list of approved Consumable Accessories
1—SYSTEM OVERVIEW

* Note: The total cumulative length of extension cable from the Power
Supply to the Powerhead should not exceed 100 feet.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 2-1-1

2 SYSTEM COMPONENTS
POWER ON/OFF

SYSTEM FEATURES
2—OVERVIEW OF
2.1 GENERAL
The OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System consist of the components
listed in Figure 2-1-1:

To
50
ta

Pr
lm

0
ot
L

oc
ol
Na
m
e
0:0
To

O min
ta

Ti
pt g
l Ti

En
0:0

iB Bo
m

ol lu
ab
e

us s

19
1
le

7
A
Pe 2
ak 5

Sc 0
3
an
PS

In 0
je
I

De

ct
lay

De

Ch
la

ec
y

k
fo
r air
Powerhead and
Remote Stand

125
129
mL
Protoco Debu
g Phas
PH1: l Name e & Side
50
Peak
PH2:PSI Inject
0 Chec
k for
air in
Delay syrin
0 ge and
PH3: - 0.1
Scan
Delay Tota
l Time
tubin
g
mL/s
1
Enab [Link]
PH4: - 0.1 mL 10
Durati
le
0
+
mL/s
1 on
mL 10
Durati Phase 0
on Delay

OptiB
Mem olus
ory
Timing
Setup Bolus

Resu
lts

Main

Console

Power Supply

Figure 2-1-1 System Components
WARNING!

No modification of this equipment is allowed.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 2-1-2

2.1.1 POWERHEAD
The powerhead includes an LCD display screen with touch screen capability for
selecting and recalling injection protocols. The powerhead has the capability of
editing injection protocols but not the ability to store new injection protocols.
New injection protocols are created at the console and sent to the powerhead
for non-volatile storage. Also, the injector set-up configuration is done through
SYSTEM FEATURES

the console and not the powerhead. Therefore the powerhead is intended to
2—OVERVIEW OF

operate with a console connected.

The powerhead contains a syringe pushrod, or Ram.

Powerhead Injection
LCD Display Indicator
Powerhead Manual
Ram Knob

To
50
ta

Pro
lm

0
to
L

co
N l
am
e
0:
To

O imin
ta
0

T
pti g
lT

En
0:

Bo B
im

ab
0
e

lu olu

19
1

s s
le

7
A
Pe 2
ak 5

Sc
3
an 0
PS

In
je
I

ct
ela

D
0

C
y

ela

he
ck
y

fo
ra
ir
Syringe
Holder
125 ml

Syringe
Holder
200 ml

Figure 2-2-1 Powerhead

847503-E 2017-04-21
 2-1-3

2.1.2 CONSOLE
The console contains an LCD display screen with touch screen capability for
programming, selecting, saving, and recalling injection protocols. The console
acts as a slave to the powerhead software. Also, all injection parameters are
stored in the powerhead. The console will send touch screen presses to the
powerhead and receive values to display back from the powerhead.

SYSTEM FEATURES
2—OVERVIEW OF
Connections to the console are located at the back (Refer to Figure 2-3-1).

(Rear View)

Console Data
and Power
Connection J1

Remote Start
Connection J2

(Front View)

Touch
Sensitive
Display
Screen

System
ON/OFF Button

Figure 2-3-1 Console

847503-E 2017-04-21
 2-1-4

2.1.3 REMOTE START

The Remote Start device which attaches to the rear of the console or to the
back of the Power Supply is included so that the injection process may be
started and stopped from outside the area.
2.1.4 POWER SUPPLY
SYSTEM FEATURES
2—OVERVIEW OF

The power supply contains communication circuitry to the CT scanner,

powerhead, and console. It also provides 24 VDC to the console and
powerhead.
The power supply contains an autoswitching transformer which automatically
adapts for input voltages from 100 to 240 V~. This unit is normally placed in the
equipment room.

ON/OFF Indicator

Figure 2-4-1. Power Supply Overview

WARNING!

To avoid risk of electric shock, this equipment must only be connected to a

supply mains with protective earth.

WARNING!
Unplug power cord to disconnect the powerpack from supply mains.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 2-1-5

2.1.5 TURNING THE SYSTEM POWER ON

Refer to Figure 2-5-1.

WARNING!
To avoid risk of electric shock, this equipment must only be connected to a
supply mains with protective earth.

SYSTEM FEATURES
2—OVERVIEW OF
WARNING!
Unplug power cord to disconnect the powerpack from supply mains.

1. At the rear of the power supply, place the switch to the ON position A . The blue
LED located on the top of the power supply will illuminate to indicate power is ON .

2. At the console, push the System ON/OFF button B or press on the powerhead
touch screen. The ON/OFF button on the console will illuminate to indicate power
to the console and powerhead is ON. The injector will perform a power-up check
sequence, then display screens on the powerhead and the console to position the
ram correctly for proper loading of the syringe.

A
J6
TM

O I
CAN
RS232/
RS422

J3
100-120V~/
230V~
50-60HZ
4 AMP

Power On
J2
J5 P4 J10B J10A J1

LED

Figure 2-5-1 Switching the System Power ON

847503-E 2017-04-21
 2-1-6

2.1.6 HOMING THE RAM

Each time power is cycled, the injector automatically performs a ram homing
sequence to position the ram properly for loading of the syringe.
WARNING!

Disconnect the tubing from the 125 mL syringe prior to performing the homing
SYSTEM FEATURES
2—OVERVIEW OF

sequence. Retracting the ram during the homing sequence, while connected to
tubing not containing a check valve, may cause inadvertent retraction of blood
from the patient.

Remove the 200 mL syringe prior to performing the homing sequence.

Expelling the ram during the homing sequence, when a 200 mL syringe is
loaded, may cause inadvertent injection of contrast into the patient.

Follow the instructions on the powerhead display to perform the homing

sequence.

2.1.7 TURNING THE SYSTEM POWER OFF

Refer to Figure 2-6-1.

At the console, push the ON/OFF button to switch the system OFF B . The
power supply can be left ON. This allows for quicker and easier restarts from the
console.

Figure 2-6-1 Switching the System Power OFF

847503-E 2017-04-21
 3-1-1

3 CONSOLE
AND POWERHEAD
Operating the OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System requires
knowledge of the operator interfaces located on both the console and the
powerhead. The console and powerhead both contain touch screen displays in

3—CONSOLE AND
order to interact with the operator.

POWERHEAD
Through use of the console’s touch screen display, the operator can:
• enter protocol parameters
• save protocols
• delete protocols
• recall protocols
• enable/start/stop an injection
• review achieved parameters of delivered protocols
Through use of the Powerhead’s touch screen display, the operator can:
• enter protocol parameters
• recall protocols
• fill/expel syringes
• enable/start/stop an injection

WARNING!
REVIEW PARAMETERS
Prior to delivering an injection, review all parameters thoroughly to ensure that
they are correct and appropriate for the procedure.

847503-E 2017-04-21
3-1-2

3.1 CONSOLE
3.1.1 CONSOLE POWER BUTTON
Refer to Figure 3-1-1.

Power Button/Power ON Indicator A — The LED located on the power button

glows to indicate that power is ON. With the power supply switch in the ON
position, the injector system can be powered ON and OFF through use of the
console power button.
3—CONSOLE AND
POWERHEAD

Protoc
PH1:
50
Peak PSI
125

ol Na
129

me
mL
Debu
g Pha
se & Sid
e
A
PH2: Inject
0 Check
for air
Del syring in
0
-
ay e and
tubing
PH3: 0.1
Scan Del
ay To tal
1
Enab [Link]Time
-
mL/s le
PH4: 0.1 mL 10 0
Duratio

+
mL/s
1 n
0

mL 10
Duratio Phase 0
n Delay

OptiB
Memo olus
ry
Timing
Setup Bolus

Resul
ts

Main

Figure 3-1-1 Console Power Button

3.1.2 CONSOLE DISPLAY MODES OF OPERATION

Refer to Figure 3-1-2.
Located along the lower portion of the console display are the following 4
keys: [Memory], [Setup], [Results] and [Main]. These keys allow access to their
respective modes of operation.
Main Screen — Upon power-up, this screen is automatically displayed as shown
in Figure 3-1-2. All protocol information needed by the injector is contained
within the Main screen. To access the Main screen when displaying the Results
screen, Setup screen or Memory screen, press the active [Main] key located on
the lower right-hand side of the screen.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 3-1-3

Enabled Main Screen — The Enabled Main screen allows for the delivery of the
main protocol.
Memory Screen — All stored protocol information is located within the Memory
screen. Accessing this screen allows the operator to recall, store, rename and
delete protocols. To access the Memory screen, press the [Memory] key B
located on the lower portion of the screen.
Setup Screen — Accessing this screen allows the operator to change the
language, change the unit of measure for pressure, set the time, set parameter

3—CONSOLE AND
defaults, display the Alarm History, access the service mode and more. To

POWERHEAD
access the Setup screen, press the [Setup] key C located on the lower portion
of the screen.
Results Screen — All information pertaining to the results of a delivered
injection is located within the Results screen. To access the Results screen, press
the [Results] key D located on the lower portion of the screen.

Check for air in

50 47 mL syringe and tubing

PROTOCOL1 Total Time

[Link]
325 0 0 Enable
Peak PSI Inject Delay Scan Delay

PH1: 3.0 10 3 25
mL/s mL Duration Phase Delay

PH2: - 3.0 10 3 10
mL/s mL Duration Phase Delay

PH3: - 2.0 20 10
mL/s mL Duration

PH4: +

OptiBolus Timing Bolus

B C D
Memory Setup Results Main

Figure 3-1-2 Console Main Screen with Location of Mode Keys

847503-E 2017-04-21
3-1-4

3.1.3 CONSOLE MAIN SCREEN (PROTOCOL PARAMETER ENTRY SCREEN)

Refer to Figure 3-1-3 and Figure 3-1-4.

Protocol Name E — The name of the protocol currently displayed on the Main
Screen is located in this area of the screen. An asterisk located at the end of
the name indicates that the displayed parameters have been modified and no
longer match the originally stored parameters.

Syringe Size F — This information indicates the size of the syringe currently
3—CONSOLE AND

installed in the powerhead. Note that contrast parameters are indicated by the
POWERHEAD

color yellow.
Remaining Volume F1 — This information indicates the remaining volume in the
installed syringe.

Phase H — Within a protocol, up to four phases can be input. Phases can

be added or removed by pressing the “+” or “-” keys AA . The phase will be
indicated by a number (1 through 4). “PH” is the abbreviation of Phase.

Flow J — The values entered in this column indicate rate of delivery of the
contrast medium during each respective phase. Flow is expressed in milliliters/
second.

Volume K — The values entered in this column indicate the volume of

contrast medium to be delivered during each respective phase. Volume is
expressed in milliliters.

Duration L — The value in this column indicates the duration of a protocol

phase (i.e., time to complete injection in seconds) based on the entered volume
and flow rate values. Duration is displayed in the nearest whole second.

Phase Delay M — Phase Delay is a countdown timer that delays the start of
the next phase. The next phase will start when the phase delay counter reaches
0 (zero). Phase Delay is expressed in seconds. Phase Delay can also be set to
pause the injection. Access the Pause feature by scrolling past either the 0
(zero) lower limit or the 600 (six-hundred) upper limit.

Total Time N — The Total Time field is an accumulation of all the calculated
Duration and input Phase Delay fields for all phases (not including Scan Delay).
The total time field starts counting up from 0 (zero) after the injector receives
a start signal. Total time continues to count after the injection is completed
as long as the Results screen is displayed or up to 21 minutes. Total time is
expressed in hours:minutes:seconds.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 3-1-5

Inject Delay O — Inject Delay is a countdown timer that begins counting

when the Start command is activated. The injection is started when the inject
delay counter reaches 0 (zero). If Inject Delay is greater than 0 (zero), Scan Delay
is automatically set to 0 (zero). Inject Delay is expressed in seconds.

Scan Delay P — Scan Delay is a countdown timer that begins counting when
the Start command is activated and stops when the counter reaches 0 (zero).
Three beeps occur when the timer reaches 10 seconds. Two beeps occur
when the timer reaches 5 seconds. One beep occurs during the last second.

3—CONSOLE AND
If the scanner is interfaced with the injector, a signal is sent to the CT Scanner

POWERHEAD
indicating that scan delay time has expired when the timer reaches 0 seconds.
If no OEM interface is present, only an audible beep will be heard instructing
the user to start the scanner. If Scan Delay is greater than 0 (zero), Inject Delay is
automatically set to 0 (zero). Scan Delay is expressed in seconds.

Peak PSI/Peak kPa (Pressure Limit) Q — The value set in this key indicates the
maximum allowable pressure that can occur during an injection. Pressure is
expressed in either PSI or kPa. Refer to section 3.1.6 Setup Screen Parameters
and Symbols for more information about changing the unit of measure.

Enable R — This key is only active when proper enabling sequence is

followed and after the Powerhead is tilted downward. Refer to Chapter 4
for more information. Pressing the active [Enable] key “enables” the injector
(displays the [Start] key) for delivery of a protocol.

OptiBolus (optional) S — This key is only active if a port-key is present at the

OptiBolus port located on the rear of the power supply. Pressing this key allows
the operator to program an OptiBolus injection. The OptiBolus Mode delivers
an exponentially decaying flow rate injection that optimizes the contrast
usage and provides an extended period of uniform enhancement of the area
of interest. Once the [OptiBolus] key S is pressed, the screen shown in Figure
3-1-6 is displayed. Note the addition of the OptiBolus symbol V to the left
of the first phase along with the addition of End Flow Rate W . End Flow Rate
W is a function of the OptiBolus mode and is automatically calculated by the
OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System for the entered parameters and
is displayed only on the console Main screen.

Timing Bolus T — This key is only active if turned ON at the Setup Screen.
Pressing this key allows the operator to program a Timing Bolus injection. A
Timing Bolus injection—an injection of a small volume of contrast—can be
delivered to the patient to determine the optimal scan delay needed to capture
the contrast agent in the area of interest. Once the [Timing Bolus] key T is
pressed, the screen shown in Figure 3-1-6 is displayed. Note the addition of
“Test” X to the left of the first phase.

847503-E 2017-04-21
3-1-6

Change Parameter Values via the Slide Bar U — To change the value of a
parameter, select the desired parameter by touching its key. The key will
highlight to indicate it is active and the slide bar will display at the bottom of
the screen. Touch the slide bar at the value required, or use the left and right
double arrows to decrease or increase the value. Use the left and right single
arrows to decrease or increase the value in smaller increments. The slide bar will
be removed from the screen after 3 seconds or after touching the highlighted
parameter key again.
3—CONSOLE AND

Check for air in

50 47 mL syringe and tubing
F F1 E
POWERHEAD

PROTOCOL1 Total Time

N [Link]
325 Q 0 O 0 P R
Peak PSI Inject Delay Scan Delay
Enable

H PH1: J 3.0 10 K 3 L 25 M
mL/s mL Duration Phase Delay

PH2: - 3.0 10 3 10
mL/s mL Duration Phase Delay

PH3: - 2.0 20 10
mL/s mL Duration

PH4: +

S OptiBolus
T Timing Bolus

Memory Setup Results Main

Figure 3-1-3 Console Main Screen

Check for air in
50 47 mL syringe and tubing
F F1 PROTOCOL1 Total Time
N [Link]
325 Q 0 O 0 P R
Peak PSI Inject Delay Scan Delay
Enable

H PH1: J 3.0 10 K 3 L 25 M
Z mL/s mL Duration Phase Delay

PH2: - 3.0 10 3 10
mL/s mL Duration Phase Delay

PH3: - 2.0 20 10
mL/s mL Duration

PH4: +

U U U
1 25 50 75 100 125

Memory Setup Results Main

Figure 3-1-4 Console Main Screen with Active Slide Bar

847503-E 2017-04-21
 3-1-7

Check for air in

75 79 mL
syringe and tubing
OPTI TEST Total Time
[Link]
325 0 0 Enable
Peak PSI Inject Delay Scan Delay

V OptiBolus 3.0 75 29 2.2 W

mL/s mL Duration End Flow

PH2: +

3—CONSOLE AND
POWERHEAD
S OptiBolus Timing Bolus

Memory Setup Results Main

Figure 3-1-5 Console OptiBolus Injection Screen

Check for air in

125 129 mL
syringe and tubing
OPTI TEST Total Time
[Link]
325 0 0 Enable
Peak PSI Inject Delay Scan Delay

X Test 3.0 20 7 Pause

mL/s mL Duration

PH1: 3.0 75 25 0
mL/s mL Duration Phase Delay

PH2: - 2.0 10 5
mL/s mL Duration

PH3: +

OptiBolus
T Timing Bolus

Memory Setup Results Main

Figure 3-1-6 Console Timing Bolus Injection Screen

847503-E 2017-04-21
3-1-8

3.1.4 ENABLED CONSOLE MAIN SCREEN (START SCREEN)

Refer to Figure 3-1-7.
After pressing the active [Enable] key, the screen shown in Figure 3-1-7 is
displayed. From this screen, the operator can change parameters, program an
OptiBolus injection, program a Timing Bolus injection, or start the delivery of
the protocol.

Start Z — This key starts the delivery of the programmed protocol.

3—CONSOLE AND

Disable BB — This key allows the injector to disable from the enabled mode.
POWERHEAD

Z
50 47 mL Start
PROTOCOL1 Total Time
[Link]
325 0 0
Peak PSI Inject Delay Scan Delay Enable

PH1: 3.0 10 3 25
mL/s mL Duration Phase Delay

PH2: - 3.0 10 3 10
mL/s mL Duration Phase Delay

PH3: - 2.0 20 10
mL/s mL Duration

PH4: +

OptiBolus Timing Bolus

BB
Disable

Figure 3-1-7 Enabled Console Main Screen

847503-E 2017-04-21
 3-1-9

3.1.5 MEMORY SCREEN

Refer to Figure 3-1-8.
NOTE: If password protection is ON, moving, deleting, renaming or storing
protocols is not permitted unless the correct password is entered.

Memory Location A — The unit can store up to 40 four-phase protocols with 8

protocols listed per page. Each protocol can have a name consisting of up to 20
alpha-numeric characters. To display the protocol on the Main Screen, simply
press the Protocol’s corresponding key.

3—CONSOLE AND
POWERHEAD
Protocol Parameters B — Each protocol can contain up to four phases.

Current Values C — The current values displayed on the Main screen are
located in this area.

Memory Page Number D — The memory screen contains five pages with eight
protocols listed per page.

Move E — This key allows the operator to move a protocol into a different slot
within a page.

Delete F — This key activates the delete feature. Press the [Delete] key, then
press the key of the protocol to be deleted.

Edit G — This key allows the operator to edit the name of a protocol.

Store H — This key stores the current values into a protocol memory slot.
Cancel (not shown) — This key is only displayed after pressing the [Move]
key, the [Delete] key, the [Edit] key or the [Store] key and is used to cancel the
feature.

Main I — This key allows the operator to return to the Main screen.

847503-E 2017-04-21
3-1-10

E Move F Delete G Edit Name H Store

Phase mL/s mL sec Phase mL/s mL sec

B
T 0.1 20 P 3 0.1 1

A OPTI TEST 0
2
0.1
0.1
1
1 Peak PSI 50
0 6.5 10 26 4 5.0 20
OPTI 2 10.0 10 10
3 5.0 20 Peak PSI 325
1 6.5 10 25
PROTOCOL1 2 10.0 10 10
3 5.0 20 Peak PSI 325
T 0.1 20 P 3 0.1 1
TEST BOLUS 1 0.1 1
2 0.1 1 Peak PSI 50
3—CONSOLE AND
POWERHEAD

Memory Current
Page C Value Peak PSI 50

D 1 2 3 4 5 I Main

Figure 3-1-8 Memory Screen Keys and Definitions

Recall a Protocol
Refer to Figure 3-1-8.
1. Access the Protocol Memory menu by pressing the [Memory] key located on
the bottom of the Console Main screen.

2. Press the appropriate page (1, 2, 3, 4 or 5) D on which the Protocol is stored.

A
3. Press the key of the desired Protocol Name. The protocol will be
immediately displayed on both the powerhead display and the console
display.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 3-1-11

Store a Protocol in Memory

Refer to Figure 3-1-8 and Figure 3-1-9. This feature is only accessible from the
console.
1. Enter all required parameters on the Main screen.
2. Access the Protocol Memory menu by pressing the [Memory] key located on
the bottom of the console Main screen.

3. Press the appropriate page (1, 2, 3, 4 or 5) D on which to store the Protocol.

3—CONSOLE AND
4. Press the [Store] key H . The display will prompt the user with “Select

POWERHEAD
memory location.”

5. Press the desired memory location key A . A keyboard will appear in order
to name the protocol. Refer to Figure 3-1-9.
6. Enter the desired name using the keyboard. Press the keyboard
[Enter] key J when finished. The protocol will be stored at the memory
location selected.

Move Delete Edit Name Store

Phase mL/s mL sec Phase mL/s mL sec

T 0.1 20 P 3 0.1 1
OPTI TEST 0 0.1 1
2 0.1 1 Peak PSI 50
0 6.5 10 26 4 5.0 20
OPTI 2 10.0 10 10
3 5.0 20 Peak PSI 325
1 6.5 10 25 5 4 B 0.1 1
10 5 A 0.1 1
PROTOCOL1 2 10.0 10 10
5 6 B 0.1 1
3 5.0 20 Peak PSI 325
T 03.3 1
0.1
2.2
20
8472
P 3 3 0.1 41 5 6 7 8 9
TEST BOLUS 1 0.1 1
2 0.1 1 Peak PSI 50

Q3.3 W 225E
2.8 R T Y U I O P

A S D F G H J K L
630
Z X C V B N M

Caps On Cancel Space <- Enter J

Memory Current
Page Value Peak PSI 50

Main
1 2 3 4 5

Figure 3-1-9 Memory Keyboard

847503-E 2017-04-21
3-1-12

Move a Protocol in Memory

Refer to Figure 3-1-8. This feature is only accessible from the console.
1. Access the Protocol Memory menu by pressing the [Memory] key located on
the bottom of the console Main screen.

2. Press the appropriate page (1, 2, 3, 4 or 5) D on which the Protocol is stored.

3. Press the [Move] key E . The display will prompt the user with “Select
protocol to move.”
3—CONSOLE AND
POWERHEAD

4. Press the key of the protocol to be moved. The display will prompt the user
with “Select position to insert moved protocol.”

5. Press the desired memory location key A onto which the Protocol is to
be relocated. The protocols will be shifted upwards or downwards to
accommodate the new location of the moved protocol.
Delete a Protocol from Memory
Refer to Figure 3-1-8. This feature is only accessible from the console.
1. Access the Protocol Memory menu by pressing the [Memory] key located on
the bottom of the console Main screen.

2. Press the appropriate page (1, 2, 3, 4, or 5) D on which the Protocol is stored.

3. Press the [Delete] key F . The display will prompt the user with “Select
protocol to delete.”
4. Press the key of the protocol to be deleted. The display will prompt the
user with “Are you sure?” Pressing the [Yes] key deletes the protocol from
memory. Pressing the [No] key returns the display to the Memory screen
without deleting the protocol from memory.
NOTE: If a protocol is deleted from memory, then an immediate attempt is
made to save a protocol of the same name in memory, the user will be
prompted to save the protocol with a different name or cancel.
Rename (Edit Name) a Protocol Name or Page
Refer to Figure 3-1-8 and Figure 3-1-9. This feature is only accessible from the
console.
1. Access the Protocol Memory menu by pressing the [Memory] key located on
the bottom of the console Main screen.

2. Press the appropriate page (1, 2, 3, 4 or 5) D on which the Protocol is stored.

3. Press the [Edit Name] key G . The display will prompt the user with “Select
protocol to rename.”

847503-E 2017-04-21
 3-1-13

4. Press the key of the protocol to be renamed and enter the new name using
the displayed keyboard (shown in Figure 3-1-9. Press the keyboard [Enter]
key J when finished. The protocol will be stored under the new name at
the same memory location.

3.1.6 SETUP
Refer to Figures 3-1-10 and 3-1-11.

3—CONSOLE AND
Access the Setup screens by pressing the [Setup] key B ( on Figure 3-1-2)

POWERHEAD
located on the Main Screen of the console. NOTE: The Setup Screen and its
features are not accessible from the powerhead screen. Also, if password
protection is ON, access to the Setup screens is not permitted unless the correct
password is entered.
The Setup Screen allows the operator to adjust injection parameters, set the
time and date, select the language, enter the service mode, and view the alarm
history of the injector. Use the [<, >] keys C to toggle between the two set up
screens.

Date and Time A — Indicates the Date and Time as set in item D .

Software Versions B — Indicates the software installed in the console,

powerhead, and the current Scanner Interface software.

[<, >] keys C — These keys allow the user to toggle between the two Set Up
screens as shown in Figure 3-1-10 and 3-1-11.

[Time] key D — This key allows the user to set the time and date. Refer to
Figure 3-1-13.

[Language] key E — This key allows the user to change the language of the
injector. Refer to Figure 3-1-14.

[Service] key F — This key allows service personnel access to the service
screens. NOTE: The powerhead service screens are only accessible through use
of a service key. Refer to the Service Manual.

[Alarm] key G — The injector’s alarm history is accessible through use of this
key.

[Main] key H — This key allows the user to exit the Set Up screens and return
to the Main Screen.

847503-E 2017-04-21
3-1-14

OEM Interface I — Select On or Off. Selecting “On” allows the OEM Interface
to exercise limited control over the injector. Selecting “Off” disables the OEM
Interface.

Timing Bolus J — Select either On or Off. If On is selected, a [Timing Bolus] key

will be made available on the Main screen to deliver a “Timing Bolus” injection to
determine the ideal scan delay for optimum image quality.

Pause on Pressure Limit Q — Select either On or Off. Selecting “On” will cause
the injector to pause automatically in the instance of a pressure limited injection
3—CONSOLE AND

(where the injection pressure reaches max psi / kPa). Selecting “Off” will allow
POWERHEAD

the injector to continue injecting at a lower flow rate so as not to exceed the
max pressure limit but will also display a message giving the operator the ability
to either Stop or Continue.

Pressure Limit R — Select either Manual or Auto. Selecting “Manual” allows the
operator to input a value for Peak Pressure Limit on the Main screen. Selecting
“Auto” allows the injector to calculate a default value based on the highest
flow rate of the displayed protocol. However, this value can be updated by the
operator on the Main screen.

WARNING!

Personal injury may result from leaks or rupture during an injection. If using
catheters, connectors and tubing not rated for a minimum of 325 psi (2241 kPa),
use manual mode to select a pressure limit that is appropriate for the product.

Pressure Units S — Select either PSI or kPa.

Auto-Fill T — Select either On or Off. If On is selected, the Auto-Fill feature is

available to the operator to fill a 200 mL syringe automatically while minimizing
the introduction of air.

Injection Duration Display W — Select either On or Off. Selecting Off removes

the Injection Duration value (time to complete injection in seconds) from the
Main Screen.

Phase Delay Display X — Select either On or Off. Selecting Off removes the
[Phase Delay] key and its value from the Main Screen.

Console Brightness (display) Y — Select between Low or High.

Console Volume (display) Z — Select among Off, Low, Med or High.

Powerhead Brightness (display) a — Select between Low or High.

Powerhead Volume (display) b — Select among Off, Low, Med or High.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 3-1-15

Partial Pre-Fills d — Select either On or Off. Select On if Partial Pre-Fill syringes

are to be used.

Password e — Once Password is set to ON, a keyboard, as shown in

Figure 3-1-12, is displayed to enter and re-enter the password. When Password
is set to ON, access to the Setup screen and storing protocols in memory is only
available after entering the password.
NOTE: If the password feature is ‘on’ and the user is editing an injection
protocol on the console and then attempts to enter the set up screen on the

3—CONSOLE AND
console within 3 seconds, the console screen may not respond to further

POWERHEAD
touches. To exit the condition, press any key on the powerhead screen.

Inject Delay Display h — Select either On or Off. Select Off to remove the key
from the Main Screen.

Scan Delay Display i — Select either On or Off. Select Off to remove the key
from the Main Screen.

A SEP 19 2013 16:58 Injector Set Up

B Console: D01.02.00 Powerhead: D01.00.04 OEM Interface: D01.01.00

I OEM Interface On Timing Bolus On J

Q Pause On Pressure Limit Off Pressure Limit Manual R
S Pressure Units PSI Auto-Fill On T

<
C >

H
Set Up D Time E Language F Service G Alarms Main

Figure 3-1-10 Injector Set Up Screen 1

847503-E 2017-04-21
3-1-16

SEP 19 2013 16:59 Injector Set Up

Console: D01.02.00 Powerhead: D01.00.04 OEM Interface: D01.01.00

w Injection Duration Display On Phase Delay Display On x

y Console Brightness Low Console Volume Low z
a Powerhead Brightness High Powerhead Volume Low b
d Partial Pre-Fills On Password Off e
h Inject Delay Display On Scan Delay Display On i
3—CONSOLE AND
POWERHEAD

> <

Set Up Time Language Service Alarms Main

Figure 3-1-11 Injector Set Up Screen 2

SEP 19 2013 16:59 Injector Set Up
Console: D01.02.00 Powerhead: D01.00.04 OEM Interface: D01.01.00

Injection Duration Display On Phase Delay Display On

Console Brightness Low PasswordConsole Volume Low

Powerhead Brightness 0 1High 472 3 Powerhead

4 5 Volume
6 7 8 9
Low
2.2
Partial Pre-Fills On Password Off
Q
2.8 W 5E R T Y U I O P
Inject Delay Display On Scan Delay Display On
A S D F G H J K L
630
Z X C V B N M

Caps On Cancel Space <- Enter

> <

Set Up Time Language Service Alarms Main

Figure 3-1-12 Enter Password

847503-E 2017-04-21
 3-1-17

Time/Date
Refer to Figure 3-1-13.

Access the ability to set the Time and Date by pressing the [Time] key D
located on the Injector Set Up screen.

Press the [Change Date] key i and/or the [Change Time] j key to update
the date and time. Use the [ ] keys k to select the desired date and time.
After changing the Date and/or Time to the desired value, press the [Set Date]

3—CONSOLE AND
key l and/or the [Set Time] key m for the change to take effect.

POWERHEAD
SEP 19 2013 16:58 Injector Set Up
Console: D01.02.00 Powerhead: D01.00.04 OEM Interface: D01.01.00

OEM Interface On Timing Bolus On

Pause On Pressure Limit On Pressure Limit Manual

Pressure Units PSI Auto-Fill On

< >
D E F G
Set Up Time Language Service Alarms Main

SEP 19 2013 17:11 Injector Set Up SEP 19 2013 17:21 Injector Set Up
Console: D01.02.00 Powerhead: D01.00.04 OEM Interface: D01.01.00 Console: D01.02.00 Powerhead: D01.00.04 OEM Interface: D01.01.00

i j m
Change Date Change Time I Set Date Set Time
k
SEP 19 2013 17:11 SEP 19 2013 17:11

Set Up Time Language Service Alarms Main Set Up Time Language Service Alarms Main

Figure 3-1-13 Setting the Time/Date

847503-E 2017-04-21
3-1-18

Language
Refer to Figure 3-1-14.

Access the ability to select the Language by pressing the [Language] key E
located on the Injector Set Up screen. Select the Language from among the
selections displayed.
SEP 19 2013 16:58 Injector Set Up
Console: D01.02.00 Powerhead: D01.00.04 OEM Interface: D01.01.00
3—CONSOLE AND
POWERHEAD

OEM Interface On Timing Bolus On

Pause On Pressure Limit On Pressure Limit Manual

Pressure Units PSI Auto-Fill On

< >

D E F G
Set Up Time Language Service Alarms Main

SEP 19 2013 17:12 Injector Set Up

Console: D01.02.00 Powerhead: D01.00.04 OEM Interface: D01.01.00

English On Français Off

Deutsch Off Italiano Off

Español Off Português Off

Nederlands Off Dansk Off

Svenska Off Simplified Chinese Off

Korean Off

Set Up Time Language Service Alarms Main

Figure 3-1-14 Selecting the Language

847503-E 2017-04-21
 3-1-19

Alarms
Refer to Figure 3-1-15

Display the Alarm History screen by pressing the [Alarm] key G located on
the Injector Set Up screen. Pressing the [<, >] keys n , displays the most
recent Alarms (up to 24) (on the console screen only) along with the protocol’s
settings at the time of the alarm.

Injector Set Up

3—CONSOLE AND
SEP 19 2013 16:58

Console: D01.02.00 Powerhead: D01.00.04 OEM Interface: D01.01.00

POWERHEAD
OEM Interface On Timing Bolus On

Pause On Pressure Limit Off Pressure Limit Manual

Pressure Units PSI Auto-Fill On

< >
G
Set Up Time Language Service Alarms Main

Page 2 Alarm History Alarm Occurred on

SEP 19 2013 16:02
Alarm - 0x2046
P1 = 0x0001 P2 = 0x0026 P3 = 0x0000 P4 = 0x0000 P5 = 0x0000 IS = 0x0000
Phase mL/s mL sec Phase mL/s mL sec
1 0.1 1
OPTI* 2 10.0 1
3 5.0 1 Peak PSI 50

OEM Interface On Timing Bolus On Pause On Pressure Limit On

Pressure Limit Manual Pressure Units PSI Auto-Fill On

Injection Duration Display On Phase Delay Display On Console Brightness Low

Console Volume Low Powerhead Brightness High Powerhead Volume Low

Partial Pre-Fills On Password Off Inject Delay Display On

Scan Delay Display On

n n
> >
Set Up Time Language Service Alarms Main

D E F G

Figure 3-1-15 Alarm Screen

847503-E 2017-04-21
3-1-20

3.1.7 RESULTS SCREEN PARAMETERS AND SYMBOLS

Refer to Figure 3-1-16 through 3-1-18
The Results Screen is automatically displayed after the delivery of an injection
and only shows the achieved results of that injection. The Results screen is
displayed for either 21 minutes or until the [Main] key is pressed. Refer to
Figure 3-1-16.

Pressing the [Results] key on the Main screen ( D in Figure 3-1-17) , however,
displays the results of the last 24 injections (on the console screen only) as
3—CONSOLE AND

shown in Figure 3-1-17. Press the [ ] arrows o to toggle through all

POWERHEAD

24 injection results. Press the [Setup] key p to display the protocol’s settings
as shown in Figure 3-1-18.

Injection Complete
50 14 mL 40 Results SEP 19 2013 17:30
PROTOCOL1
Total Time
[Link]
0 0
Inject Delay Scan Delay

PH1: 3.0 10 3 25
mL/s mL Duration Phase Delay
PH2: 3.0 10 3 10
mL/s mL Duration Phase Delay
PH3: 2.0 20 10
mL/s mL Duration

PH4:

Main
Pressure 0 50 100 150 200 250 300
PSI

Figure 3-1-16 Results Screen displayed after delivery of an Injection

847503-E 2017-04-21
 3-1-21

Check for air in

50 47 mL syringe and tubing

PROTOCOL1 Total Time

[Link]
325 0 0 Enable
Peak PSI Inject Delay Scan Delay

PH1: 3.0 10 3 25
mL/s mL Duration Phase Delay

PH2: - 3.0 10 3 10
mL/s mL Duration Phase Delay

PH3: - 2.0 20 10

3—CONSOLE AND
mL/s mL Duration

PH4:

POWERHEAD
+

OptiBolus Timing Bolus

D
Memory Setup Results Main

Results History
Injection Complete
SEP 18 2013 12:33

This injection was pressure limited.

Injection stalled.
OPTI*

Phase mL/s mL sec Phase mL/s mL sec

1 10.0 1 4 5.0 1
Programmed Protocol 2 10.0 1
3 5.0 1 Peak PSI 50
1 0.6 1
Achieved Values
Peak PSI 38

Page 2
o o

p
Setup Main

Figure 3-1-17 Results Screen displayed after pressing the [Results] Key

847503-E 2017-04-21
3-1-22

Results History
Injection Complete
SEP 18 2013 12:33

This injection was pressure limited.

Injection stalled.
OPTI*

OEM Interface On Timing Bolus On Pause On Pressure Limit On

Pressure Limit Manual Pressure Units PSI Auto-Fill On

Injection Duration Display On Phase Delay Display On Console Brightness Low

3—CONSOLE AND

Console Volume Low Powerhead Brightness High Powerhead Volume Low

POWERHEAD

Partial Pre-Fills On Password Off Inject Delay Display On

Scan Delay Display On

Close Main

Figure 3-1-18 Setup Information displayed after pressing the [Setup] Key

847503-E 2017-04-21
 3-2-1

3.2 POWERHEAD
3.2.1 POWERHEAD POWER ON DISPLAY
Refer to Figure 3-2-1.
Power ON Display — With the power supply switch in the ON position, the
powerhead display acts as a power ON switch. Simply press and hold down for
2 (two) seconds to turn the injector system ON.

3— CONSOLE AND
POWERHEAD
To
50
ta

Pr
lm

ot
L

oc
ol
Na
m
e
0:0 ble
To 0

O min
ta :0

Ti
pt g
l Ti

Ena

iB
m 1

ol
e

us lus

19
Bo
A

7
A
Pe
ak

Sc
32
an 0
PS

In
5

je
I

De

ct
lay

De
0

Ch
lay

ec
k
fo
r air

Figure 3-2-1 Powerhead Power ON Display

847503-E 2017-04-21
3-2-2

3.2.2 MANUAL KNOB

Refer to Figure 3-2-2.
By turning the knob, the operator can move the ram/plunger. This is useful in
the instance of purging air from the syringe and when drawing back blood to
ensure proper venous placement of the catheter.

Turn the manual knob A clockwise to advance the ram/plunger. Refer to the
following table for the manual knob light status.
AND POWERHEAD
3— CONSOLE

Manual Knobs Light Status Definition

Flashing Blue Injector powering up.

Solid Yellow Enabled or injecting contrast (Yellow)

Flashing Yellow Injector paused

Flashing Red Alarm Condition

Flashing Blue quickly Injector rotated vertically or 30 degrees below horizontal.

847503-E 2017-04-21
3-2-3

3— CONSOLE AND
POWERHEAD

847503-E 2017-04-21
A

0
Figure 3-2-2 Powerhead Indicator

PProro
totoc 19
cool
im 7
TTim 7
l NNaa OOp inin
mme ptiti gg
BBoo BBoo
50
e
lulus lulus
s s
TToota
ta l AA CChh
l mm eecck
LL k fo
fo
rr aair
AA
ir
EEnn
a
0: abblele InInje 00
00
TToota
jec
ctt D
:0
ta l Dee
1
l TTim
im e SScca 00
lalay
y
e ann
DDee
lalay
3
32 y
PPeea 255
akk
PPSSI
I
.
3-2-4

3.2.3 POWERHEAD SYRINGE LOAD LATCHES

Refer to Figure 3-2-3.

125 mL Syringe Load Latch A — This latch is pushed up from the bottom to
allow loading of a 125 mL syringe. Push the latch down to lock the syringe
in the syringe adapter.

200 mL Syringe Load/Unload Latch B — This latch rotates counterclockwise

to allow loading or unloading B1 of a 200 mL syringe. Rotate the latch
clockwise to lock B the syringe in the pressure sleeve.
AND POWERHEAD

2
3— CONSOLE

To
50
ta

Pr
m l

ot
L

oc
ol
Na
m
e
0:
To

O in
ta
0

Tim 7
pt g
l
0:
En
Tim

iB B
olu olu
01
ab
e

19
s s
le

A
A
Pe 25
ak
3

Sc 0
PS

an

In
I

De

je 0
ct
la

De
y

Ch
la

ck e
y

fo
ra
ir
A

B1 B2

Top View

Figure 3-2-3 125 mL Syringe Load Clamp and 200 mL Syringe Load Lever

847503-E 2017-04-21
 3-2-5

3.2.4 HEATER BLANKET CONNECTION

Refer to Figure 3-2-4.

Non-RFID 125 mL Syringe Adapter A — The non-RFID 125 mL syringe adapter

contains a built in heater to maintain the temperature of preheated contrast.
Connection of the heater blanket/syringe size sensor is as shown in
Figure 3-2-4.

200 mL Heater Blanket B — The 200 mL heater blanket maintains the

temperature of preheated contrast. Connection of the heater blanket is as

3— CONSOLE AND
shown in Figure 3-2-4.

POWERHEAD
A

Figure 3-2-4 Heater Blanket Connections

847503-E 2017-04-21
3-2-6

3.2.5 POWERHEAD DISPLAY MODES OF OPERATION

Refer to Figure 3-2-5 and Figure 3-2-6.

Main Screen — The powerhead Main screen A is shown in Figure 3-2-5.

Only a summary of the total volume of contrast media to be delivered by
the programmed protocol is displayed on the powerhead Main screen. The
complete protocol is displayed on the expanded Protocol Parameter Entry
screen C .

Fill/Expel Arrows — The [Syringe] key B , located in the upper portion of the
AND POWERHEAD

Main screen, changes to the fill/expel arrows as shown in Figure 3-2-5. Press on
3— CONSOLE

the [Syringe] key to activate the fill/expel arrows.

Pressing on the active fill/expel arrows will retract/expel the ram at a rate that
is proportional to the position touched in a range from 0.5 mL/s to 15 mL/s.
Pressing the fill arrows for longer than 2 seconds will latch plunger movement.
Once plunger movement has latched on, press anywhere on the powerhead
display to cease plunger movement. Refer to Figure 3-2-6. NOTE: The fill/expel
arrows do not appear if the injector is enabled.

Protocol Parameter Entry Screen C — To access the Protocol Parameter Entry

screen, press any parameter key D located on the powerhead Main Screen. The
Protocol Parameter Entry screen allows modification of the parameters as well
as access to the Memory screen. To access the powerhead Main screen when
displaying the Protocol Parameter Entry screen, press the [Main] key F located
on the lower portion of the screen.
Enabled Main Screen — The Enabled Main screen allows for the delivery of the
main protocol.
Memory Screen — All stored protocol information is located on the Memory
screen. Displaying the powerhead Memory screen allows the operator to only
recall protocols. Storing, renaming and deleting protocols is only available on
the Console Memory screen. To access the powerhead Memory screen, press
the [Memory] key E located on the lower portion of the Protocol Parameter
Entry screen as shown in Figure 3-2-5. When the Memory screen is displayed,
press the [Main] key F to display the Main screen.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 3-2-7

PR Tota
OT
O m
CO
L1

40
l
*
L
0:
To
ta
00 Ena
l T 42
im
: ble
e

Op
tiB

12
olu

9
s
A
Pe 25

A
ak
3

Sc
PS

an

In
I

De

je
0
ct
la

Ch
y

De
0

ec
la

k
y

fo
ra
ir

3— CONSOLE AND
POWERHEAD
123

40 A
0
Inject Delay
Total mL A

PROTOCOL1*
0
Scan Delay
Enable
325
[Link] Peak PSI
Total Time

B
50 129 Check for air

40 D A
0
Inject Delay
B Main Screen with
Total mL A Active Fill/Expel Arrows
PROTOCOL1*
0
Scan Delay
325 0 0 [Link]
Enable Peak PSI Inject Delay Scan Delay Total Time
325
[Link] Peak PSI
1
3.0 10 3 25
mL/s mL/s Duration Phase Delay
Total Time

2 - 3.0 10 3 10
mL/s mL/s Duration Phase Delay

A Main Screen 3 - 2.0 20 10

mL/s mL/s Duration

Next OptiBolus Timing Bolus

E Memory Main
F
C Protocol Parameter Entry Screen

Figure 3-2-5 Powerhead Interfaces

847503-E 2017-04-21
3-2-8

A 123

40 OptiBolus
A
0
Inject Delay
Total mL A

PROTOCOL1*
0
Scan Delay
Enable
325
[Link] Peak PSI
Total Time
AND POWERHEAD
3— CONSOLE

PR

40
O

To L1
TO

ta *
CO

lm
L

12
O

3
pti
Bo
lu
0:0Total

s
0:4Time

En

A
2

a
ble

In
je

0
ct
Sc

D
an

ela
0
D

y
32k PS
Pe

ela
a

5I

Figure 3-2-6 Fill/Expel Arrow Range of Speed

3.2.6 POWERHEAD MAIN SCREEN

Refer to Figures 3-2-5, 3-2-6, 3-2-7, and 3-2-8.

Syringe (mL)/Fill/Expel arrows A — The syringe symbol indicates the relative

position of the plunger in the syringe thus indicating how much fluid may be in
the syringe. Pressing the syringe symbol activates the Fill/Expel arrows in order
to move the ram/plunger.
Fill/Expel arrows — Upon pressing the [Syringe] key, the fill/expel arrows are
activated. See Figure 3-2-5. Pressing on the fill/expel arrows will retract/expel
the ram at a rate that is proportional to the position touched in a range from 0.1
mL/s to 15 mL/s. Pressing the retract fill arrows for longer than 2 seconds will
latch ram retraction movement. Once ram retraction movement has latched on,
the arrows will turn green and have a white background. Press anywhere on the
powerhead display to cease latched movement. See Figure 3-2-6.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 3-2-9

Total mL (Contrast) D — This key indicates the total volume of contrast to

be delivered by the protocol. Contrast parameters are indicated by the color
yellow. To access the protocol information, press any parameter key to display
the Protocol Parameter Entry screen as shown in Figure 3-2-5 C .

Protocol Name E — The name of the protocol currently displayed on the Main
Screen.

Display Orientation F — To view the powerhead display from either side of the
powerhead, the [Display Orientation] key allows the screen to flip as shown in

3— CONSOLE AND
Figure 3-2-8.

POWERHEAD
Enable G — Only active after proper enabling sequence is followed and
when the Powerhead is tilted downward, pressing this key “enables” or
readies the injector for delivery of a protocol.

Inject Delay H — Inject Delay is a countdown timer that begins counting when
the Start command is activated. The injection is started when the inject delay
counter reaches 0 (zero). If Inject Delay is greater than 0 (zero), Scan Delay is
automatically set to 0 (zero). Inject Delay is expressed in seconds.

Scan Delay I — Scan Delay is a countdown timer that begins counting when
the Start command is activated and stops when the counter reaches 0 (zero).
Three beeps occur when the timer reaches 10 seconds. Two beeps occur
when the timer reaches 5 seconds. One beep occurs during the last second.
If the scanner is interfaced with the injector, a signal is sent to the CT Scanner
indicating that scan delay time has expired when the timer reaches 0 seconds.
If no OEM interface is present, only an audible beep will be heard instructing
the user to start the scanner. If Scan Delay is greater than 0 (zero), Inject Delay is
automatically set to 0 (zero). Scan Delay is expressed in seconds.

Peak PSI/Peak kPa (Pressure Limit) J — The value set in this key indicates the
maximum allowable pressure that can occur during an injection. Pressure is
expressed in either PSI or kPa. Refer to section 3.1.6 Setup Screen Parameters
and Symbols for more information about changing the unit of measure.

WARNING!

Personal injury may result from leaks or rupture during an injection. If using
catheters, connectors and tubing not rated for a minimum of 325 psi (2241
kPa), use manual mode to select a pressure limit that is appropriate for the
product.

Check for Air message K — This message acts as a reminder to the operator to
confirm no air exists in the syringe and tubing prior to enabling an injection.

847503-E 2017-04-21
3-2-10

B K
192 Check for air

D
1 A
H
Inject Delay
00
Total mL F A

E OPTI* I 00
AND POWERHEAD

G Scan Delay
3— CONSOLE

Enable
Enable J
325
[Link] Peak PSI
Total Time

Figure 3-2-7 Powerhead Display Main Screen

192 Check for air 192 Check for air

1 A
00
Inject Delay
1 A Inject Delay
0
Total mL A
Total mL A

OPTI*
00 OPTI*
0
Scan Delay Scan Delay
Enable
Enable Enable
Enable
325 325
[Link] Peak PSI
[Link] Peak PSI
Total Time Total Time

A - SIDE VIEW B - SIDE VIEW

y
ela
O

00
PT

y
To

ela
I*

ct

0
an 0
ta

je

D
In

ak 5
I
lm

PS
Pe 2
Sc
L

3
A
A

le
ab
En
0:Tota
00l Tim

0
0:0
e
im
:0 e

En

lT
0:0
A
0

ta
ab

To
A
le

L
1
lm
In

PT Tota
je
ct
00Dela
Sc
an

I*
00 ela
D
3 ak P
Pe

O
y
2 SI
5

Figure 3-2-8 Display using the [Display Orientation] Key

847503-E 2017-04-21
 3-2-11

3.2.7 POWERHEAD PROTOCOL PARAMETER ENTRY SCREEN

Refer to Figure 3-2-9 through 3-2-12.
All protocol information needed by the injector is contained within the
expanded Protocol Parameter Entry screen. The Protocol Parameter Entry
screen allows the parameters to be modified via the slide bar. To access this
screen, press any parameter key located on the Main Screen as shown in Figure
3-2-5.
Phase A — Within a protocol, up to four phases can be input. Phases can be

3— CONSOLE AND
added or removed by pressing the “+” or “-” keys AA . Press the [Next] key K to

POWERHEAD
view the last phase.
Flow C — The values entered in this column indicate rate of delivery during
each respective phase. Flow is expressed in milliliters/second.
Volume D — The values entered in this column indicate the volume to be
delivered during each respective phase. Volume is expressed in milliliters.
Duration E — The value in this column indicates the duration of an injection
(i.e., time to complete injection in seconds) based on the previously entered
volume and flow rate values. Duration is displayed in the nearest whole second.
Phase Delay F — Phase Delay is a countdown timer that delays the start of the
next phase. The next phase will start when the phase delay counter reaches
0 (zero). Phase Delay is expressed in seconds. Phase Delay can also be set to
pause the injection. Access the Pause feature by scrolling past either the 0
(zero) lower limit or the 600 (six-hundred) upper limit.
Total Time G — The Total Time field is an accumulation of all the calculated
Duration and input Phase Delay fields for all phases (not including Scan
Delay). After the [Start] key is pressed, the total time field starts counting
from 0 and continues to count after the injection is completed as long as
the Results screen is displayed or up to 21 minutes. Total time is expressed in
hours:minutes:seconds.
Inject Delay H — Inject Delay is a countdown timer that begins counting when
the [Start] key is pressed. When Inject Delay reaches 0 (zero), the injection is
started. If Inject Delay is set with a value greater than 0 (zero), Scan Delay is
automatically set to 0 (zero). Inject Delay is expressed in seconds.
Scan Delay I — Scan Delay is a countdown timer that begins counting when
the Start command is activated and stops when the counter reaches 0 (zero).
Three beeps occur when the timer reaches 10 seconds. Two beeps occur
when the timer reaches 5 seconds. One beep occurs during the last second.
If the scanner is interfaced with the injector, a signal is sent to the CT Scanner
indicating that scan delay time has expired when the timer reaches 0 seconds.
If no OEM interface is present, only an audible beep will be heard instructing
the user to start the scanner. If Scan Delay is greater than 0 (zero), Inject Delay is
automatically set to 0 (zero). Scan Delay is expressed in seconds.

847503-E 2017-04-21
3-2-12

Peak PSI/Peak kPa (Pressure Limit) J — The value set in this key indicates the
maximum allowable pressure that can occur during an injection. Pressure is
expressed in either PSI or kPa. Refer to section 3.1.6 Setup for more information
about changing the unit of measure.

WARNING!

Personal injury may result from leaks or rupture during an injection. If using
catheters, connectors and tubing not rated for a minimum of 325 psi (2241
kPa), use manual mode to select a pressure limit that is appropriate for the
AND POWERHEAD

product.
3— CONSOLE

Next K — This key is only active when at least 3 phases exist on the Protocol
Parameter Entry screen. Pressing this key displays the fourth phase of the
protocol. The key will then toggle to a [Previous] key to allow access to the first
3 phases of the protocol.

Change Parameter Values via the Slide Bar L — To change the value of a
parameter, select the desired parameter by touching its key. The key will
highlight to indicate it is active and the slide bar will display at the bottom of
the screen. Touch the slide bar at the value required, or use the left and right
double arrows to decrease or increase the value. Use the left and right single
arrows to decrease or increase the value in smaller increments. The slide bar will
be removed from the screen after 3 seconds or after touching the highlighted
parameter key again.

Memory M — All stored protocol information is located within the Memory

screen. Accessing this screen allows the operator to recall protocols. To access
the Memory screen, press the [Memory] key located on the lower portion of the
screen. For more information, refer to the section Powerhead Memory Screen in
this chapter.

Main N — Pressing this key displays the powerhead Main Screen.

OptiBolus (optional) O — This key is only active if a port-key is present at the

OptiBolus port located on the rear of the power supply. Pressing this key allows
the operator to program an OptiBolus injection. The OptiBolus Mode delivers
an exponentially decaying flow rate injection that optimizes the contrast
usage and provides an extended period of uniform enhancement of the area
of interest. Once the [OptiBolus] key O is pressed, the screen shown in Figure
3-2-11 is displayed. Note the addition of “O” (OptiBolus) Q to the left of the first
phase. End Flow Rate is a function of the OptiBolus mode and is automatically
calculated by the OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System for the
entered parameters and is displayed only on the console Main screen.

Timing Bolus P — This key is only active if turned ON at the Setup Screen. Pressing
this key allows the operator to program a Timing Bolus injection. A Timing
Bolus injection—an injection of a small volume of contrast—can be delivered
to the patient to determine the optimal scan delay needed to capture the
847503-E 2017-04-21
 3-2-13

contrast agent in the area of interest. Once the [Timing Bolus] key P is pressed,
the screen shown in Figure 3-2-12 is displayed. Note the addition of “T” (Timing
Bolus) R to the left of the first phase.

J 325 H 0 I 0 [Link]
Peak PSI Inject Delay Scan Delay Total Time G
A
3.0 10 D
3 E
25 F

3— CONSOLE AND
1 C Duration Phase Delay

POWERHEAD
mL/s mL/s
AA

2 - 3.0 10 3 10
mL/s mL/s Duration Phase Delay

3 - 2.0 20 10
mL/s mL/s Duration

K O P
Next OptiBolus Timing Bolus
M Memory N Main

Figure 3-2-9 Powerhead Protocol Parameter Entry Screen

J 325 H 0 I 0 [Link] G
Peak PSI Inject Delay Scan Delay Total Time
A
1 C
3.0 10 D
3E
mL/s mL/s Duration

2 +

L
1 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200

L M Memory M Main L

Figure 3-2-10 Powerhead Protocol Parameter Entry Screen with Active Slide Bar

847503-E 2017-04-21
3-2-14

325 0 0 [Link]
Peak PSI Inject Delay Scan Delay Total Time
Q
0
3.0 75 29
mL/s mL/s Duration
AND POWERHEAD
3— CONSOLE

O P
Next OptiBolus Timing Bolus
Memory Main

Figure 3-2-11 Powerhead OptiBolus Injection

325 0 0 [Link]
Peak PSI Inject Delay Scan Delay Total Time
R
T
3.0 20 7 Pause
mL/s mL/s Duration

1
3.0 75 25 0
mL/s mL/s Duration Phase Delay

2 - 2.0 10 5
mL/s mL/s Duration

Next OptiBolus P Timing Bolus

Memory Main

Figure 3-2-12 Powerhead Timing Bolus Injection Screen

847503-E 2017-04-21
 3-2-15

3.2.8 ENABLED POWERHEAD MAIN SCREEN

Refer to Figure 3-2-13.
Once the [Enable] key is pressed, the powerhead Main screen displays an
Enabled screen as shown in Figure 3-2-13.

Start A — Pressing the [Start] key begins the delivery of the protocol. This key
is functionally interchangeable with both the [Stop] key and the [Start] key on
the console and the optional Handswitch.

3— CONSOLE AND
Disable B —The [Disable] key disables the enabled injector.

POWERHEAD
Protocol Parameters C — The protocol parameter entry keys are active and can
be changed as needed without disabling the injector.

Syringe (mL) F — This symbol indicates the relative position of the plunger
in the syringe thus indicating how much fluid may be in the syringes. Once
the injector is enabled, the fill/expel arrows will not appear when the Syringe
symbol is pressed.

F A
126 Start

40 OptiBolus
A
0
Inject Delay
Total mL A

PROTOCOL1*
0
Scan Delay
B
Disable
325
[Link] Peak PSI
Total Time

Figure 3-2-13 Powerhead Enabled Main Screen Keys and Definitions

847503-E 2017-04-21
3-2-16

3.2.9 POWERHEAD MEMORY SCREEN

Refer to Figure 3-2-14.

Memory Location A — Eight protocols are listed per page. Each protocol can
have a name consisting of up to 20 alpha-numeric characters.

Protocol Parameters B — Each protocol can contain up to six phases. Once a

protocol key is highlighted, the protocol parameters are displayed in this area.

Memory Page Number C — The memory screen contains five pages with eight
AND POWERHEAD

protocols listed per page.

3— CONSOLE

Main D Pressing this key displays the powerhead Main screen.

Recalling a Protocol
1. Access the Protocol Memory menu by pressing the [Memory] key located on
the bottom of the Protocol Parameter Entry screen.
2. Press the appropriate page (1, 2, 3, 4 or 5) on which the Protocol is stored.
3. Press the Protocol’s corresponding key to highlight E , then press the
[Select] key F . The protocol will be immediately displayed on both the
powerhead display and the console display.

A OPTI TEST

OPTI

E PROTOCOL1

TEST BOLUS

Phase mL/s mL sec Phase mL/s mL sec

0 6.5 10 26 4 5.0 20
B2 10.0 10 10
3 5.0 20
F Select

Main D
C 1 2 3 4 5

Figure 3-2-14 Powerhead Memory Screen Keys and Definitions

847503-E 2017-04-21
 3-2-17

3.2.10 POWERHEAD RESULTS SCREEN

Refer to Figure 3-2-15.
The Results Screen as shown in Figure 3-2-15 is automatically displayed
after the delivery of an injection and only shows the achieved results of that
injection. The Results screen is displayed for either 21 minutes or until the
[Main] key is pressed.

Results 70

3— CONSOLE AND
[Link]

POWERHEAD
9 30 0
Peak PSI Inject Delay Scan Delay Total Time
1 10.0 20 5
mL/s mL Phase Delay

2 7.0 10 10
mL/s mL Phase Delay

3 5.0 20 0
mL/s mL Phase Delay

4 5.0 20
mL/s mL

Injection Complete Main

JUN 27 2013 14:11

Figure 3-2-15 Results Screen displayed after delivery of an Injection

847503-E 2017-04-21
3-2-18
AND POWERHEAD
3— CONSOLE

This page intentionally left blank.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 4-1-1

4 MAINTENANCE
AND CHECKOUT
PROCEDURES
This chapter contains maintenance procedures for the OptiOne Single-Head
Contrast Delivery System. Guidelines for periodic inspections, testing, cleaning
and lubrication are included. Information about assembly and disassembly of
the unit is contained in chapter 6.

4—MAINTENANCE
A checklist is included in the front pocket of this manual. Fill in the necessary

PROCEDURES
CHECKOUT
information on a copy of the checklist.

WARNING!

Preventive Maintenance on any unit must be performed by a Qualified

Technician who is completely familiar with the use and operation of the
Injector, trained by a Mallinckrodt instructor in the area of preventive
maintenance for the Injector and familiar with the content of the Operator’s
manual and the Installation and Service manual.

WARNING!

No modification of this equipment is allowed.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 4-1-2

4.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

4.1.1 DAILY INSPECTION
Although the OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System is maintenance
free, units need to be inspected prior to use.
• Inspect the powerhead, be sure the ram is functioning properly.
• Ensure all cable connections are secure.
4.1.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Preventive Maintenance should be performed at least once a year.
4—MAINTENANCE

CAUTION!
PROCEDURES
CHECKOUT

Do not perform maintenance or service on equipment while connected to the

patient.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 4-2-1

4.2 OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT PROCEDURES

This procedure checks the performance of the major functions of the OptiOne
Single-Head Contrast Delivery System.
This checkout is recommended at these times:
• Before using the unit for the first time
• As part of a routine preventive maintenance program
• If a problem or mis-calibration is suspected
• After repairs

4—MAINTENANCE
Be certain to read through the steps carefully before performing them. For

PROCEDURES
additional operational instructions, refer to chapter 3 in this document, or refer

CHECKOUT
to the operator manual.
If this procedure cannot be completed or if the OptiOne Single-Head Contrast
Delivery System doesn’t perform as described, stop the checkout and
discontinue use of the injector. Call for service.
4.2.1 ITEMS REQUIRED
• Mallinckrodt 125 mL and 200 mL syringes
• Pressure gauge fixture, water and container
• OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System Preventive Maintenance
Checklist
4.2.2 POWER SUPPLY CHECK
Make sure all of the cables are plugged in and secure. Turn on the unit by first
toggling the Power Supply’s power switch located on the rear of the cabinet.
The blue light on the Power Supply should be on.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 4-2-2

4.2.3 CONSOLE OPERATIONS

1. Turn on the Power Supply.
2. On the console, Press the Power ON/OFF button. The system should power up.
After initialization, the last exited injection mode will be displayed. Also, the blue
console ON/OFF LED should be on.
3. Press the Memory button. The powerhead and console should both change to the
Memory function. Press the Main button. Both powerhead and console should
display the main menu.
4. Press the Setup button. Only the console should change to the Setup function.
Verify correct date and time settings. Press the Main button. Both powerhead and
console should display the main menu.
4—MAINTENANCE

PROCEDURES
CHECKOUT

5. Press the Results button. The results listed are injections completed by date and
time in descending order.
6. Visually check console assembly for damage.
7. Ensure console cable connection is secured using ty-wrap.

4.2.4 POWERHEAD OVERVIEW

Figure 4-2-1 below illustrates the powerhead functional components

Powerhead Injection
LCD Display Indicator
Powerhead Manual
Ram Knob
To
50
ta

Pro
lm

0
to
L

co
lN
am
e
0:
To

O imin
ta
00

T
pti g
lT

En

Bo B
im
:
ab
01
e

lu olu

19
s s
le

7
A
Pe 2
ak 5

Sca
3
PS

In
n

je
I

D
0
ct
ela

D
0

C
y

ela

hec
y

k
fo
r ai
r

Syringe
Holder
125 ml

Syringe
Holder
200 ml

Figure 4-2-1 Powerhead

847503-E 2017-04-21
 4-2-3

4.2.5 POWERHEAD OPERATIONS

1. Remove any syringe from the powerhead. Install a 200 mL faceplate on the ram
and power up system.
2. On the powerhead, press the syringe graphic. This will activate the fill/expel arrows.
Press and hold on the fill/expel arrow, then move your finger up and down the
scale to vary the ram acceleration. Ensure ram moves freely in both forward and
reverse directions. Also, verify that the ram knob LED comes on during this proce-
dure.
3. Program an injection. Follow the sequence to Enable the injector. Then press the
Start button. The injection you programmed should have activated verifying the
powerhead is functioning properly.

4—MAINTENANCE
4. Inspect the ram, seals and heater connector to ensure they are free from dried con-

PROCEDURES
CHECKOUT
trast. If necessary, clean as directed in the Cleaning section.
5. Check the powerhead pivot assembly to ensure that the pivot is operating prop-
erly.
6. Check for unusual powerhead noise while running the ram.
7. Check operation of the faceplate by opening and closing the latch mechanisms. It
should operate smoothly without interference or binding. Check for contrast build
up. If necessary, clean as directed in the section 4.5 Cleaning Procedures.
8. Check the display for missing pixels.
9. Visually inspect powerhead covers for damage.
10. Visually inspect powerhead cable for damage.
4.2.6 REMOTE START OPERATIONS
1. Program an injection. Follow the sequence to Enable the injector. Press and re-
lease the Remote Hand Start Button. The injection should have activated verifying
proper operation.
2. During an injection cycle, Press the Remote Hand Start button. The injection
should stop with the injection mode screen displayed.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 4-2-4

4.2.7 POWERHEAD STOP BUTTON CHECK

1. Power up the system
2. With no syringe present, program an injection.
3. On the powerhead, follow the sequence to Enable the injector, then press the Start
button on the powerhead. During ram movement observe the powerhead injec-
tion indicators. The knob indicator light for the ram should be on.
4. With ram movement taking place, press the powerhead Stop Button. Ram move-
ment should stop and both powerhead and console will indicate ‘Injection Paused’.
4.2.8 FACEPLATE DETECTION CHECK
4—MAINTENANCE

1. Remove faceplate (if installed) and Power up system as previously described.

PROCEDURES
CHECKOUT

2. Place a 125 mL faceplate on the powerhead with the faceplate latch unlocked and
the heater cable unplugged.
After the ram has been homed, verify that a message is displayed saying that the
“Heater blanket on the injector has become disconnected”.
Press the “Close” button on the powerhead screen. Close the 125 mL latch and
verify that the “Select Prefill Volume” screen appears on the powerhead screen.
Select 100 mL and verify the console and powerhead screens indication.
Plug in the 125 mL faceplate heater blanket cable.
3. Remove the 125 mL faceplate, then place a 200 mL faceplate on the powerhead.
After homing the ram verify that both console and powerhead screens indicate a
200 mL faceplate on the powerhead.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 4-2-5

4.2.9 FLOW RATE CHECK

For flow rate checks below, install pressure fixture used during calibration.
1. Install a 200 mL Faceplate and syringe on the powerhead and fill with water:
Program and Enable the following parameters:
Flow Rate: 10 mL/sec
Volume: 195 mL
Peak PSI: 325 psi
Press Start to run the injection and adjust the flow control valve to achieve a pres-

4—MAINTENANCE
sure of approximately 200 psi. Verify the manual knob is illuminated and the con-

PROCEDURES
sole indicates an injection is running. After the injection has completed, verify that

CHECKOUT
no alarms were displayed, the injector did not go into pressure limiting, and that
the displayed achieved values are:
Flow Rate: 10 ± 0.2 mL/sec
Volume: 195 ± 2 mL
Pressure: less than 300 psi
2. Install a 125 mL Faceplate and a 125 mL syringe on the powerhead and fill with
water:
Program and Enable the following parameters:
Flow Rate: 10 mL/sec
Volume: 120 mL
Peak PSI: 325 psi
Press Start to run the injection and adjust the flow control valve to achieve a pres-
sure of approximately 125-150 psi. Verify the manual knob is illuminated and the
console indicates an injection is running. After the injection has completed, verify
that no alarms were displayed, the injector did not go into pressure limiting, and
that the displayed achieved values are:
Flow Rate: 10 ± 0.2 mL/sec
Volume: 120 ± 2 mL
Pressure: less than 300 psi

847503-E 2017-04-21
 4-2-6

4.2.10 PRESSURE LIMIT CHECK

NOTE: Before using a syringe for calibration or verification, inspect the syringe
and plunger to ensure the plunger can be moved in the syringe without undo
sticking. If required, lubricate the syringe plunger with a small amount of silicon
grease such as DOW CORNING® 111 VALVE LUBRICANT or Boss® 411 Silicone
General Purpose Compound.

Verifying Calibration
Program 7.6 mL/s flow rate @275 peak psi. Enable and perform programmed
injection. During the injection close the flow control valve until the injector first
4—MAINTENANCE

reports that it is pressure limiting. The injection should pressure limit at 250 psi
PROCEDURES
CHECKOUT

within +/- 50 psi.

Injection Gauge Reading @ Pressure Limiting

Shot 200ml 125ml

7.6ml/s @
275 PSI

Table 1 Testing
Pressure Limiting Example for Testing
Achieved Pressure: 250 psi ± 50 psi. NOTE: for a peak pressure entry of 275 psi,
the software will target a steady state of 250 psi ± 50 psi.
275 psi Operator Selected
Designed Peak PSI
Pressure
250 psi
Limiting Nominal
Range
225 psi Low Limit
Tolerance

Pressure
(psi)

0 Time

Figure 4-2-2 Pressure Limiting Graph

847503-E 2017-04-21
 4-3-1

4.3 ELECTRICAL CHECKS

4.3.1 GROUND CONTINUITY
1. Using the continuity/Diode checker function on a DMM or similar indicating
device, ensure continuity exists between the AC plug ground pin and any exposed
(unpainted) metal surface that is conductively connected to all other accessible metal

DANGER!

If ground continuity is nonexistent, do not use the injector, contact an authorized

service representative. Failure to follow this instruction can result in serious injury.
4.3.2 ELECTRICAL LEAKAGE

4—MAINTENANCE
PROCEDURES
CHECKOUT
NOTE: This test is optional, and is intended as an example for facilities where internal
procedures may dictate it’s performance. The following information is intended for
qualified biomedical engineers or trained electrical technicians at the facilities (install site).
1. Use leakage current test equipment to check the leakage through the power cord
ground with ground open. The leakage should be less than 300 microamperes for
U.L. listed models (domestic-ANSI/AAMI ES60601-1) and less than 500 microamperes
(export-EN 60601-1) for all others. If higher, check for the cause and repair.

Power Supply

J6 TM

O I
RS232/
RS422 CAN

J3
100-120V~/
230V~
50-60HZ
4 AMP
J2

J5 J10B J10A J1
P4

LEAKAGE CURRENT Powerhead

Chassis
TEST EQUIPMENT
Total

Ground Clip Ground

50

Proto

0
mL

col
Name
0:0 ble
Total0:0

OptiB
Timin
Ena
Time 1

olusBolus
g

197
A
A
Peak
325

Scan 0
PSI

Inject 0
Delay

Delay

Check
for
air

A:
125 120
200
B: mL
180
mL
50
Peak
PSI
PH1: Inject 0 Check
A
Delay for air
0 Protocol syringe in
PH2: 4.0 Scan
Delay Name and tubing
mL/s
PH3: AB 30 Enable Total
Time
5.0 mL
8 [Link]
- 1
mL/s
PH4: 50 Duration
0
mL
10
Duration
PH5: 50
% contrast
25
Contrast
0
PH6: (mL) 25
Phase
Delay
Saline
(mL)

OptiBol
Memory us

Timing
Setup Bolus

Results

Main

Console

Figure 4-3-1 Leakage Test Setup

WARNING!

If system leakage remains above 300 or 500 microamperes (115 Vac is specified at
300 microamperes and 220 Vac is specified at 500 microamperes), do not use the
injector as it may be a shock risk for the operator. Contact an authorized service
representative.
2. Disconnect the leakage test equipment.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 4-3-2

4.3.3 GROUND IMPEDANCE

NOTE: This test is optional, and is intended as an example for facilities where
internal procedures may dictate it’s performance. The following information is
intended for qualified biomedical engineers or trained electrical technicians at
the facilities (install site).
1. Refer to Figure 4-3-2. Run a current of 25 A (50 or 60 Hz) with a no-load voltage (not
to exceed 6 V) for at least 5 seconds through the protective earth pin in the mains
plug and Power Supply chassis.
2. The measured ground impedance must not exceed 0.1 ohms

CAUTION!
4—MAINTENANCE

PROCEDURES
CHECKOUT

Do not use the injector if the system ground impedance exceeds 0.1 ohms. Use
of injector when ground impedance exceeds 0.1 ohms may pose a shock risk
for the patient. Contact an authorized service representative.

Power Supply

J6 TM

O I
RS232/
RS422 CAN

J3
100-120V~/
230V~
50-60HZ
4 AMP
J2

J5 J10B J10A J1
P4

GROUND IMPEDENCE Powerhead

Chassis
TEST EQUIPMENT

Total
Ground Clip Ground

50

Proto

0
mL

col
Name
0:0 ble
Total0:0

OptiB
Timin
Ena
Time 1

olusBolus
g

197
A
A
Peak
325

Scan 0
PSI

Injec
Delay

t Delay
0

Check
for
air
A:
125 120
200
B: mL
180
mL
50
Peak
PSI
PH1: Inject 0 Check
A
Delay for air
0 Protocol syringe in
PH2: 4.0 Scan
Delay Name and tubing
mL/s
PH3: AB 30 Enable Total
Time
5.0 mL
8 [Link]
- 1
mL/s
PH4: 50 Duration
0
mL
10
Duration
PH5: 50
% contrast
25
Contrast
0
PH6: (mL) 25
Phase
Delay
Saline
(mL)

OptiBol
Memory us

Timing
Setup Bolus

Results

Main

Console

Figure 4-3-2 Ground Impedance Test Setup

847503-E 2017-04-21
 4-4-1

4.4 SUSPENSION ARM OPERATIONAL CHECKS

WARNING!

The Suspension Arms are shipped with an internal limiter which is

set to restrict the upward travel of the arm to the horizontal position.
Always raise the arm to the upward limit of travel before removing any
equipment mounted to the arm. THE ARM WILL SPRING UPWARD WITH
CONSIDERABLE FORCE UNDER NO LOAD CONDITIONS, AND MAY CAUSE
SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY
Check the Suspension Arm for movement. If adjustment is required, follow the
instructions below:

4—MAINTENANCE
PROCEDURES
4.4.1 SUSPENSION ARM TRAVEL ADJUSTMENT

CHECKOUT
1. To increase range motion, insert a 5 mm hex wrench into the opening at
the location shown in Figure 4-4-1. There is a cover which fills the opening
which will move out of the way when the tool is inserted.
2. Turning the wrench counterclockwise will increase the vertical travel. When
the wrench no longer turns freely, the maximum travel of 45 degrees will be
obtained. Full clockwise adjustment will return the limit to the horizontal
setting.
Note: Always return the limit to the horizontal setting (full clockwise) before
removing the suspension device or before removing the arm from the column.

Figure 4-4-1 Vertical Travel Adjustment

847503-E 2017-04-21
 4-4-2

4.4.2 SUSPENSION ARM BALANCE ADJUSTMENT

Note: The following steps are to be done only after the powerhead has been
properly installed. The arm should remain stable in position, yet be able to be
moved easily. Adjustments are only necessary if the arm moves easily in one
direction than the other direction.
NOTE: The suspension system is to only be used with the OptiOne injector.
The maximum load capacity of the OptiOne suspension spring arm should
not exceed 26 lbs at full extension. The use of accessories not complying with
the equivalent safety requirements of this equipment may lead to a reduced
level of safety of the resulting system. Consideration relating to the choice shall
include:
4—MAINTENANCE

PROCEDURES

• use of the accessory in the patient vicinity

CHECKOUT

• evidence that the safety certification of the accessory has been performed in
accordance to the appropriate EN 60601-1 and/or EN 60601-1-1 harmonized
national standard.
1. To adjust the balance of the arm, insert a 5 mm hex wrench into the hole at
the position shown in Figure 4-4-2. Turning the wrench counterclockwise
will increase the lift force of the arm.

Figure 4-4-2 Lift Force Adjustment

847503-E 2017-04-21
 4-4-3

4.4.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEM CHECKS

J-Bow Arm Visual Inspection
Ensure the four fasteners retaining the J-Bow pins to the Mounting Spindle are
present and are tight (Torque - 72 lb-in, 8 N-m). Refer to Figure 4-4-3.

Normal
Orientation

Stop Pin

4—MAINTENANCE
J-bow Pin

PROCEDURES
CHECKOUT
(Torque to 72 lb-in)

Set Screw (Torque to 72 lb-in)

Powerhead
Mounting
Surface

Figure 4-4-3 J-Bow Pin Fasteners

847503-E 2017-04-21
 4-4-4

Suspension System Visual Inspection

Inspect the vertical column, horizontal arm assembly and J-Bow arm for
damage that may have occurred during use that may weaken the system.
This includes dents and cracks of the components, cracks around fasteners of
the exposed portions of the vertical column and J-Bow arm, and cracks of the
factory installed covers on the horizontal arm assembly.
Vertical Column Inspection
Inspect the stability of the suspension system vertical column by holding the
tube near the bottom and firmly rocking in a back and forth motion. If the
vertical column does not appear to be stable, ensure the mounting bolts are
4—MAINTENANCE

tight. Tighten to 220 lb-in, 25 N-m.

PROCEDURES
CHECKOUT

in
5.90 ) CEILING
m
(15c

COLUMN BASE
FLANGE

M10 SOCKET HEAD SCREW

(Torque-220lb-in, 25N-m)

Figure 4-4-4 Vertical Column Inspection

847503-E 2017-04-21
 4-4-5

J-Bow Safety Collar Inspection

Ensure the safety collar set screw and retaining screw are present. Refer to
Figure 4-4-5.

ADJUSTABLE ARM

4—MAINTENANCE
RETAINING CLIP SAFETY COLLAR

PROCEDURES
SAFETY PIN

CHECKOUT
SIDE VIEW RETAINING
SCREW
SET SCREW

PLUG PLUG MOUNTING

SPINDLE
EYE HOLE
RETAINING CLIP SLOT

Torque to
39lb.-in.,
4.5N-in.

J-BOW

Figure 4-4-5 J-Bow Safety Collar Attachment

847503-E 2017-04-21
 4-4-6
4—MAINTENANCE

PROCEDURES
CHECKOUT

This page intentionally left blank.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 4-5-1

4.5 CLEANING PROCEDURES

4.5.1 SYRINGE HOLDER AND ADAPTER
200 mL
On a daily basis, move the ram to the retract position and wipe out the inside
of the syringe holder with a damp, lint-free towel. The 200 mL faceplate may be
submerged in water.
125 mL
On a daily basis, move the ram(s) to the fully retracted position and wipe out
the inside of the 125 mL syringe adapter(s) with warm water containing a mild

4—MAINTENANCE
soap. If the syringe latch becomes difficult to actuate due to contrast buildup, it

PROCEDURES
CHECKOUT
is safe to unplug and remove the syringe adapter from the powerhead and run
it under water while actuating the latch. NOTE: Care must be taken, however,
to keep the cable connector dry.

Figure 4-5-1
4.5.2 POWERHEAD
The exterior of the powerhead may be cleaned with a damp cloth.
DO NOT use any solvents to clean the powerhead.
4.5.3 CONSOLE
The console may be dusted by using a lint-free cloth. To clean the touch screen,
use a damp nonabrasive cloth towel and any commercially available non-
ammonia window cleaner to regularly clean the surface. The cleaning solution
should be applied to the towel rather than the surface of the touch screen. The
touch screen has air vents and is not designed with water tight bezels so fluid
ingress may occur from behind the panel if not cleaned carefully.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 4-5-2

4.5.4 POWER SUPPLY

Clean the exterior of the power supply by spraying a cloth with an all-purpose
household cleaner, then gently wipe clean.
4.5.5 CLEANING 200 ML PRESSURE SLEEVE
The 200 mL pressure sleeve has a limited life-span and must be replaced
periodically. Its expected life-span may range from thirty (30) days or less
to over two (2) years depending on pressures encountered, the number of
injection cycles and the cleaning and sterilization techniques utilized. Check
the 200 mL pressure sleeves) daily for signs of stress, crazing lines, or cracks and
replace immediately when any of these symptoms are found.
4—MAINTENANCE

PROCEDURES

WARNING!
CHECKOUT

CHECK PRESSURE SLEEVE DAILY!

Syringe pressure sleeves must withstand high pressures generated dur-
ing injection delivery. Defective sleeves may shatter or explode under
these conditions. Always inspect pressure sleeve closely before using
injector. While viewing all areas; look for stress cracks (around the front
or at the shoulder area), discard any pressure sleeve exhibiting signs
of stress, crazing lines or cracks. The use of such parts may cause injury
and/or an aborted injection.
On a daily basis, move the ram to the fully retracted position and wipe out the
inside of the pressure sleeve with a damp (with water), lint-free towel.
NOTE: Do not autoclave the pressure sleeve. Autoclaving will shorten the life of
the pressure sleeve.
The entire base and pressure sleeve may be placed or soaked in warm water
with a mild soap to remove any hardened contrast. This procedure is also
helpful if the locking lever is hard to rotate. Do not use alcohol-based detergents.
The water should not contain the following substances, even in trace amounts:
• esters
• ethers
• ketones
• chlorides
• n-Alkyl
• alcohols (other than ethyl alcohol)
• cleaners and disinfectants (such as SaniZide and TB-Cide Quat)
• Products containing: dimethyl benzyl, ammonium chlorides, and dimethyl
ethyl benzyl

847503-E 2017-04-21
 5-1-1

5 TROUBLESHOOTING

5.1 OVERVIEW
The intention of this Chapter is to deliver information to the service technician
in order to track a problem to a subassembly so it can be replaced or repaired.
When a problem exists with the OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery
System, a message will be displayed on the console and/or powerhead. An

5—TROUBLESHOOTING
alarm will cause the injector to cease operation and default to a Safe State.
A complete listing of these message alarms and their probable cause is
contained in this chapter.
Instructions for disassembly and reassembly of major injector components are
defined in chapter 6.
WARNING!
Unplug power cord to disconnect the powerpack from supply mains.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 5-1-2

5.1.2 GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDELINES

We suggest trying these actions when first troubleshooting the OptiOne
Single-Head Contrast Delivery System.
1. Check indicator lights on all units to ensure adequate power is present.
2. Verify the problem. Check the injector under the same conditions and settings that
it had when the problem occurred. If possible, try the injector in an isolated setting
to see if the problem can be duplicated.
3. Try different settings. Check the injector with different control settings than it had
when the problem occurred. Change the flow rate, volume and pressure.
4. Use the checkout in chapter 4. This is a relatively quick way to check the major
functions. This is especially helpful if the accuracy is in question.
5—TROUBLESHOOTING

5. Visually inspect subassemblies and components before performing electrical tests

or calibration procedures. Specifically make sure cable plugs are firmly attached,
and cables are not crimped, or under tension. If the trouble is in the powerhead,
open the powerhead cover and inspect the powerhead while it operates. Look for
loose parts, loose connections, interference, and wear.
6. Isolate the fault. While trying different settings, and under different conditions, try
to isolate the specific problem.
7. Call service assistance, and for replacement parts or modules. If the system is new,
still under warranty, or covered under a service contract, call your sales representa-
tive before proceeding.

CAUTION!

Be extremely careful when the OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System

is open. Lethal voltages are exposed. Be careful not to leave an open system
unattended with power plugged in. DISCONNECT THE POWER CORD BEFORE
REMOVING OR REPLACING BOARDS.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 5-2-1

5.2 SYSTEM GENERATED ALARMS

An alarm number can appear on the powerhead and/or console display. Use
this chapter to help find the possible cause and what to check.
When an alarm occurs, the alarm screen will flash ON and OFF. The Alarm will
be displayed for 2 seconds, then go off for 1 second while showing the screen
that was displayed when the error occurred.

Alarm - 0x????
P1 = #######

5—TROUBLESHOOTING
P2 = #######
P3 = #######
P4 = #######
P5 = #######

During an Alarm, the powerhead manual knobs will flash ON/OFF RED at a rate
of 1.0 second ON and 1.0 second OFF.
Alarms in this chapter are listed in numeric order followed by a brief
description. If an alarm fault occurs, observe the alarm number listed and
P numbers, then refer to the expanded explanation given for that alarm in the
following sections:
Section 5.3 Console Alarms 0x1xxx
Section 5.4 Powerhead Alarms 0x2xxx
Section 5.5 OEM Interface Alarms 0x3xxx

847503-E 2017-04-21
 5-2-2

Note: P numbers are in hexadecimal and will only appear on the powerhead
display; not the console display.
In each or these sections, a description of the alarm number, what it means,
probable causes, and what action to take to remedy the problem is provided.
From these messages, the defective subassembly (such as a circuit board or the
powerhead) can be identified and replaced.
Note: To correct an alarm, perform the action steps in the sequence listed.
The OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System also retains a history of
reported alarms. Refer to 3.1.6 for procedures.
Note: Only powerhead alarms and OEM Interface alarms are saved in the alarm
history; console alarms are not saved.
5—TROUBLESHOOTING

847503-E 2017-04-21
 5-3-1

5.3 CONSOLE ALARMS 1000 SERIES

ALARM NO. 0x1001:
Meaning:
CPU Failure of the I2C bus.
Description:
Console software detects a failure of the console’s internal I2C bus on power up.
Actions:
1. Replace the console CPU board, and download software. Perform console
touchscreen calibration as described in section 8.2. Verify / Change date and time in
console Setup screen as described in section 3.1.6.

5—TROUBLESHOOTING
CONSOLE ALARMS
ALARM NO. 0x1002:
Meaning:
Console Program CRC
Description:
Console software CRC check performed on power up has failed.
Calculated CRC fault value is displayed.
Actions:
1. Re-download console software.
2. Replace the console CPU board, and download software. Perform console
touchscreen calibration as described in section 8.2. Verify / Change date and time in
console Setup screen as described in section 3.1.6.

ALARM NO. 0x1003:

Meaning:
Console RAM Failure.
Description:
Console software performed a RAM check on power up.
Actions:
Replace console CPU board, and download software. Perform console
touchscreen calibration as described in section 8.2. Verify / Change date and
time in console Setup screen as described in section 3.1.6.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 5-3-2

ALARM NO. 0x1004:

Meaning:
Console Touch Screen Failure.
Description:
If the touchscreen is continuously activated during the power-up sequence,
this alarm condition will occur.
Actions:
1. The touch screen should have nothing making contact with it during power up.
Ensure no other objects, including console bezel, are in contact with the console
touch screen.
5—TROUBLESHOOTING

2. Inspect console for damage

CONSOLE ALARMS

3. Monitor LEDs DS 8, 9, 10, and 11 on the console CPU board. In normal operation
these 4 LEDs will operate as follows:
DS 8, 9, 10, and 11 will illuminate at power up.
Wait until the powerhead ram homing screen, or main screen are displayed.
When the touchscreen is pressed, all 4 LEDs will extinguish.
Any subsequent touchscreen press will illuminate all 4 LEDs. They will
extinguish when the touchscreen is released.
In a fault situation:
If all 4 LEDs stay lit and do not extinguish when the touchscreen is pressed,
perform the following:
Turn OFF the unit.
Disconnect the touchscreen connector J2 on the console CPU board and turn
the injector back on.
If error does not occur, replace the touchscreen and perform touchscreen
calibration.
If error persists, replace the console CPU board, and download software.
Perform console touchscreen calibration as described in section 8.2. Verify /
Change date and time in console Setup screen as described in section 3.1.6..

847503-E 2017-04-21
 5-3-3

ALARM NO. 0x1005:

Meaning:
Console Watchdog Time-out
Description:
The console watchdog timer expired.
Actions:
1. Re-download console software.
2. Replace the console CPU board, and download software. Perform console
touchscreen calibration as described in section 8.2. Verify / Change date and time in
console Setup screen as described in section 3.1.6.

5—TROUBLESHOOTING
CONSOLE ALARMS
ALARM NO. 0x1006:
Meaning:
Console Hand Switch checked on power up.
Description:
Do not depress Hand Switch during power up.
Actions:
1. If Hand Switch was not depressed on power up, examine the hand switch push
button for any mechanical issues and then cycle system power. If error returns
perform step 2.
2. Turn OFF console, unplug Hand Switch and power up. If error is not displayed,
replaced the Hand Switch.
3. Replace console Interface board.
4. Replace console CPU board, and download software. Perform console touchscreen
calibration as described in section 8.2. Verify / Change date and time in console
Setup screen as described in section 3.1.6.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 5-3-4

ALARM NO. 0x1007 (2007):

Meaning:
No Communication with the powerhead. (CAN)
Description:
Console cannot establish reliable communication with the powerhead on
power up within 20 seconds.
Possible causes:
• Faulty powerhead cable.
• Faulty console cable.
• Faulty console Interface board.
5—TROUBLESHOOTING
CONSOLE ALARMS

• Faulty console CPU board.

• Faulty powerhead CPU board.
• Faulty Power Supply board.
Actions:
1. Inspect Power Supply to console communication connections. Connect console to
other console port on the Power Supply and retry.
2. Verify powerhead cable continuity (Refer to Figure 7-4-2). Replace if needed.
3. Verify console cable continuity. Replace if needed.
4. Replace console Interface board.
5. Replace console CPU board, and download software. Perform console touchscreen
calibration as described in section 8.2. Verify / Change date and time in console
Setup screen as described in section 3.1.6.
6. Replace powerhead CPU board, download software. Perform pressure calibration as
described in section 8.5. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.
7. Replace Power Supply PCB board.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 5-3-5

ALARM NO. 0x1008 (2046):

NOTE: A 2005 powerhead alarm will display as a 1008 alarm on the console.
Check alarm no. on powerhead before proceeding. If 2005 alarm no. is
displayed, take action for the 2005 alarm. Every 2005 alarm displays the same
alarm time and date stamp.
Meaning:
The console loses communication packets from the powerhead for more than 2
seconds.
Possible causes:
• Bad powerhead cable.
• Bad console cable.

5—TROUBLESHOOTING
CONSOLE ALARMS
• Faulty console Interface board.
• Faulty console CPU board.
• Faulty powerhead CPU board.
Actions:
1. Verify powerhead cable continuity. Replace if needed.
2. Verify console cable continuity. Replace if needed.
3. Replace console Interface board.
4. Replace console CPU board, and download software. Perform console touchscreen
calibration as described in section 8.2. Verify / Change date and time in console
Setup screen as described in section 3.1.6.
5. Replace powerhead CPU board, download software. Perform pressure calibration as
described in section 8.5. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.

ALARM NO. 0x1009:

Meaning:
CPU Failure of the Non-Volatile Memory.
Description:
Console software detects an error in the Non-Volatile memory IC.
Actions:
Replace the console CPU board, and download software. Perform console
touchscreen calibration as described in section 8.2. Verify / Change date and
time in console Setup screen as described in section 3.1.6.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 5-3-6

ALARM NO. 0x1010:

Meaning:
CPU Failure of the Video Ram IC.
Description:
Console software detects a problem with the Video Ram IC.
Actions:
Replace the console CPU board, and download software. Perform console
touchscreen calibration as described in section 8.2. Verify / Change date and
time in console Setup screen as described in section 3.1.6.
5—TROUBLESHOOTING
CONSOLE ALARMS

ALARM NO. 0x1048:

Meaning:
Miscellaneous software alarm in console.
Description:
P1 = 0x1000 - miscellaneous alarm
P1 = 0x0031 - 0x0037 - I2C buss alarm
Action:
For P1 = 0x1000
1. Download software
2. Replace console CPU board, and download software if necessary. Perform console
touchscreen calibration as described in section 8.2. Verify / Change date and time in
console Setup screen as described in section 3.1.6
For P1 = 0x0031 - 0x0037
Replace console CPU board, and download software if necessary. Perform console
touchscreen calibration as described in section 8.2. Verify / Change date and time in
console Setup screen as described in section 3.1.6

847503-E 2017-04-21
 5-3-7

ALARM NO. 0x1049:

Meaning:
Console has detected a problem with injecting screen.
Description:
Console is injecting without proper information on the injecting screen.
Action:
Cycle power. If problem persist, call service.

ALARM NO. 0x1051:

5—TROUBLESHOOTING
Meaning:

CONSOLE ALARMS
Out of memory.
Description:
Software cannot allocate memory and must terminate execution.
Action:
Cycle power. If problem persist, call service.

ALARM NO. 0x1052:

Meaning:
Processor exception.
Description:
Processor executed an unhandled software exception.
Action:
1. Reload software and re-calibrate.
2. Replace console CPU board, and download software if necessary. Perform console
touchscreen calibration as described in section 8.2. Verify / Change date and time in
console Setup screen as described in section 3.1.6.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 5-3-8
5—TROUBLESHOOTING
CONSOLE ALARMS

This page intentionally left blank.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 5-4-1

5.4 POWERHEAD ALARMS 2000 SERIES

ALARM NO. 0x2001
Meaning:
Video Ram Initialization failure.
Description:
Video Ram IC could not be initialized.
Action:
Replace the powerhead logic board, and download software. Perform all
calibrations as described in chapter 8. Verify calibration as described in
section 8.6.

5—TROUBLESHOOTING
POWERHEAD ALARMS
ALARM NO. 0x2002:
Meaning:
Powerhead Program Flash CRC failure.
Description:
Powerhead software CRC check performed on power up.
P1 = Expected CRC.
P2 = Actual CRC.
Action:
1. Re-download powerhead software.
2. Replace the powerhead logic board, download software. Perform all calibrations as
described in chapter 8. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 5-4-2

ALARM NO. 0x2003:

Meaning:
Powerhead RAM check failure.
Description:
Powerhead RAM software check failed on power up.
P1 = Number of errors.
Action:
Replace powerhead logic board, download software. Perform all calibrations as
described in chapter 8. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.
5—TROUBLESHOOTING
POWERHEAD ALARMS

ALARM NO. 0x2004:

Meaning:
Powerhead Touch Screen failure.
Description:
If the touchscreen is continuously activated during the power-up sequence,
this alarm condition will occur.
Action:
1. The touch screen should have nothing making contact with it during power up.
2. Power OFF, unplug touchscreen cable J8 from the powerhead logic board, and
power up.
If the fault does not reoccur:
Replace powerhead touchscreen, and perform the powerhead touchscreen
calibration.
If the fault reoccurs:
Replace powerhead logic board, download software. Perform all calibrations as
described in chapter 8. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 5-4-3

ALARM NO. 0x2005:

NOTE: A 2005 powerhead alarm will display a 1008 alarm on the console. Take
action for the 2005 alarm. Every 2005 alarm displays the same alarm time and
date stamp.
Meaning:
Powerhead Watchdog Time-out.
Description:
The powerhead watchdog timer expired, powerhead resets and Alarm is
displayed.
Action:

5—TROUBLESHOOTING
POWERHEAD ALARMS
1. Re-download powerhead software.
2. Replace powerhead logic board, download software. Perform all calibrations as
described in chapter 8. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.

ALARM NO. 0x2006:

Meaning:
Power Supply Hand Switch failure.
Description:
The Remote Start Switch was pressed at power up, or is improperly connected,
or become disconnected during an injection.
Action:
1. Remove Hand Switch from Power Supply and cycle power. If fault does not return,
replace Hand Switch.
2. Replace Power Supply board.
3. Replace powerhead logic board, download software. Perform all calibrations as
described in chapter 8. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 5-4-4

ALARM NO. 0x2007:

Meaning:
No Communication with the console (CAN).
Description:
Powerhead cannot establish reliable communication with the console on
power up.
Possible causes:
• Bad powerhead cable.
• Bad console cable.
• Faulty console Interface board.
5—TROUBLESHOOTING
POWERHEAD ALARMS

• Faulty console CPU board.

• Faulty powerhead logic board.
• Faulty power supply board.
Action:
1. Diagnose any error displayed on console display.
2. Ensure console cable is connected to the Power Supply.
3. Ohm out communication lines pins 4 and 5 on the powerhead cable and powerhead
extension cable (Refer to Figure 7-4-18). Replace powerhead cable if needed.
4. Verify console cable continuity. Replace if needed.
5. Replace console Interface board.
6. Replace console CPU board, and download software.
7. Replace Power Supply board.
8. Replace powerhead logic board, download software. Perform all calibrations as
described in chapter 8. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 5-4-5

ALARM NO. 0x2008:

Meaning:
Powerhead Data Flash CRC check failure at power up (calibration data).
Description
P1 = Expected CRC.
P2 = Actual CRC.
Action:
1. Re-calibrate injector.
2. Re-download powerhead software.

5—TROUBLESHOOTING
POWERHEAD ALARMS
3. Replace powerhead logic board, download software. Perform all calibrations as
described in chapter 8. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.

ALARM NO. 0x2009:

Meaning:
+24VDC Power Supply Failure detected at power up or at enabling.
Description:
Powerhead software detected power supply voltage is not between 20 and 28
volts.
P1 = Actual Volts.
Action:
1. Check DC wiring inside Power Supply.
2. Measure 24V at the Power Supply, (P2, 4 and 7, Refer to Figure 5-4-1). Verify that
voltage is between 20 and 28 VDC. Replace 24V supply if needed.
3. Monitor TP2 and TP4 on Power Supply PC board for +24VDC (Refer to Figure 5-4-1).
4. Check powerhead motor board test point TP27 referenced to GND TP52, for voltage
between 20 and 28 VDC (Refer to Figure 5-4-2). Reference LED DS1 is on (Refer to
Figure 5-4-3).
5. Check powerhead logic board RF1 for damage.
6. Ohm out powerhead cable connections. Replace powerhead cable if needed
7. Replace powerhead logic board, download software. Perform all calibrations as
described in chapter 8. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 5-4-6

ALARM NO. 0x2010:

Meaning:
+12 Power Supply Failure.
Description:
Powerhead software detected power supply voltage is not between 10.8 and
13.2 volts.
P1 = Actual Voltage.
Action:
1. Monitor test point TP115 referenced to GND, TP 111, on powerhead logic board
(Reference LED DS5 is ON, Refer to Figure 5-4-3).
5—TROUBLESHOOTING
POWERHEAD ALARMS

2. Replace powerhead logic board. Perform all calibrations as described in chapter 8.

Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.

ALARM NO. 0x2011:

Meaning:
+5 Power Supply Failure.
Description:
Powerhead software detected power supply voltage is not between 4.5 and 5.5
volts.
P1 = Actual Voltage.
Action:
1. Monitor voltage on test point TP110 referenced to GND, TP 111, on the powerhead
logic board (Reference LED DS3 is ON, Refer to Figure 5-4-3).
2. Replace powerhead logic board, download software. Perform all calibrations as
described in chapter 8. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 5-4-7

ALARM NO. 0x2012:

Meaning:
+3.3 Power Supply Failure.
Description:
Powerhead software detected power supply voltage is not between 3.2 and
3.47 volts.
P1 = Actual Voltage.
Action:
1. Check voltage on test TP108 referenced to GND, TP 114, on the powerhead logic
board (Reference LED DS4 is ON, Refer to Figure 5-4-3).

5—TROUBLESHOOTING
POWERHEAD ALARMS
2. Replace powerhead logic board, download software. Perform all calibrations as
described in chapter 8. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 5-4-8

ALARM NO. 0x2013:

Meaning:
Ram Position Sensor Failure.
Description:
The powerhead software tests the Hall Effect Ram position sensors on power
up and prior to enabling for short or open conditions.
P1 = Failed
P2 = Instance (0001, 0002, or 0003)
P3 = Retracted Hall Effect Voltage on failing side.
5—TROUBLESHOOTING

P4 = Extended Hall Effect Voltage on failing side.

POWERHEAD ALARMS

P5 = End-of-Travel Hall Effect Voltage on failing side.

Possible causes:
• Faulty sensor or sensors.
Action:
1. If P2 is 0001 then:
a. Cycle power ON/OFF.
b. Ensure ram position magnet is in place on anti-rotation block.
c. Replace powerhead logic board, download software. Perform all
calibrations as described in chapter 8. Verify calibration as described in
section 8.6.
2. If P2 is 0002, or 0003, then recalibrate Ram position.
ALARM NO. 0x2014
Meaning:
EEPROM Communication failure.
Description:
Powerhead logic cannot communicate with the EEPROM.
Action:
1. Re-download powerhead software.
2. Replace the powerhead logic board, download software. Perform all calibrations as
described in chapter 8. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 5-4-9

ALARM NO. 0x2015:

Meaning:
Faceplate Adapter Sensor Failure.
Description:
The powerhead software has detected a short or open condition for any
faceplate size other than 200 mL or 125 mL adapter on power up and prior to
enabling.
P1 = Failed
P2 = Adapter Sensor Voltage.
P3 = 0

5—TROUBLESHOOTING
POWERHEAD ALARMS
P4 = Location in Software.
P5 = Latch Sensor Voltage.
Action:
1. Ensure Faceplate magnet is not installed backward.
2. Ensure powerhead logic board hall effect sensor U17 is pushed forward and
touching the front plate when logic board is installed.
3. Replace powerhead logic board, download software. Perform all calibrations as
described in chapter 8. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.
ALARM NO. 0x2016 (Not Used)
ALARM NO. 0x2017 (Not Used)
ALARM NO. 0x2018 (Not Used)

847503-E 2017-04-21
5-4-10

ALARM NO. 0x2019

Meaning:
Motor Hall Effect sensors error.
Description:
Motor Hall effect sensors not responding.
P1 = Failed
P2 = Location in Software.
P3 = Motor Hall effect position.
Action:
5—TROUBLESHOOTING
POWERHEAD ALARMS

1. Ensure motor connectors are secure and harness intact.

2. Replace motor.
3. Replace powerhead logic board. Perform all calibrations as described in chapter 8.
Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.

ALARM NO. 0x2020 (Not Used)

ALARM NO. 0x2021 (Not Used)
ALARM NO. 0x2022 (Not Used)

847503-E 2017-04-21
 5-4-11

ALARM NO. 0x2023:

Meaning:
Console Software Version Incompatibility.
Description:
The powerhead software compared console software version and found they
are not compatible.
P1 = Powerhead Software Version.
P2 = Console Software Version.
Possible causes:

5—TROUBLESHOOTING
• Console or powerhead version of software is incompatible software.

POWERHEAD ALARMS
Action:
Download compatible software into entire injector.
ALARM NO. 0x2025:
Meaning:
OEM Interface Software Version Incompatibility.
Description:
The powerhead software compared OEM Interface software version and found
they are not compatible.
P1 = Powerhead Software Version.
P2 = OEM Interface Software Version.
Possible causes:
• Determine if OEM Interface or powerhead version of software is
incompatible
Action:
Download compatible software into entire injector.

847503-E 2017-04-21
5-4-12

ALARM NO. 0x2026:

Meaning:
Motor did not Start.
Description:
The powerhead software detected no motor encoder pulses were detected
within 0.5s from the command to start.
P1 = Did not start
Possible causes:
• Faulty powerhead logic board or motor board in powerhead.
5—TROUBLESHOOTING

• Faulty motor.
POWERHEAD ALARMS

• Faulty connection to motor or motor encoder.

• Motor Overheated.
Action:
1. Check that the ballscrew is not jammed by ensuring that the ball screw/ram moves
freely while rotating the manual knob.
2. Verify that the powerhead ram is functioning by using the forward and reverse slide
bar on the powerhead.
If motor runs, verify motor encoder harness continuity and check encoder pulse
lines from the motor for activity (Encoder A measured on the motor board between
TP13 and TP5, Encoder B between TP14 and TP5) (Refer to Figure 7-4-11).
If there is no encoder activity, replace the motor.
If there is encoder activity, replace the motor board and retest.
If the problem persists, place original motor board back into system and
replace the powerhead logic board, download software, and calibrate injector.
If the motor does not run, proceed to step 3.
3. Verify the integrity of the motor drive MOSFETs on the powerhead motor board by
measuring the resistance between the tab, pin 2, and the other two pins on each
MOSFET (Refer to Figure 5-4-2). To perform this:
Turn off power.
Measure the resistance between pins 2 and 1, and 2 and 3 on each of the 6 MOSFETs,
(Q1 - Q6 on the motor board).
If any resistance measured is below 1K ohm, the MOSFET is bad. Replace powerhead
motor board. Perform all calibrations as described in chapter 8. Verify calibration as
described in section 8.6.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 5-4-13

ALARM NO. 0x2027:

Meaning:
Motor not Stopped.
Description:
The powerhead software detected motor encoder pulses within 0.5s from the
command to stop motor.
P1 = Did not stop
P2 = Expected Volume
P3 = Actual Volume

5—TROUBLESHOOTING
Possible causes:

POWERHEAD ALARMS
• Faulty connection to motor or motor encoder.
• Faulty powerhead CPU board.
• Faulty motor.
Action:
1. Check motor cables
2. Replace powerhead motor board and retest.
3 Replace powerhead logic board, download software. Perform all calibrations as
described in chapter 8. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.
4. Replace faulty motor. Perform position calibration. Perform pressure calibration as
described in section 8.5. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.

847503-E 2017-04-21
5-4-14

ALARM NO. 0x2028:

Meaning:
Retracted Hall Effect Sensor does not match Encoder Counts.
Description:
The powerhead software detected (from the motor encoder counts) that the
ram is flush with the faceplate adapter, and the retracted ram position sensor
does not indicate a home position.
P1 = Failed
P2 = Instance in Software.
P3 = Retracted ram Hall Effect voltage.
5—TROUBLESHOOTING
POWERHEAD ALARMS

P4 = Retracted ram Hall Effect Calibration Voltage.

Possible causes:
• Faulty ram positioning sensors on the powerhead CPU board.
• Faulty connection to motor or motor encoder.
• Faulty powerhead CPU board.
• Faulty motor.
Action:
1. Check for worn belts on ram motors.
2. Inspect Motor/Encoder wire harness.
3. Re-calibrate ram position sensors. NOTE: ensure ram is flush when starting
procedure, and no faceplate is installed. Perform pressure calibration as described in
section 8.5, Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.
4. Is ram flush when alarm occurs?
If NO: expect encoder problem, replace faulty motor.
If YES: expect Hall Effect problem. Replace powerhead logic board, download
software. Perform all calibrations as described in chapter 8. Verify calibration as
described in section 8.6.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 5-4-15

ALARM NO. 0x2029:

Meaning:
Extended Hall Effect Sensor does not match Encoder Counts.
Description:
The powerhead software detected (from the motor encoder counts) that the
ram is at the fully extended position, but the extended ram position sensor
does not indicate an extended position.
P1 = Motor encoder counts
P2 = Instance in software.
P3 = Extended ram Hall Effect voltage.

5—TROUBLESHOOTING
POWERHEAD ALARMS
P4 = Extended ram Hall Effect Calibration Voltage.
Possible causes:
• Faulty ram positioning sensor on the powerhead logic board.
• Faulty connection to motor or motor encoder.
• Faulty motor.
• Faulty powerhead logic board.
Action:
1. Check for worn belts on drive motors.
2. Inspect Motor/Encoder wire harness.
3. Re-calibrate ram position sensors. NOTE: ensure ram is flush when starting
procedure, and no faceplate is installed. Perform all calibrations as described in
chapter 8. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.
4. Is ram fully extended when fault occurs?
If NO: expect encoder problem, replace faulty motor.
If YES: expect Hall Effect problem. Replace powerhead logic board and
download software. Perform all calibrations as described in chapter 8. Verify
calibration as described in section 8.6.

847503-E 2017-04-21
5-4-16

ALARM NO. 0x2030:

Meaning:
Servo Control Over Flow Rate.
Description:
The powerhead software detected that the flow rate has exceeded the
programmed flow rate by more than 0.2 mL/sec or 20%, whichever is smaller.
P1 = Failed.
P2 = Programmed Flow Rate.
P3 = Flow Rate.
5—TROUBLESHOOTING

P4 = Hall effect Flow Rate.

POWERHEAD ALARMS

Possible causes:
• Line obstruction.
• Faulty powerhead motor board.
• Faulty powerhead logic board.
Action:
1. Check for line obstruction.
2. Replace the powerhead motor board and retest. If unit still fails, return original
motor board to powerhead and proceed to next step.
3. Replace powerhead logic board, download software. Perform all calibrations as
described in chapter 8. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.
4. Replace motor. Perform position calibration. Perform pressure calibration as
described in section 8.5. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 5-4-17

ALARM NO. 0x2031:

Meaning:
Hall Effect Over Flow Rate.
Description:
During an injection, the powerhead software determined that the Hall Effect
flow rate has exceeded the programmed flow rate by more than 0.2 mL/sec or
20%, whichever is smaller.
P1 = Failed.
P2 = Programmed Flow Rate.
P3 = Flow Rate.

5—TROUBLESHOOTING
POWERHEAD ALARMS
P4 = Hall effect Flow Rate.
Possible causes:
• Line obstruction.
• Faulty powerhead motor board.
• Faulty powerhead logic board.
Action:
1. Check for line obstructions.
2. Replace the powerhead motor board and retest. If unit still fails, return original
motor board to powerhead and proceed to next step.
3. Replace powerhead logic board, download software. Perform all calibrations as
described in chapter 8. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.
4. Replace motor. Perform position calibration. Perform pressure calibration as
described in section 8.5. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6

847503-E 2017-04-21
5-4-18

ALARM NO. 0x2032:

Meaning:
Servo Control Under Flow Rate.
Description:
During an injection, for non-pressure limiting injections, the powerhead
software determined that the flow rate is less then the programmed flow rate
by more than 0.2 mL/sec or 20%, whichever is smaller.
P1 = Failed.
P2 = Programmed Flow Rate.
P3 = Flow Rate.
5—TROUBLESHOOTING
POWERHEAD ALARMS

P4 = Hall Effect Flow Rate.

Possible causes:
• Faulty powerhead motor board.
• Faulty powerhead logic board.
• Faulty motor.
Action:
1. Replace the powerhead motor board and retest. If unit still fails, return original
motor board to powerhead and proceed to next step.
2. Replace powerhead logic board, download software. Perform all calibrations as
described in chapter 8. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.
3. Replace motor. Perform position calibration. Perform pressure calibration as
described in section 8.5. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 5-4-19

ALARM NO. 0x2033:

Meaning:
Hall Effect Under Flow Rate.
Description:
During an injection, the powerhead software determined that the motor Hall
Effect flow rate is less then the programmed flow rate by more than 0.2 mL/sec
or 20%, whichever is smaller.
P1 = Failed.
P2 = Programmed Flow.
P3 = Flow Rate.

5—TROUBLESHOOTING
POWERHEAD ALARMS
P4 = Hall Effect Flow.
Possible causes:
• Faulty powerhead motor board.
• Faulty powerhead logic board.
• Faulty motor.
Action:
1. Replace the powerhead motor board and retest. If unit still fails, return original
motor board to powerhead and proceed to next step.
2. Replace powerhead logic board, download software. Perform all calibrations as
described in chapter 8. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.
3. Replace motor. Perform position calibration. Perform pressure calibration as
described in section 8.5. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.

847503-E 2017-04-21
5-4-20

ALARM NO. 0x2034:

Meaning:
Servo Control Over Volume.
Description:
The powerhead software determined that the pilot injected volume exceeded
the programmed volume by more than 2 mL or 20%, whichever is smaller.
P1 = Failed.
P2 = Programmed Volume.
P3 = Volume.
5—TROUBLESHOOTING

P4 = Hall Effect Volume.

POWERHEAD ALARMS

Possible causes:
• Faulty powerhead motor board.
• Faulty powerhead logic board.
• Faulty motor.
Action:
1. Replace the powerhead motor board and retest. If unit still fails, return original
motor board to powerhead and proceed to next step.
2. Replace powerhead logic board, download software. Perform all calibrations as
described in chapter 8. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.
3. Replace motor. Perform position calibration. Perform pressure calibration as
described in section 8.5. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 5-4-21

ALARM NO. 0x2035:

Meaning:
Hall Effect Over Volume.
Description:
The powerhead software detected that the Hall Effect injected volume
exceeded the programmed volume by more than 2 mL or 20%, whichever is
smaller.
P1 = Failed.
P2 = Programmed Volume.
P3 = Volume.

5—TROUBLESHOOTING
POWERHEAD ALARMS
P4 = Hall effect Volume.
Possible causes:
• Faulty powerhead motor board.
• Faulty powerhead logic board.
• Faulty motor.
Action:
1. Replace the powerhead motor board and retest. If unit still fails, return original
motor board to powerhead and proceed to next step.
2. Replace powerhead logic board, download software. Perform all calibrations as
described in chapter 8. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.
3. Replace motor. Perform position calibration. Perform pressure calibration as
described in section 8.5. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.

847503-E 2017-04-21
5-4-22

ALARM NO. 0x2036:

Meaning:
Servo Control Under Volume.
Description:
The powerhead software determined that the pilot injected volume is less than
the programmed volume by more than 2 mL or 20%, whichever is smaller.
P1 = Failed.
P2 = Programmed Volume.
P3 = Volume.
5—TROUBLESHOOTING

P4 = Hall effect Volume.

POWERHEAD ALARMS

Possible causes:
• Faulty powerhead motor board.
• Faulty powerhead logic board.
• Faulty motor.
Action:
1. Replace the powerhead motor board and retest. If unit still fails, return original
motor board to powerhead and proceed to next step.
2. Replace powerhead logic board, download software. Perform all calibrations as
described in chapter 8. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.
3. Replace motor. Perform position calibration. Perform pressure calibration as
described in section 8.5. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 5-4-23

ALARM NO. 0x2037:

Meaning:
Hall Effect Under Volume.
Description:
The powerhead software determined that the Hall Effect injected volume is less
than the programmed volume by more than 2 mL or 20%, whichever is smaller.
P1 = Failed.
P2 = Programmed Volume.
P3 = Volume.

5—TROUBLESHOOTING
POWERHEAD ALARMS
P4 = Hall Effect Volume.
Possible causes:
• Faulty powerhead motor board.
• Faulty powerhead logic board.
• Faulty motor.
Action:
1. Replace the powerhead motor board and retest. If unit still fails, return original
motor board to powerhead and proceed to next step.
2. Replace powerhead logic board, download software. Perform all calibrations as
described in chapter 8. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.
3. Replace motor. Perform position calibration. Perform pressure calibration as
described in section 8.5. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.

847503-E 2017-04-21
5-4-24

ALARM NO. 0x2038:

Meaning:
Motor Current Sensor Failure.
Description:
The powerhead software sensing circuit detected improper motor current
during power up or prior to enabling.
P1 = Failed.
P2 = Voltage of motor current sensor.
Possible causes:
5—TROUBLESHOOTING

• Faulty powerhead motor board.

POWERHEAD ALARMS

• Faulty powerhead logic board.

Action:
1. Replace the powerhead motor board and retest. If unit still fails, return original
motor board to powerhead and proceed to next step.
2. Replace powerhead logic board, download software. Perform all calibrations as
described in chapter 8. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 5-4-25

ALARM NO. 0x2039:

Meaning:
Motor Limit Failure.
Description:
The powerhead software verifies the Servo Controller chip has been
programmed with the proper motor limit prior to the start of every phase of an
injection.
P1 = Failed.
P2 = Object in Software.
P3 = Location in Software.

5—TROUBLESHOOTING
POWERHEAD ALARMS
P4 = Program torque value.
P5 = Servo Controller torque value.
Possible causes:
• Faulty powerhead motor board.
• Faulty powerhead logic board.
Action:
1. Replace the powerhead motor board and retest. If unit still fails, return original
motor board to powerhead and proceed to next step.
2. Replace powerhead logic board, download software. Perform all calibrations as
described in chapter 8. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.

ALARM NO. 0x2040:

Meaning:
+2.5 Power Supply Failure.
Description:
Powerhead software detected power supply voltage is not between 2.25 and
2.75 volts.
P1 = Actual Voltage.
Action:
Replace powerhead logic board, download software. Perform all calibrations as
described in chapter 8. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.

847503-E 2017-04-21
5-4-26

ALARM NO. 0x2041:

Meaning:
Protocol CRC Failure.
Description:
Powerhead software detected a CRC failure of any protocol recalled from
EEPROM including the initial display of the correct protocol.
P1 = Expected CRC.
P2 = Actual CRC.
P3 = Location in Software.
5—TROUBLESHOOTING

Action:
POWERHEAD ALARMS

1. Download software and retest. If unit still fails then proceed to next step.
2. Replace powerhead logic board, download software. Perform all calibrations
as described in chapter 8. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.

ALARM NO. 0x2042:

Meaning:
Injector not Calibrated Properly.
Description:
Powerhead software detected a CRC failure of the stored calibration values
stored in EEPROM.
P1 = Expected CRC.
P2 = Actual CRC.
P3 = Calibration Bits.
Action:
1. Re-calibrate ram position and pressure calibration as described in chapter 8. Verify
calibration as described in section 8.6.
2. Replace powerhead logic board, download software. Perform all calibrations as
described in chapter 8. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 5-4-27

ALARM NO. 0x2043:

Meaning:
Powerhead Video RAM Failure.
Description:
Powerhead software detected a Video RAM failure on power up.
Action:
Replace powerhead logic board, download software. Perform all calibrations as
described in chapter 8. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.

ALARM NO. 0x2044:

5—TROUBLESHOOTING
POWERHEAD ALARMS
Meaning:
Servo Controller Chip Failure.
Description:
Powerhead software detected a failure of the servo processor.
P1 = Failed.
P2 = Object in Software.
P3 = Location in Software.
Action:
1. Replace the powerhead motor board and retest. If unit still fails, return original
motor board to powerhead and proceed to next step.
2. Replace powerhead logic board, download software. Perform all calibrations as
described in chapter 8. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.

847503-E 2017-04-21
5-4-28

ALARM NO. 0x2045:

Meaning:
PLD chip did not Stop Motor.
Description:
Powerhead software detected a failure of the Motor Disable Circuits during
power up.
P1 = Failed.
P2 = Test Position 1.
P3 = Test Position 2.
5—TROUBLESHOOTING

Action:
POWERHEAD ALARMS

1. Replace the powerhead motor board and retest. If unit still fails, return original
motor board to powerhead and proceed to next step.
2. Replace powerhead logic board, download software. Perform all calibrations as
described in chapter 8. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.

ALARM NO. 0x2046:

Meaning:
Powerhead Lost Communication with console #1.
Description:
Powerhead lost communication with console #1 connected to J10A on the
Power Supply for 2 seconds.
Action:
1. Connect console cable on J10A to J10B and retry.
2. Diagnose any error displayed on console display.
3. Check console cable, replace if needed.
4. Replace console Interface board.
5. Replace console CPU board, and download software. Perform console touchscreen
calibration as described in section 8.2. Verify date and time in console setup screen
as described in section 3.1.6.
6. Replace powerhead logic board, download software. Perform all calibrations as
described in chapter 8. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 5-4-29

ALARM NO. 0x2048:

Meaning:
Miscellaneous Software Alarm.
Description:
P1 = Object in Software.
P2 = Location in Software
Action:
1. Download or update software.
2. Contact Service.

5—TROUBLESHOOTING
POWERHEAD ALARMS
TP4
TP2
Power Supply
PC Board
TB2, 7 TP1
TP4
TP2

TB2, 4

Figure 5-4-1 Power Supply Test Points

847503-E 2017-04-21
5-4-30

TP5, GND
5—TROUBLESHOOTING
POWERHEAD ALARMS

MOSFET Q2
MOSFET Q1

MOSFET Q2 MOSFET Q4

MOSFET Q3

TP27

MOSFET Q6
Figure 5-4-2 Powerhead Motor Board

847503-E 2017-04-21
 5-4-31

5—TROUBLESHOOTING
POWERHEAD ALARMS
DS3

TP110
DS1

TP111, GND TP114, GND

TP108
TP115 DS5

Figure 5-4-3 Powerhead Logic Board Test Points

847503-E 2017-04-21
5-4-32

ALARM NO. 0x2049:

Meaning:
Powerhead has detected a problem with injecting screen.
Description:
Powerhead is injecting without proper information on the injecting screen.
Action:
Cycle power. If problem persist, call service.
ALARM NO. 0x2050:
Meaning:
Powerhead lost communication with OEM PCB.
5—TROUBLESHOOTING
POWERHEAD ALARMS

Description:
Powerhead lost communication with OEM PCB for 2 seconds.
Action:
Cycle power. If alarm persist, replace OEM PCB, download software.
ALARM NO. 0x2051:
Meaning:
Out of memory.
Description:
Software cannot allocate memory and must terminate execution.
Action:
Cycle power. If problem persist, call service.
ALARM NO. 0x2052:
Meaning:
Processor Exception .
Description:
The core processor has detected a non-resolvable instruction.
Action:
1. Download or update software.
2. Replace powerhead logic board, download software. Perform all calibrations
as described in chapter 8. Verify calibration as described in section 8.6.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 5-5-1

5.5 OEM ALARMS 3000 SERIES

ALARM NO. 0x3003
Meaning:
OEM Interface Power-on self test failed.
Description:
OEM Interface failed test of internal memory or CPU failure.
P1 = problem source:
0x0001 OEM PCB SPI failure
0x0002 OEM PCB Peripheral chip failure
0x0010 OEM NV Memory failure

5—TROUBLESHOOTING
0x0011 OEM Main Program CRC failure

POWERHEAD ALARMS
Action:
For P1 = 0x0011:
1. Re-download OEM Interface software
2. Replace OEM PC board.
For other P1 values:
1. Replace OEM PC board.

ALARM NO. 0x3005:

Meaning:
OEM watchdog time-out.
Description:
The OEM watchdog timer expired.
Action:
1. Re-download OEM Interface software.
2. Replace the OEM PC board.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 5-5-2

ALARM NO. 0x3008:

Meaning:
Communication Error.
Description:
OEM board failed to communicate with powerhead.
Possible Causes:
Faulty powerhead cable
Loose OEM board
Faulty OEM board
5—TROUBLESHOOTING
POWERHEAD ALARMS

Faulty powerhead board

Action:
Ensure OEM board is connected securely.
Ensure powerhead cable is connected to power supply.
Ohm out communication cable lines 4 and 5 on the powerhead cable.
Replace OEM board.
Replace powerhead logic board.

ALARM NO. 0x3048:

Meaning:
OEM Interface miscellaneous CAN Error.
Description:
OEM Interface CAN communication buffer error.
P3 = problem source:
0x0001 or 0x0002 = Internal CAN buffer to Injector communications
0x0002 or 0x0003 = CAN buffer to Scanner communications
Action:
1. Download or update software to OEM board.
2. Contact Service.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 5-5-3

ALARM NO. 0x3051:

Meaning:
OEM Interface Board out of Memory.
Description:
OEM interface board unable to allocate internal memory.
Action:
1. Download or update software to OEM board.
2. Replace OEM Interface board.

5—TROUBLESHOOTING
POWERHEAD ALARMS
ALARM NO. 0x3052:
Meaning:
CAN Data Format Error.
Description:
Corrupted data in CAN communication packet.
Action:
1. Download or update software to OEM board.
2. Replace OEM Interface board.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 5-5-4
5—TROUBLESHOOTING
POWERHEAD ALARMS

This page intentionally left blank.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-1-1

6 FIELD REPLACEABLE
PARTS

This chapter provides disassembly and assembly instructions for the installation
of OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System field replaceable parts. These
parts are defined in the following sections:
Section 6-2 Console (P/N 844100)
Section 6-3 Powerhead (P/N 847100)
Section 6-4 Power Supply (P/N 847300)
Section 6-5 Remote Stand (P/N 844500)

6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
Section 6-6 Suspension System
Section 6-7 Accessory Items
When removing a specific item, follow the disassembly instructions up to the
point where the removal of that particular item is discussed. To disassemble an
item may require sub components to be removed first. If this is the case, you
will be directed to perform the appropriate sub component instruction first. To
replace an item, follow the disassembly instructions in reverse order until the
unit is completely reassembled.

6.1 GENERAL INFORMATION

6.1.1 TERMINOLOGY
• The term Wire harness is used to identify internal unit cabling.
• The term Cable is used to identify cabling between each OptiOne Single-
Head Contrast Delivery System unit.
6.1.2 REPLACEABLE PARTS
• Each section in this chapter identifies OptiOne Single-Head Contrast
Delivery System component replaceable parts.
Note: Separate instructions for Accessories are supplied with each Accessory
shipment. Each kit lists the hardware and tool requirements, and includes
drawings and instructions for installation.
WARNING!

No modification of this equipment is allowed.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-1-2
6—DISASSEMBLY

This page intentionally left blank.

REASSEMBLY

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-2-1

6.2 CONSOLE

DANGER!
Before attempting any disassembly procedure, turn off all power to the
OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System.

Replacement parts for the console are contained in kits. Disassembly and
installation procedures of these kits are defined in this section.
6.2.1 CONSOLE REPLACEMENT COMPONENTS
Refer to Figures 6-2-1 and 6-2-2 for component location.
KIT: CONSOLE CPU BOARD (P/N 844101-1S)
Find No. Description Quantity
3 CONSOLE CPU BOARD 1

6—DISASSEMBLY
KIT: TOUCHSCREEN 10.4” (P/N 802104S)

REASSEMBLY
Find No. Description Quantity
5 TOUCHSCREEN, 10.4” 1
KIT: CONSOLE COVERS (P/N 844198S)
Find No. Description Quantity
6 CONSOLE FRONT COVER 1
7 CONSOLE BACK COVER 1
KIT: CONSOLE SWITCH ASSEMBLY (P/N 802114S)
Find No. Description Quantity
8 CONSOLE SWITCH ASSEMBLY 1
11 MOUNTING PLATE, BUTTON 1
28 SWITCH BUTTON, CONSOLE 1
KIT: INTERFACE CABLE ASSEMBLY (P/N 802110S)
Find No. Description Quantity
10 INTERFACE CABLE ASSEMBLY 1

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-2-2

KIT: COMM. PCB, OPTIONE SINGLE-HEAD (P/N 844102-1S)

Find No. Part Description Quantity
16 JACK SCREW KIT, SOCKET 1
4 PCB ASSY, OptiOne Single-Head INTERFACE 1
17 #4 SCREW 2
14 SPACER CAP 2
KIT: DISPLAY SUB ASSEMBLY (P/N 802116S)
Find No. Description Quantity
12 DISPLAY SUB ASSEMBLY 1
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-2-3

25 28

18 27

26
31

6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
FRONT VIEW 12, 29, 30
2x
REF XXXXXX-X
S/N xxxx-xxx

REF 2

22
18x

19 20
3x

BACK VIEW
1
4x

2
BACK VIEW 5x

Figure 6-2-1 Console Assembly (P/N 802100)

847503-E 2017-04-21
6-2-4

24 12
3.0 REF

2x 23 3

21
12 REF 4x

17
4x
SEE NOTE 3

11

8
SEE NOTE 1
6—DISASSEMBLY

PIN 1
REASSEMBLY

FRONT COVER ASSEMBLY

14 17 2x
SEE NOTE 3

J3 15

6 5

13
NOTES:
1. THE INVERTER HARNESS IS ROUTED THROUGH THE NOTCH IN THE MOUNTING PLATE.
THE SWITCH ASSEMBLY IS CONNECTED TO J6 AND THE INVERTER HARNESS IS CONNECTED TO J7.
7
2. CONNECT INTERFACE CABLE FROM J3 OF INTERFACE BOARD TO J5 OF CONSOLE CPU BOARD.

3. THE #4 SCREW (ITEM 17) THREADED INTO THE PLASTIC COVERS (QTY. = 6) SHALL BE TORQUE LIMITED
TO 60 OZ/IN.
10
BACK COVER ASSEMBLY

847503-E 2017-04-21 Figure 6-2-2 Console PCB Assembly (P/ N 802100)

 6-2-5

12

90
22
5- 0
XX

6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
TOP VIEW

BOTTOM VIEW

847503-E 2017-04-21
Figure 6-2-3 Display Subassembly (P/N 802116S)
6-2-6
6—DISASSEMBLY

This page intentionally left blank.

REASSEMBLY

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-2-7

INSTALLATION CONSOLE COVER KIT (844198S)

Required Tools:
Philips No. 1 screwdriver
Find No. Part Description
6 CONSOLE FRONT COVER
7 CONSOLE BACK COVER
Procedure:
Bottom Cover Removal
1. Place the console, with hinge plate attached, face down on a soft, clean surface to
prevent damage to the finish (i.e., table top with soft cloth in between console and
table).
Transfer rear cover hinge plate to kit back cover. To remove hinge plate (item 22),
remove the nine screws (item 24).

6—ASSEMBLY &
DISASSEMBLY
2. To remove the back cover (item 7), remove the four screws (item 1) and slowly lift
away from the front half without fully extending the Interface cable assembly
(item 10).
3. Disconnect Interface cable connection J5 on the CPU board. Then remove two (2)
mounting bracket retaining screws (item 17) and two (2) brass spacer caps (item
14) from mounting bracket (item 13). Remove Interface Board (item 4) with mount-
ing bracket (item 13).
Front Cover Removal
4. On the console CPU board, disconnect Switch cable from J6 connector.
5. Remove four (4) retaining screws securing the display subassembly (item 12) to the
front cover.
6. Remove ferrite around touchscreen and display ribbon cables by sliding off its two
(2) retaining clips.
7. Remove touch screen cable from J2 on CPU PCB.
8. Carefully lift the display subassembly (item 12) and then the touchscreen assembly
from front cover (item 6).
9. Transfer the front cover switch assembly to the kit front cover (item 6) by removing
the four retaining screws.
10. To install covers, perform procedures above in reverse order.
11. With a permanent marker, write the serial number on the label located on the kit
console Back Cover.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-2-8

INSTALLATION CONSOLE CPU KIT (844101-1S)

Required Tools:
Philips No. 1 screwdriver
Find No. Part Description
3 CONSOLE CPU BOARD
Procedure:
1. Place the console, with hinge plate attached, face down on a soft, clean surface to
prevent damage to the finish (i.e., table top with soft cloth in between console and
table).
2. To remove the back cover (item 7), remove the four screws (item 1) and slowly lift
away from the front half without fully extending the Interface cable assembly
(item 10).
3. Disconnect the following five connectors at the console CPU board:
6—ASSEMBLY &

Interface cable from J5

DISASSEMBLY

Touchscreen cable from J2

Display cable (item 2) from J8
Switch assembly (item 8) from J6
Inverter cable (item 9) from J7
4. Remove two (2) screws retaining (item 3), lift console CPU PCB (item 3) off retaining
pegs.
5. Install kit console CPU board (item 3) and perform assembly procedures above in
reverse order.
6. Perform software download to console using procedures in Chapter 9 of this
manual.
7. Perform console touchscreen calibration as described in section 8.2. Verify date and
time in console setup screen as described in section 3.1.6.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-2-9

INSTALLATION DISPLAY SUBASSEMBLY KIT (802116S)

Required Tools:
Philips No. 1 screwdriver
Find No. Part Description
12 DISPLAY SUBASSEMBLY
Procedure:
1. Place the console, with hinge plate attached, face down on a soft, clean surface to
prevent damage to the finish (i.e., table top with soft cloth in between console and
table).
2. To remove the back cover (item 7), remove the four screws (item 1) and slowly lift
away from the front half without fully extending the Interface cable assembly
(item 10).
3. Disconnect the following five connectors at the console CPU board:

6—ASSEMBLY &
Interface cable from J5

DISASSEMBLY
Touchscreen cable from J2
Display cable (item 2) from J8
Switch assembly (item 8) from J6
Inverter cable (item 9) from J7
4. Remove two (2) screws retaining (item 3), lift console CPU PCB (item 3) off retaining
pegs.
5. Remove four (4) retaining screws securing the Display Subassembly (item 12) to the
front cover.
6. Remove ferrite around touchscreen and display ribbon cables by sliding off its two
(2) retaining clips.
7. Remove Display Subassembly.
8. Install kit Display Subassembly (item 12) and perform assembly procedures above
in reverse order.

847503-E 2017-04-21
6-2-10

INSTALLATION TOUCHSCREEN KIT (802104S)

Required Tools:
Philips No. 1 screwdriver
Find No. Part Description
5 TOUCHSCREEN 10.4"
Procedure:
1. Place the console, with hinge plate attached, face down on a soft, clean surface to
prevent damage to the finish (i.e., table top with soft cloth in between console and
table).
2. To remove the back cover (item 7), remove the four screws (item 1) and slowly lift
away from the front half without fully extending the Interface cable assembly
(item 10).
3. Remove ferrite around touchscreen and display ribbon cables by sliding off its two
(2) retaining clips.
6—ASSEMBLY &
DISASSEMBLY

4. Disconnect the following two (2) connectors at the console CPU board:
Touchscreen cable from J2
Switch assembly (item 8) from J6
5. Remove four (4) retaining screws securing the Display Subassembly (item 12) to the
front cover. Lift Display Subassembly from front cover
6. Lift Touchscreen from front cover.
7. Install kit Touchscreen (item 5) and perform assembly procedures above in reverse
order.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-2-11

INSTALLATION SWITCH KIT (802114S)

Required Tools:
Philips No. 1 screwdriver
Find No. Part Description
8 CONSOLE SWITCH ASSEMBLY
11 MOUNTING PLATE, BUTTON
28 SWITCH BUTTON, CONSOLE
Procedure:
1. Place the console, with hinge plate attached, face down on a soft, clean surface to
prevent damage to the finish (i.e., table top with soft cloth in between console and
table).
2. To remove the back cover (item 7), remove the four screws (item 1) and slowly lift
away from the front half without fully extending the Interface cable assembly
(item 10).

6—ASSEMBLY &
DISASSEMBLY
3. Remove ferrite around touchscreen and display ribbon cables by sliding off its two
(2) retaining clips.
4. Disconnect the following two (2) connectors at the console CPU board:
Touchscreen cable from J2
Switch assembly (item 8) from J6
5. Remove four (4) screws retaining the Display Subassembly and gently move it aside
until the console Power Switch is exposed.
6. Remove four (4) retaining screws from the console Power Switch mounting plate
(item 11) and remove button mounting plate. Then remove console Power Switch
Assembly.
7. Install Switch kit and perform assembly procedures above in reverse order.

847503-E 2017-04-21
6-2-12

INSTALLATION INTERFACE BOARD KIT (844102-1S)

Required Tools:
Philips No. 1 screwdriver
Find No. Part Description
4 INTERFACE BOARD
13 MOUNTING BRACKET
16 JACK SCREW KIT, SOCKET
Procedure:
1. Place the console, with hinge plate attached, face down on a soft, clean surface to
prevent damage to the finish (i.e., table top with soft cloth in between console and
table).
2. To remove the back cover (item 7), remove the four screws (item 1) and slowly lift
away from the front half without fully extending the Interface cable assembly
(item 10).
6—ASSEMBLY &
DISASSEMBLY

3. Remove harness assembly (item 10) from Interface board (item 4), connector J3.
4. Disconnect Interface cable connection J5 on the CPU board. Then remove two (2)
mounting bracket retaining screws (item 17) and two (2) brass spacer caps (item
14) from mounting bracket (item 13). Remove Interface Board (item 4) with mount-
ing bracket (item 13).
5. Separate mounting bracket (item 13) from Interface Board (item 4) by removing
two (2) standoff nuts from J1, 15 pin D-shell.
Note: Be sure to retain mounting bracket (item 13). This bracket must be
installed to kit Interface Board (item 4) when it is replaced.
6. Install kit Interface Board, and perform assembly procedures above in reverse or-
der.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-3-1

6.3 POWERHEAD
DANGER!

Always turn OFF power to the injector before attempting powerhead

disassembly/assembly procedures.

Replacement parts for the powerhead are contained in kits. Disassembly and
installation procedures of these kits are defined in this section.

To
50
ta

Pr
lm

0
ot
L

oc
ol
Na
m
e
0:0
To

Opming
ta

Ti
l Ti

Ena
0:0

tiB Bo
m

olu lus
e

bl

19
1

s
e

7
A
Pe
ak

Sc
32
an 0
PS

In
5

jec 0
I

De

t De
lay

Ch
lay

ec
k
for
air

6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
Figure 6-3-1 Powerhead on Remote Stand

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-3-2

6.3.1 POWERHEAD KIT COMPONENTS

Refer to Figures 6-3-2 thru 6-3-5 for component location.
KIT: TOP COVER, (P/N 847181S)
Find No. Part Description Quantity
21 TOP COVER, POWERHEAD 1

KIT: BOTTOM COVER, (P/N 847190S)

Find No. Part Description Quantity
19 BOTTOM COVER, POWERHEAD 1
32 S/N LABEL 1

KIT: BEZEL ASSY (P/N 847180S)

6—DISASSEMBLY

Find No. Part Description Quantity

REASSEMBLY

22 LCD BEZEL 1
35 DISPLAY OVERLAY 1
20 BEZEL GASKET 1

KIT: KNOB (P/N 844395S)

Find No. Part Description Quantity
4 KNOB ASSY, LIGHTED MANUAL 1
5 KNOB GASKET 1

KIT: POWERHEAD CABLE (P/N 847150S)

Find No. Part Description Quantity
2 CABLE ASSY., POWERHEAD 1
25 GASKET, POWERHEAD CABLE 1
6 HEATER BLANKET, CABLE ASSY 1
11 FERRITE, CABLE CLAMP-ON, .210 DIA MAX 1
12 FERRITE, CABLE CLAMP-ON, .506 DIA MAX 1
31 TY-WRAP (P/N 215115) 3
30 TY-WRAP (P/N 302518) 2

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-3-3

KIT: GASKETS (P/N 847224S) (Some parts under P/N 847110)

Find No. Part Description Quantity
847110-5 PIVOT SEAL (847211-UNDER RAM ASSY) 1
5 KNOB GASKET 1
847110-10 FRONT PLATE GASKET 1
20 BEZEL GASKET 1
25 CABLE GASKET, POWERHEAD 1

KIT: PCB ASSY, KNOB LED (P/N 847140-1S)

Find No. Part Description Quantity
27 PCB ASSY, OPTIONE SINGLE-HEAD KNOB LED 1

KIT: PCB ASSY, LOGIC (P/N 847170-1S)

6—DISASSEMBLY
Find No. Part Description Quantity

REASSEMBLY
23 PCB ASSY, LOGIC 1

KIT: PCB ASSY, MOTOR DRIVER (P/N 847160-1S)

Find No. Part Description Quantity
24 PCB ASSY, MOTOR DRIVER 1

KIT: HORIZONTAL PIVOT (P/N 847210S)

Find No. Part Description (Under P/N 847110) Quantity
847110-6 PIVOT 1
847110-5 PIVOT GASKET 1

KIT: LCD DISPLAY, (P/N 847203S)

Find No. Part Description Quantity
16 LCD DISPLAY, MODULE/W TOUCH SCREEN 1
17 LCD DISPLAY BRACKET 1

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-3-4

KIT: PULLEY (P/N 844372S)

Find No. Part Description (Under P/N 847110) Quantity
847110-13 RETAINING RING-1/4 1
847110-27 PULLEY, 25 TOOTH 1
847110-26 PULLEY, 60 TOOTH 1
847110-23 BELT, 3 MM HTD 1
847110-18 KEY, 1/8” SQUARE 1
847110-17 NUT, M8, HEX, NYLON INSERT 1
BLUE LOCTITE (Small Tube) 1

KIT: MOTOR (P/N 844376S)

Find No. Part Description (Some parts under P/N 847110) Quantity
847110-27 25 TOOTH PULLEY (Under 847110) 1
6—DISASSEMBLY

847110-24 MOTOR, PITTMAN (Under 847110) 1

REASSEMBLY

12 FERRITE, CABLE CLAMP-ON, .506 DIA MAX 1

31 TY-WRAP (P/N 215115) 3
30 TY-WRAP (P/N 302518) 2
BLUE LOCTITE (Small Tube) 1

KIT: BELT (P/N 844377S)

Find No. Part Description Quantity
847110-23 BELT, 3 MM HTD 1

KIT: PIVOT BUSHING (P/N 844369S)

Find No. Part Description Quantity
10 PIVOT WASHER 2
7 BUSHING, PIVOT 1
9 PIVOT CAP 1
8 PIVOT THRUST WASHER 1
29 KNOB, M8 1

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-3-5

KIT: 125 ML FACEPLATE (P/N 844425)

Find No. Part Description Quantity
FACEPLATE ASSEMBLY, 125 ML 1

KIT: 200 ML FACEPLATE (P/N 844850)

Find No. Part Description Quantity
FACEPLATE ASSEMBLY, 200 ML 1

KIT: 200 ML THUMB KNOB (P/N 844856S)

Find No. Part Description Quantity
THUMB KNOB ONLY 1

KIT: FASTENER POWERHEAD (P/N 847225S)

6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
Find No. Part Description (Some parts under P/N 847110) Quantity
31 TY-WRAP TIES 8
847110-34 SCREW,SEM,#10-32X3/8” PHIL PAN INTL STAR 2
3 SCREW- #4-20 X 3/4 PLASTIC 8
847110-17 NUT, M8, HEX, NYLON INSERT 4
847110-3 WASHER,LOCK,M5,S/S 4
847110-2 SCREW,MACHINE,M5X16 MM,SOC,HEAD,CAP,S/S 4
1 SCREW,M4X.7,10 MM,PR,TH,BLK 4
30 TY-WRAP 2
847110-13 RETAINING RING E-CLIP 2
14 SCREW, M3X8 MM, PSP, SPLIT WASHER/FLAT WASHER, SEMS 14
33 SCREW, M3X10 MM, PSP, SPLIT WASHER/FLAT WASHER, SEMS 6

KIT: HEATER BLANKET CABLE ASSY (P/N 844381S)

Find No. Part Description Quantity
6 HEATER BLANKET CABLE ASSY 1
11 FERRITE, CABLE CLAMP-ON, .210 DIA MAX 1
31 TY-WRAP TIE (P/N 215115) 1

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-3-6

KIT: LED PCB ASSY, CABLE ASSY (P/N 847141S)

Find No. Part Description Quantity
26 CABLE ASSY, LED PCB 1

KIT: LCD FLEX CABLE KIT (P/N 847208S)

Find No. Part Description Quantity
13 LCD FLEX CABLE 1
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-3-7

21

6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
13

1 (2x)

19

32

3 (4x)

14

847503-E 2017-04-21 Figure 6-3-2 Powerhead Assembly (P/N 844300-B Sht 1)

 6-3-8

5
847110-26 27
847110-18 847110-17
847110-13
847110-23
847110-27

20

847110-34 (2X)
14 17 847110-36 (2X)
23
16
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY

847110-24
13
(6X)

847110-6
847110-5

6
14
14 24 7 10 9 8
847110-2 29
(2X)
(4X)

847110-10 25

847503-E 2017-04-21 Figure 6-3-3 Powerhead Assembly (P/N 844300-B Sht 2)

 6-3-9

30 36
31
31

12
12

6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
30

J2

30

P1

J7
11 31 26

J10
J3
12
30 30 J1

847503-E 2017-04-21 Figure 6-3-4 Powerhead Assembly (P/N 844300-B Sht 3)

6-3-10

65.84±1.00

7.50±.25

POWERHEAD CABLE

TO TO
EXTENSION POWERHEAD
CABLE BOARD
6—DISASSEMBLY

ALL CABLES ARE

REASSEMBLY

PIN TO PIN
J1 J1
J2 J2
J3 J3
J4 J4
J5 J5
J6 J6
J7 J7
J8 J8
J9 J9
J10 J10
J11 J11
J12 J12
J13 J13 EXTENSION
J14 J14 CABLE PART NUMBERS
J15 J15
PART NUMBER LENGTH
J16 J16
J17 J17 800109 50 FT.
J18 J18 800110 75 FT.
J19 J19
800111 100 FT.
J20 J20
J21 J21
J22 J22
J23 J23
J24 J24
J25 J25
SHEILD SHEILD

847503-E 2017-04-21 Figure 6-3-5 Powerhead Cable (P/N 847150-A)

 6-3-11

6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
This page intentionally left blank

847503-E 2017-04-21
6-3-12

6.3.2 POWERHEAD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION FROM STAND

Refer to Figure 6-3-6.
1. Turn off all power to the OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System.
2. Remove powerhead cable clamp at the base of the stand. Then disconnect
25 pin D-shell connector between the powerhead cable and powerhead
extension cable.
3. Loosen two screws retaining the sleeve with tray clamp and lift up to remove.
Then pull the powerhead cable out of the stand.
4. Remove threaded pivot knob by turning counterclockwise. Remove pivot
thrust washer, pivot cap, and pivot washer.
5. Rotate powerhead to full upside down horizontal position to unseat from
vertical pivot assembly retainer and pull the powerhead out of the vertical
pivot.
6. To reinstall, position the powerhead upside down in the horizontal position.
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY

Then fully insert powerhead horizontal pivot shaft into the vertical pivot
assembly.
7. Rotate the powerhead forward to the normal operating position.
Reinstall pivot washer, pivot cap, pivot thrust washer, and pivot knob. Then
reinstall cable.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-3-13

1 2

3
To
50
tal

Pro

0
mL

to
co
l Na
me
0:0
To

Op ing
tal

Tim
0:0
En
Tim

tiB
oluBolus
ab
e

19
1

s
le

7
A
Pe
ak
32

Sc 0
PS

an
5

Inj

Tension
I

De

ec
lay

t De
0

Ch
lay

ec
k
for
air

Adjustment

Sleeve
with Tray

6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
Powerhead
Cable

Stationary Post

Powerhead Cable

Plug
Powerhead Cable
Extension Cable Screw
Connection

Wheelbase

Extension
Cable

Figure 6-3-6 Powerhead removal

847503-E 2017-04-21
6-3-14

INSTALLATION TOP COVER, KIT (P/N 847181S)

Required Tools:
Phillips No. 1 Screwdriver
Find No. Part Description
21 TOP COVER, POWERHEAD
Procedure:
Note: Powerhead covers can be removed while mounted to the stand. Also,
powerhead covers can be removed when the faceplate is mounted.
1. Turn off all power to the OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System.
2. Remove four (4) screws (item 3) from bottom cover (item 19). Grasp ram
manual knob and pull back off shaft approximately 1/2”. See figure 6-3-7.
3. Lift top cover (item 21) from powerhead and discard.
4. Install kit top cover (item 21) and perform procedures above in reverse order.
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY

INSTALLATION BOTTOM COVER, KIT (P/N 847190S)

Required Tools:
Phillips No. 1 Screwdriver
Find No. Part Description
19 BOTTOM COVER, POWERHEAD
Procedure:
Note: Powerhead covers can be removed while mounted to the stand. Also,
both powerhead covers can be removed when the faceplate is mounted.
1. Turn off all power to the OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System.
2. Remove four (4) screws (item 3) and two (2) screws (item 14) from bottom
cover (item 19) and remove lower cover. See figure 6-3-7.
3. Install kit bottom cover (item 19) and perform procedures above in reverse
order.
4. With a permanent marker, write the serial number on the label (item 32)
located on the kit Powerhead Bottom Cover.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-3-15

21

6—DISASSEMBLY
19

REASSEMBLY
32

3 (4x)

14 (2x)

Figure 6-3-7 Powerhead Top/Bottom Cover Removal

847503-E 2017-04-21
6-3-16

INSTALLATION BEZEL ASSEMBLY, KIT (847180S)

Required Tools:
Phillips No. 1 Screwdriver
Find No. Part Description
22 LCD Bezel
35 Display Overlay
20 Bezel Gasket
Procedure:
Note: Powerhead covers can be removed while mounted to the stand. Also,
powerhead covers can be removed when the faceplate is mounted.
1. Turn off all power to the OptiOne Single-Head Contrast delivery System.
2. Remove four (4) screws (item 3) from bottom cover (item 19). Grasp ram
manual knob and pull back off shaft approximately ½”. See figure 6-3-7.
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY

3. Lift top cover (item 21) from powerhead.

4. Remove bezel assembly (item 22 and 35) with gasket (item 20) from LCD
mounting bracket by pulling up on the front of bezel assembly to slide the
side snap latches out of the LCD mounting bracket, then pull up on the rear
of the bezel assembly to slide the rear snap latches out of the LCD mounting
bracket and discard.
Note: After removing new bezel assembly (item 22 and 35 come assembled)
and gasket from the kit, ensure gasket is properly seated on bezel before
installing on injector. See figure 6-3-8.
5. Install new bezel assembly (item 22 and 35) and perform procedures above
in reverse order.

20

22 AND 35

Figure 6-3-8 Installed Bezel Gasket Cross Section

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-3-17

INSTALLATION KNOB, KIT (P/N 844395S)

Required Tools:
None
Find No. Part Description
5 KNOB ASSEMBLY, LIGHTED MANUAL
Procedure:
1. Grasp powerhead manual knob and pull straight out. Discard removed
manual knob.
2. Install kit manual knob (item 5) by lining up shaft keyway. Push straight on
until fully seated.

6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
Figure 6-3-9 Powerhead Knob

847503-E 2017-04-21
6-3-18

INSTALLATION POWERHEAD CABLE KIT (P/N 847150S)

Required Tools:
Phillips No. 1 Screwdriver
Small adjustable wrench
Find No. Part Description
25 POWERHEAD CABLE GASKET
2 POWERHEAD CABLE ASSEMBLY
12 LARGE FERRITE
11 SMALL FERRITE
31 & 30 LARGE AND SMALL TY-WRAPS
6 HEATER BLANKET CABLE ASSY (844381)
Procedure:
6—DISASSEMBLY

1. Turn off all power to the OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System, and
REASSEMBLY

remove syringe adapter.

2. Remove support cable clamps. Then disconnect powerhead 25 pin D shell
connector from extension cable connector. Pull powerhead cable clear of
support.
3. Remove four (4) screws (item 3) and two (2) screws (item 4) from bottom cover
(item 19). Grasp ram manual knob and pull back off shaft approximately 1/2”.
Then remove bottom cover. Refer to Figure 6-3-7.
4. Lift top cover (item 21) from powerhead. Refer to Figure 6-3-7.
5. Cut ty-wrap (item 30) from pivot. Refer to Figure 6-3-4.
6. Loosen two (2) screws (item 1) from powerhead cable assembly (item 2). Refer
to Figure 6-3-10.
7. Disconnect powerhead cable 25 pin D shell connection and heater blanket
cable (item 6) from logic board.
8. Remove powerhead cable assembly from injector with gasket and ferrites and
discard.
Note: Powerhead cable assembly (item 2) with gasket (item 25) come pre-
assembled in the kit.
9. To install kit powerhead cable, perform the procedures above in reverse order.
10. Secure .506 diameter ferrite assembly with gasket to pivot using large ty-wrap
(item 30).

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-3-19

6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
6

25

1
(2x)

Figure 6-3-10 Powerhead Cable Installation

847503-E 2017-04-21
6-3-20

INSTALLATION KNOB LED PROCESSOR BOARD KIT (P/N 847140-1S)

Required Tools:
Phillips No. 1 Screwdriver
Find No. Part Description
27 KNOB LED PROCESSOR BOARD (PCB) ASSEMBLY
Procedure:
1. Turn off all power to the OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System, and
remove syringe adapter.
2. Remove four (4) screws (item 3) and two (2) screws (item 14) from
bottom cover (item 19). Grasp ram manual knob and pull back off shaft
approximately 1/2”. Then remove bottom cover. Refer to Figure 6-3-7.
3. Remove top cover (item 21).
4. Grasp the powerhead manual knob and pull it straight off (item 4).
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY

5. Loosen two (2) screws (item 14) from LED processor board (item 27). Refer to
Figure 6-3-11.
6. Disconnect LED board cable at its connector P1, and remove LED board.
7. To install kit LED board, perform procedures above in reverse order.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-3-21

14
(2x)

P1 Connector

27

26

6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY

Figure 6-3-11 LED Processor Board

847503-E 2017-04-21
6-3-22

INSTALLATION LOGIC BOARD, KIT (847170-1S)

Required Tools:
Phillips No. 1 Screwdriver
Find No. Part Description
23 PCB ASSY, LOGIC
Procedure:
Note: Powerhead covers can be removed while mounted to the stand. Also,
powerhead covers can be removed when the faceplate is mounted.
1. Turn off all power to the OptiOne Single-Head Contrast delivery System.
2. Remove four (4) screws (item 3) and two (2) screws (item 14) from
bottom cover (item 19). Grasp ram manual knob and pull back off shaft
approximately ½” and remove lower cover. Refer to Figure 6-3-7.
3. Lift top cover (item 21) from powerhead. Refer to Figure 6-3-7.
4. Remove bezel assembly (item 22) with gasket (item 20) from LCD mounting
6—DISASSEMBLY

bracket by pulling up on the front of bezel assembly to slide the side snap
REASSEMBLY

latches out of the LCD mounting bracket, then pull up on the rear of the
bezel assembly to slide the rear snap latches out of the LCD mounting
bracket.
5. At the logic board pull up touchscreen cable connector J8 tab, then remove
touchscreen cable from connector.
6. At the logic board disconnect LCD Display cable at the J2 connector.
7. At the logic board disconnect the LCD display backlight cable at the J4 connector.
7. Remove four (4) LCD mounting bracket screws (item 14). See Figure 6-3-12.
8. Lift and remove LCD display with mounting bracket.
9. On the underside of the logic board disconnect the powerhead cable at the
J1 connector.
10. On the underside of the logic board disconnect the LED PCB cable at the J3 connector.
11. On the underside of the logic board disconnect the heater blanket cable at
the J10 connector.
12. Remove six (6) screws (item 33) connecting the logic board to the injector mainframe.
13. Lift and remove logic board (item 23) from the injector and discard.
Note: The motor driver board is connected via the J7 connector on the
underside of the logic board. When installing the kit logic board ensure motor
board is reconnected.
14. To install kit logic board, perform the procedures above in reverse order.
15. Ensure that the proper software is loaded onto the new powerhead logic
board; otherwise, download software.
16. Perform all calibrations as described in chapter 8. Verify calibration as
described in section 8.6.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-3-23

J4

22 & 35

20

23

14
(4X)
33
(6X)

6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
J8
J2

Figure 6-3-12 Powerhead Logic Board

847503-E 2017-04-21
6-3-24

INSTALLATION MOTOR DRIVER BOARD, KIT (847160-1S)

Required Tools:
Phillips No. 1 Screwdriver
Find No. Part Description
24 PCB ASSY, MOTOR DRIVER
Procedure:
Note: Powerhead covers can be removed while mounted to the stand. Also,
powerhead covers can be removed when the faceplate is mounted.
1. Turn off all power to the OptiOne Single-Head Contrast delivery System.
2. Remove four (4) screws (item 3) and two (2) screws (item 14) from
bottom cover (item 19). Grasp ram manual knob and pull back off shaft
approximately ½” and remove lower cover. Refer to Figure 6-3-7.
3. Lift top cover (item 21) from powerhead. Refer to Figure 6-3-7.
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY

4. At the motor driver board (item 24) disconnect the motor cable from the J2
connector. Refer to Figure 6-3-13.
5. Remove four (4) screws (item 14) connecting the motor board to its
mounting bracket.
6. Slide the motor driver board (item 24) from its bracket; which will disconnect
it from the J7 connector on the underside of the logic board. Discard the
board.
7. To install kit motor driver board, perform the procedures above in reverse.
8. Perform all calibrations as described in chapter 8. Verify calibration as
described in section 8.6.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-3-25

14

6—DISASSEMBLY
(4X)

REASSEMBLY
24

Figure 6-3-13 Motor Driver Board

847503-E 2017-04-21
6-3-26

INSTALLATION LCD DISPLAY KIT (P/N 847203S)

Required Tools:
Phillips No. 1 Screwdriver
Small adjustable wrench
Find No. Part Description
16 LCD MODULE DISPLAY
17 DISPLAY MOUNTING BRACKET
13 LCD FLEX CABLE

Procedure:
1. Turn off all power to the OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System, and
remove syringe adapter.
6—DISASSEMBLY

2. Remove four (4) screws (item 3). Grasp ram manual knob and pull back off
REASSEMBLY

shaft approximately 1/2”. Refer to Figure 6-3-7.

3. Remove top cover. (item 21). Refer to Figure 6-3-7.
4. Remove the bezel assembly (item 22 and 35) with gasket (item 20) from the
LCD Display Mounting bracket by pulling up on the front of bezel to slide the
side snap latches out of the LCD mounting bracket. Continue pulling up on
the rear of the bezel assembly to slide the rear snap latches out of the LCD
mounting bracket.
5. At the logic board, pull up touchscreen cable connector J8 tab, then remove
touchscreen cable from the connector. Refer to Figure 6-3-14.
6. Disconnect LCD display cable (item 13) from the logic board at the J2
connector.
7. At the logic board, disconnect LCD display backlight cable at the J4
connector.
8. Remove four (4) LCD mounting bracket screws (item 14).
9. Lift and remove LCD display with mounting bracket.
10. Remove LCD flex cable (item 13) from LCD Display.
11. Remove protective plastic cover from touch screen in kit.
12. To install kit LCD display, perform procedures above in reverse order.
Note: Ensure the backlight cable is properly routed to avoid pinching with
covers.
13. Perform touchscreen calibration per section 8.2.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-3-27

22 & 35

20

16
14 (4x)
17

13

6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY

Figure 6-3-14 LCD Display

847503-E 2017-04-21
6-3-28

INSTALLATION PULLEY KIT (P/N 844372S)

Required Tools:
Phillips No. 1 Screwdriver
Snap ring pliers
13 mm box end wrench, or 13 mm deep socket and ratchet.
Find No. Part Description (Parts under P/N 847110)
847110-13 RETAINING RING 5 MM EXTERNAL (844637) 1
847110-27 PULLEY, 25 TOOTH 1
847110-26 PULLEY, 60 TOOTH 1
847110-23 BELT, 3 MM HTD 1
847110-18 KEY, 1/8” SQUARE (844624) 1
847110-17 NUT, M8, HEX NYLON INSERT (184462S) 1
847110-33 BLUE LOCTITE (Small Tube) 1
Procedure:
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY

1. Turn off all power to the OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System, and
remove syringe adapter.
2. Remove four (4) screws (item 3) and two (2) screws (item 14) from bottom
cover (item 1). Grasp ram manual knob and pull back off shaft approximately
1/2”. Then remove bottom cover. Refer to Figure 6-3-7.
3. Remove top cover (item 21). Refer to Figure 6-3-7.
4. Remove ram manual knob (item 4).
5. Loosen two (2) screws (item 14) from LED processor board (item 27). Refer to
Figure 6-3-15.
6. Disconnect LED board (item 27) cable at connector P1, and remove LED board.
7. Ensure ram is extended from the fully retracted position about 1 inch. Loosen
ram pulley retaining nut (847110-17). But do not remove at this time.
Tip: When removing pulley retaining nut (item 847110-17), reinstall the manual
knob on the ram shaft. Then hold knob to keep the ram from moving when
removing nut.
Gently twist the motor to remove belt tension. With belt tension relieved, the
ram belt (847110-23) can be slipped from its large pulley.
8. On the motor (item 847110-24), remove snap ring (item 847110-13) and 25 tooth
pulley (item 847110-27).
9. Remove pulley retaining nut (847110-17) from ball screw ram shaft. Then
remove large 60 tooth pulley (item 847110-26), 1/8” square key (item 847110-
18) from ball screw ram shaft.
10. Replace all removed parts with kit components, and perform reinstall procedures
above in reverse order.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-3-29

Note: Before installing 25 Tooth Pulley (item 847110-27) to motor (item 847110-24)
shaft, apply small portion of blue loctite to the motor shaft.
Note: Before final tightening of the motor screws, rotate motor counter-
clockwise (while looking down on 847110-34 screws), as far as possible, to
achieve proper belt tension. See inset in Figure 6-3-15.

4
27
Rotate motor
counter-clockwise
(while looking down 847110-26 P1 Connector
on 847110-34 screws), 847110-17
as far as possible, 847110-18
847110-34 screws to achieve proper 847110-13
belt tension 847110-23
847110-27

847110-34 (2X)
847110-36 (2X)

6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
847110-24

Figure 6-3-15 Pulley Kit Installation

847503-E 2017-04-21
6-3-30

INSTALLATION MOTOR KIT (P/N 844376S)

Required Tools:
Phillips No. 1 Screwdriver
13 mm box end wrench, or 13mm deep socket and ratchet.
Find No. Part Description (Some parts under P/N 847110)
847110-24 MOTOR, PITTMAN
12 FERRITE .506 DIA
847110- 27 25 TOOTH PULLEY
847110- 13 RETAINING RING, 5 MM
30, 31, 36 XL LARGE, LARGE & SMALL TY-WRAPS
847110-33 BLUE LOCTITE

Procedure:
6—DISASSEMBLY

1. Turn off all power to the OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System, and
REASSEMBLY

remove syringe adapter.

2. Remove four (4) screws (item 3) and two (2) screws (item 14) from
bottom cover (item 19). Grasp ram manual knob and pull back off shaft
approximately 1/2”. Then remove bottom cover. Refer to Figure 6-3-7.
3. Remove ram manual knob (item 4).
4. Loosen two (2) screws (item 14) from LED processor board (item 27). Refer to
Figure 6-3-16.
5. Disconnect LED board (item 27) cable at connector P1, and remove LED board.
6. On the motor (item 847110-24), remove snap ring (item 847110-13) and 25
tooth pulley (item 847110-27) from motor shaft.
7. Gently twist the motor to remove belt tension. With belt tension relieved, the
ram belt (item 847110-23) can be slipped from its large pulley.
Note: Observe motor board connection before removal.
8. Unplug motor from J2 Connector on the motor board.
9. Remove two (2) motor retaining screws (item 847110-34) and washers (item
847110-36). Remove motor.
10. Replace all removed parts with kit components, and perform reinstall
procedures above in reverse order. Refer to Figure 6-3-4 for placement of
ferrite and ty-wraps.
Note: Proper motor orientation is important. Orient the motor as shown in
Figure 6-3-16, or encoder will be in the way of the motor board.
Note: Before installing 25 Tooth Pulley (item 847110 27) to motor (item 847110
24) shaft, apply small portion of blue loctite to the motor shaft.
Note: While installing motor, before final tightening of the screws, rotate
motor counter-clockwise (while looking down on 847110-34 screws), as far as
possible, to achieve proper belt tension. See inset in Figure 6-3-16.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-3-31

11. “IMPORTANT” After assembly is completed, perform Ram Position Calibration

in section 8.4 of this manual followed by pressure calibration in section 8.5.
12. Perform Pressure Verification on Ram. Refer to section 8.6 of this manual for
procedure.

14
(2x) 4
Rotate motor
counter-clockwise
(while looking down P1 Connector
on 847110-34 screws),
as far as possible,
847110-34 screws to achieve proper 847110-13
belt tension
847110-27

847110-34 (2X)
847110-36 (2X)

6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
847110-24

Figure 6-3-16 Motor Kit Installation

847503-E 2017-04-21
6-3-32

INSTALLATION BELT KIT (P/N 844377S)

Required Tools:
Phillips No. 1 Screwdriver
Snap ring pliers
13 mm box end wrench, or 13mm deep socket and ratchet.
Find No. Part Description
23 BELT
Procedure:
1. Turn off all power to the OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System, and
remove syringe adapter.
2. Remove four (4) screws (item 3) and two (2) screws (item 14) from
bottom cover (item 19). Grasp ram manual knob and pull back off shaft
6—DISASSEMBLY

approximately 1/2”. Then and remove bottom cover. Refer to Figure 6-3-7.
REASSEMBLY

3. Remove ram manual knob (item 4).

4. Loosen two (2) screws (item 14) from LED processor board (item 27). Refer to
Figure 6-3-17.
5. Disconnect LED board (item 27) cable at connector P1, and remove LED
board.
6. The ram belt (item 847110-23) is removed by loosening the two (2) motor
mounting screws (item 847110-34). Then gently twist the motor to remove
belt tension. With belt tension relieved, the ram belt (item 847110-23) can be
slipped from its large pulley.
7. Replace all removed parts with kit components, and perform reinstall
procedures above in reverse order.

Note: Before Final tightening of the motor screws, rotate motor counter-
clockwise (while looking down on 847110-34 screws), as far as possible, to
achieve proper belt tension. See inset in Figure 6-3-17.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-3-33

4
Rotate motor
counter-clockwise
(while looking down 27
on 847110-34 screws),
as far as possible,
847110-34 screws to achieve proper
belt tension 847110-23

847110-34 (2X)

6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY

Figure 6-3-17 Belt Kit Installation

847503-E 2017-04-21
6-3-34

INSTALLATION PIVOT BUSHING KIT (P/N 844369S)

Required Tools:
None
Find No. Part Description
10 PIVOT, WASHER
7 BUSHING, PIVOT
9 PIVOT CAP
8 PIVOT THRUST WASHER
29 KNOB, M8
Procedure:
1. Turn off all power to the OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System, and
remove syringe adapter.
2. Remove threaded pivot knob (item 29) by turning counterclockwise. Remove
6—DISASSEMBLY

pivot thrust washer (item 8), pivot cap (item 9), and pivot washer (item 10).
REASSEMBLY

Refer to Figure 6-3-18.

3. Rotate powerhead to full upside down horizontal position to unseat from
vertical pivot assembly retainer.
4. Slide powerhead (with pivot shaft item 847110-6) from vertical pivot
assembly.
5. To replace pivot bushing (item 7), simply push bushing out of the vertical
pivot assembly. Remove and replace second pivot washer (item 10).
6. To reinstall powerhead to vertical pivot assembly proceed as follows:
Position the powerhead upside down in the horizontal position. Then insert
powerhead pivot shaft into the vertical pivot assembly.
Rotate the powerhead forward to the normal operating position.
Reinstall pivot washer (item 10), pivot cap (item 9), pivot thrust washer (item 8),
and pivot knob (item 29).

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-3-35

6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
847110-6 7 10 9 8
29
(2X)

Figure 6-3-18 Pivot Bushing Installation

847503-E 2017-04-21
6-3-36

INSTALLATION HORIZONTAL PIVOT KIT (P/N 847210S)

Required Tools:
None
Find No. Part Description (Some items under 847110)
847110-6 PIVOT
847110-5 PIVOT SEAL
35 TY-WRAP

Procedure:
1. Turn off all power to the OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System, and
remove syringe adapter.
2. Remove four (4) screws (item 3) and two (2) screws (item 14) from
bottom cover (item 19). Grasp ram manual knob and pull back off shaft
6—DISASSEMBLY

approximately 1/2”. Then and remove bottom cover. Refer to Figure 6-3-7.
REASSEMBLY

3. Remove top cover (item 21).

4. Remove threaded pivot knob (item 29) by turning counterclockwise. Remove
pivot thrust washer (item 8), pivot cap (item 9), and pivot washer (item 10).
Refer to Figure 6-3-19.
5. Rotate powerhead to full upside down horizontal position to unseat from
vertical pivot assembly retainer.
6. Cut ty-wrap from ferrite on horizontal pivot. Refer to Figure 6-3-4.
7. Disconnect powerhead cable from J1 to gain access to pivot shaft screws.
8. Slide powerhead (with pivot shaft item 847110-6) from vertical pivot
assembly.
9. Remove four (4) screws and washers (item 847110-2 and 847110-3) from
pivot (item 847110-6) and remove pivot from mainframe (item 11).
10. To install kit horizontal pivot perform procedure in reverse.

Note: Horizontal pivot in kit is provided with pivot seal (item 5) already
installed.
Note: When installing new pivot shaft, place flat side of the pivot towards the
bottom of the injector on the motor side.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-3-37

6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
847110-6
847110-5

847110-11
847110-2
10 9 8
(4X) 29
847110-3 (2X)
(4X)

Figure 6-3-19 Horizontal Pivot Installation

847503-E 2017-04-21
6-3-38

INSTALLATION LCD FLEX CABLE KIT (P/N 847208S)

Required Tools:
Phillips No. 1 Screwdriver
Small adjustable wrench

Find No. Part Description

13 LCD FLEX CABLE

Procedure:
1. Turn off all power to the OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System, and
remove syringe adapter.
2. Remove four (4) screws (item 3). Grasp ram manual knob and pull back off
shaft approximately 1/2”. Refer to Figure 6-3-7.
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY

3. Remove top cover. (item 21).

4. Remove the bezel assembly (item 22) with gasket (item 20) from the LCD
Display Mounting bracket by pulling up on the front of bezel to slide the
side snap latches out of the LCD mounting bracket. Continue pulling up on
the rear of the bezel assembly to slide the rear snap latches out of the LCD
mounting bracket.
5. At the logic board, pull up touchscreen cable connector J8 tab, then remove
touchscreen cable from the connector. Refer to Figure 6-3-20.
6. Disconnect LCD flex cable (item 13) from the logic board at the J2 connector.
7. At the logic board, disconnect LCD display backlight cable at the J4
connector.
8. Remove four (4) LCD mounting bracket screws (item 14).
9. Lift and remove LCD display with mounting bracket.
10. Remove LCD flex cable (item 13) from LCD display.
11. To install kit LCD flex cable, perform procedures above in reverse order.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-3-39

22 & 35

20

16
14 (4x)
17

13

6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY

Figure 6-3-20 LED Flex Cable

847503-E 2017-04-21
6-3-40

INSTALLATION HEATER BLANKET CABLE KIT (P/N 844381S)

Required Tools:
Phillips No. 1 Screwdriver
Small adjustable wrench

Find No. Part Description

6 HEATER BLANKET CABLE ASSY (844381)
11 SMALL FERRITE
31 SMALL TY-WRAP

Procedure:
1. Turn off all power to the OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System, and
6—DISASSEMBLY

remove syringe adapter.

REASSEMBLY

2. Remove four (4) screws (item 3) and two (2) screws (item 4) from
bottom cover (item 19). Grasp ram manual knob and pull back off shaft
approximately 1/2”. Then remove bottom cover. Refer to Figure 6-3-7.
4. Lift top cover (item 21) from powerhead. Refer to Figure 6-3-7.
5. Loosen two (2) screws (item 1) from powerhead cable assembly (item 2).
Refer to Figure 6-3-21.
6. Disconnect powerhead cable 25 pin D shell connection and heater blanket
cable (item 6) from logic board.
7. Using wrench, loosen nut that attaches heater blanket cable to powerhead
cable bracket, remove the ferrite (item 11), cut the small ty-wrap (item 31)
and remove heater blanket cable assembly from the powerhead cable
bracket by pulling cable through the bracket.
8. To install kit heater blanket cable assembly, perform the procedures above in
reverse order.
9. Refer to figure 6-3-4 for proper installation of ferrite (item 11) and ty-wrap
(item 31).

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-3-41

6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
6

25

1
(2x)

Figure 6-3-21 Heater Blanket Cable

847503-E 2017-04-21
6-3-42

INSTALLATION LED PCB CABLE ASSEMBLY KIT (P/N 847141-1S)

Required Tools:
Phillips No. 1 Screwdriver

Find No. Part Description

26 LED PCB CABLE ASSY

Procedure:
1. Turn off all power to the OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System, and
remove syringe adapter.
2. Remove four (4) screws (item 3) and two (2) screws (item 14) from
bottom cover (item 19). Grasp ram manual knob and pull back off shaft
approximately 1/2”. Then remove bottom cover. Refer to Figure 6-3-7.
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY

3. Remove top cover (item 21). Refer to Figure 6-3-7.

4. Grasp the powerhead manual knob and pull it straight off (item 4).
5. Loosen two (2) screws (item 14) from LED processor board (item 27). Refer to
Figure 6-3-22.
6. Disconnect LED PCB cable (item 26) at the LED PCB connector P1, and
disconnect it from the logic board at the J3 connector. Refer to Figure 6-3-4.
7. To install kit LED PCB cable assembly, perform procedures above in reverse
order.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-3-43

14
(2x)

P1 Connector

27

26

6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY

Figure 6-3-22 PCB Cable Assembly

847503-E 2017-04-21
6-3-44

125 ML FACEPLATE KIT (P/N 844425)

Required Tools:
No required tools
Procedure:
See operator manual for removal and installation instructions.

200 ML FACEPLATE KIT (P/N 844850)

Required Tools:
No required tools
Procedure:
See operator manual for removal and installation instructions.
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-3-45

INSTALLATION 200 ML FACEPLATE THUMB

KNOB KIT (P/N 844856S)
Required Tools:
No required tools
Find No. Part Description
BLUE KNOB

Procedure:
1. Slide kit thumb knob onto 200 mL lock ring latching shaft.
2. Screw thumb knob set screw into the latching shaft until it is flush with the
outer edge of the knob.

6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
Faceplate Thumb
Knob
Figure 6-3-23 200 mL Faceplate Thumb Knob

847503-E 2017-04-21
6-3-46

INSTALLATION GASKET KIT (P/N 847224S)

Required Tools:
Phillips No. 1 Screwdriver

Find No. Part Description

25 POWERHEAD CABLE GASKET
847110-5 PIVOT SEAL (2)
5 KNOB GASKET
847110-10 FRONT PLATE GASKET
20 BEZEL GASKET
Procedure:
Powerhead Cable Gasket Installation.
1. Turn off all power to the OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System, and
remove syringe adapter.
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY

2. Remove support cable clamps. Then disconnect powerhead 25 pin D shell

connector from extension cable connector. Pull powerhead cable clear of
support.
3. Remove four (4) screws (item 3) and two (2) screws (item 14) from
bottom cover (item 19). Grasp ram manual knob and pull back off shaft
approximately 1/2”. Then and remove bottom cover. Refer to Figure 6-3-7.
4. Remove existing Powerhead Cable Gasket (item 25). Refer to Figure 6-3-24.
5. Slide kit gasket over powerhead cable. Be sure the sticky side is toward the
relief bracket. Install gasket to relief bracket.
6. Reinstall cable and bottom, perform the procedure above in reverse order.
Pivot Seal Installation.
1. Turn off all power to the OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System, and
remove syringe adapter.
2. Remove four (4) screws (item 3) and two (2) screws (item 14) from
bottom cover (item 19). Grasp ram manual knob and pull back off shaft
approximately 1/2”. Then and remove bottom cover. Refer to Figure 6-3-7.
3. Lift off the top cover (item 22).
4. Remove threaded pivot knob (item 29) by turning counterclockwise. Remove
pivot thrust washer (item 8), pivot cap (item 9), and pivot washer (item 10).
Refer to Figure 6-3-24.
5. Rotate powerhead to full upside down horizontal position to unseat from
vertical pivot assembly retainer.
6. Slide powerhead (with pivot shaft item 847110-6) from vertical pivot
assembly.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-3-47

7. Remove existing Pivot Seal (item 847110-5) from pivot shaft.

8. Install kit pivot seal and perform the procedure above in reverse.

4
5

22 & 35

20

6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
847110-6
847110-5

10 9 8
29
(2X)

25

847110-10

Figure 6-3-24 Gasket Kit Installation

847503-E 2017-04-21
6-3-48

Knob Gasket Installation.

1. Turn off all power to the OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System, and
remove syringe adapter.
2. Remove manual knob (item 4). Refer to Figure 6-3-24.
3. Remove old gasket (item 5) from knob.
4. To install kit gasket remove paper on adhesive side of gasket and install a
knob gasket (item 5) in the manual knob.
5. Re-install both manual knobs.
Front Plate Gasket Installation.
1. Turn off all power to the OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System, and
remove syringe adapter.
2. Remove four (4) screws (item 3) and two (2) screws (item 14) from
bottom cover (item 19). Grasp ram manual knob and pull back off shaft
6—DISASSEMBLY

approximately 1/2”. Then remove bottom cover. Refer to Figure 6-3-7.

REASSEMBLY

3. Lift top cover (item 21) from powerhead.

4. Remove existing front plate gasket (item 847110-10) from retaining slot.
Refer to Figure 6-3-24.
5. Install kit front plate gasket (item 847110-10) and reinstall top and bottom
covers.
Bezel Gasket Removal.
1. Turn off all power to the OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System, and
remove syringe adapter.
2. Remove four (4) screws (item 3) and two (2) screws (item 14) from
bottom cover (item 19). Grasp ram manual knob and pull back off shaft
approximately 1/2”. Then remove bottom cover. Refer to Figure 6-3-7.
3. Lift top cover (item 21) from powerhead.
4. Remove Bezel Gasket (item 20) from the Bezel assembly (item 22). Ensure
Bezel Gasket is properly seated on Bezel during installation. See
Figure 6-3-24.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-4-1

6.4 POWER SUPPLY

The DC Power Supply (P/N 844600) is used to power the OptiOne Single-
Head Contrast Delivery System. Internal to the DC Power Supply are several
key components. The primary component is the switching Power Supply. This
component can be one of two brands: International Power, or Condor. The
remaining components are the same regardless of which switching Power
Supply brand is present. Replacement components for the Power Supply are
list below.

CAUTION!

Be extremely careful when the OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery

System power supply is open. Lethal voltages are exposed. Be care-
ful not to leave an open system unattended with power plugged in.
DISCONNECT THE POWER CORD BEFORE REMOVING OR REPLACING

6—DISASSEMBLY
BOARDS.

REASSEMBLY
6.4.1 POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT COMPONENTS
Refer to Figure 6-4-1 and 6-4-2 for component location.
KIT: FUSE (P/N 172L0078S)
Find No. Part Description Quantity
7 FUSE 5 x 20 MM 4 AMP SLO-BLOW 5

KIT: AC INLET MODULE, FILTERED, 6A (P/N 240E3335S)

Find No. Part Description Quantity
5 AC INLET MODULE, 1
6 FUSE DRAWER, AC INLET MODULE 1
7 FUSE 5 x 20 MM 4 AMP SLO-BLOW 2

KIT: POWER SUPPLY, +25.2VDC (P/N 844483S)

Find No. Part Description Quantity
8 POWER SUPPLY,+25.2VDC 1
12 TERMINAL,STUD MOUNT,DUAL .250 90 DEGREE 2

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-4-2

KIT: COVER, POWER SUPPLY (P/N 844452S)

Find No. Part Description Quantity
2 POWER SUPPLY COVER-ADVANTAGE 1

KIT: PCB ASSEMBLY, POWER SUPPLY (P/N 84446-1S)

Find No. Part Description Quantity
28 JACK SCREW KIT, SOCKET 10
3 PCB ASSY, POWER SUPPLY 1

KIT: WIRE HARNESS, POWER SUPPLY (P/N 844470S)

Find No. Part Description Quantity
15 TY-WRAP TIES 2
6—DISASSEMBLY

14 HARNESS ASSY, AC DISTRIBUTION 1

REASSEMBLY

13 HARNESS ASSY, DC DISTRIBUTION 1

KIT: FASTENER, POWER SUPPLY (P/N 844651S)

Find No. Part Description Quantity
15 TY-WRAP TIES 2
10 CABLE CLAMP-1/2” DIA. 1
12 TERMINAL,STUD MOUNT,DUAL .250 90 DEGREE 1
9 SCREW, M4 X .7, 6 MM, PR, PH, W/LW 4
4 FOOT, RUBBER 4
28 JACK SCREW KIT, SOCKET 6
16 SCREW-#6-19 X 1/2 PLASTIC 4
11 NUT,M4X.7,HEX,W/LOCKWASHER 3

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-4-3

6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
847503-E 2017-04-21 Figure 6-4-1 Power Supply (P/N 844600)
6-4-4
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY

847503-E 2017-04-21 Figure 6-4-2 Power Supply Assembly (P/ N 844600)

 6-4-5

INSTALLATION FUSE KIT POWER SUPPLY (P/N 172L0078S)

Required Tools:
Small flathead screwdriver
Find No. Part Description
6 FUSE DRAWER
7 FUSES (2)
Procedure:
1. Remove all incoming power to the Power Supply. The fuse drawer (item 6), located
at the rear of the Power Supply resides in the AC inlet module (item 5). Two fuses
(item 7) are contained in the fuse drawer.
2. With a small screw driver, push fuse drawer tabs in while gently prying from side to
side until removal is possible. Replace fuses.
3. To reinstall fuse drawer, line up fuse drawer key and push in until a snap is heard.

6—DISASSEMBLY
INSTALLATION POWER SUPPLY KIT (P/N 844483S)

REASSEMBLY
Required Tools:
Philips No. 1 screwdriver
Find No. Part Description
8 POWER SUPPLY +25.2VDC
12 TERMINAL, STUD MOUNT, DUAL .250 90 DEGREE
Procedure:
1. Remove all incoming power to the Power Supply.
2. Disconnect all cabling to the Power Supply.
3. If the Power Supply unit is wall mounted, pull latch forward and lift up to remove
unit from wall mount bracket.
4. Remove four (4) buttonhead screws (item 16) and rubber feet (item 4) from the
bottom of the Power Supply housing, lift off cover.
5. Remove ferrite from AC wiring and cut ty-wrap securing wiring to ty-wrap mount.
6. Disconnect AC wiring from terminal strip location (item 14).
7. Disconnect DC distribution wiring at the terminal strip (item 13).
8. Remove four (4) screws (item 9) retaining Power Supply to frame.
To install kit Power Supply, perform the steps above in reverse order.
Note: When reinstalling Power Supply, be sure to refer to Figure 6-4-2 when
installing terminal stud mounts and when making terminal connections. Install
kit ty-wrap mount onto Power Supply frame.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-4-6

INSTALLATION PC BOARD KIT (P/N 844460-1S)

Required Tools:
Philips No. 1 screwdriver
Small adjustable wrench
Find No. Part Description
3 PCB ASSEMBLY, POWER SUPPLY
28 JACK SCREW KIT, SOCKET
Procedure:
1. Remove all incoming power to the Power Supply.
2. Disconnect all cabling to the Power Supply.
3. If the Power Supply unit is wall mounted, pull latch forward and lift up to remove
unit from wall mount bracket.
6—DISASSEMBLY

4. Remove four (4) buttonhead screws (item 16) and rubber feet (item 4) from the
REASSEMBLY

bottom of the Power Supply housing, lift off cover.

5. Disconnect DC distribution connector (item 13) at the PC board (item 3).
4. Remove ten (10) jacknuts (connection side) (item 23) securing PC board (item 3) to
backplate. Lift PC board from backplate.
To install kit PC board, perform the steps above in reverse order.
INSTALLATION AC INLET MODULE KIT (240E3335S)
Required Tools:
Philips No. 1 screwdriver
Small flat blade screwdriver
Procedure:
1. Remove all incoming power to the Power Supply.
2. Disconnect all cabling to the Power Supply.
3. Remove four (4) buttonhead screws (item 16) and rubber feet (item 4) from the
bottom of the Power Supply housing, lift off cover.
4. At the back of the ON/OFF switch (item 5), disconnect three (3) AC wire
connections (item 14). Refer to Figure 6-4-2 for wire color code information
4. The AC inlet module is retained to the backplate by four (4) retaining clips (two (2)
on each side). With a small screwdriver, push in on each retaining clip and remove
AC inlet module.
To install kit AC inlet module, perform the steps above in reverse order.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-4-7

INSTALLATION WIRE HARNESS KIT (844470S)

Required Tools:
Philips No. 1 screwdriver
Small adjustable wrench
Find No. Part Description
14 HARNESS ASSEMBLY, AC DISTRIBUTION
13 HARNESS ASSEMBLY, DC DISTRIBUTION
Procedure:
Note: Before removing Power Supply harness, write down connection loca-
tions and wire color codes. Refer to Figure 6-4-2.
1. Remove all incoming power to the Power Supply.
2. Disconnect all cabling to the Power Supply.

6—DISASSEMBLY
3. Remove four (4) buttonhead screws (item 6) and rubber feet (item 4) from the

REASSEMBLY
bottom of the Power Supply housing, lift off cover.
Harness assembly DC Distribution
4. Remove DC Distribution Harness (item 13) from terminal strip, then from PC board
connection (item 3).
Harness assembly AC Distribution
5. Remove AC Distribution Harness (item 14) from terminal strip, then disconnect the
ground connection to the power supply chassis.
6. Remove connectors at the AC Inlet module and route harness wires through ferrite.
To install kit wire harnesses, perform the steps above in reverse order.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-4-8

INSTALLATION COVER KIT (844452S)

Required Tools:
Philips No. 1 screwdriver
Find No. Part Description
2 POWER SUPPLY COVER
Procedure:
1. Remove all incoming power to the Power Supply.
2. Disconnect all cabling to the Power Supply.
3. Remove four (4) buttonhead screws (item 16) and rubber feet (item 4) from the
bottom of the Power Supply housing, lift off cover.
To install kit Power Supply Cover, perform the steps above in reverse order.
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-5-1

6.5 REMOTE STAND

The Remote Stand consists of a stationary post, base, hanger, and pivot.
Refer to Figure 6-5-1
KIT: REMOTE STAND CASTERS (P/N 844527S)
Find No. Description Quantity
4 CASTERS, LOCKING 5
12 CABLE CLIP 2

KIT: PEDESTAL TRAY (P/N 844531S)

Find No. Description Quantity
11 PEDESTAL TRAY 1

6—DISASSEMBLY
KIT: STRAIN RELIEF (P/N 844539S)

REASSEMBLY
Find No. Description Quantity
8 STRAIN RELIEF 1

KIT: IV POLE (P/N 844552S)

13 IV POLE 1
14 JAM NUT 1
KIT: PEDESTAL HARDWARE (P/N 844557)
5 WASHER 1
6 LOCKWASHER 1
7 SCREW 1

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-5-2

13

14

11

1
6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY

8
2

4
12

6
7

Figure 6-5-1 Remote Stand Assembly

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-6-1

6.6 SUSPENSION SYSTEM

Call Technical Service for part number information (1-800-877-0791)

(470 mm)

(584 mm)
18.5"
3 4

23"
29" (737 mm)

33.5" (821 mm)

36.1" (917 mm)

29.5" (750 mm)

360o
82.6" (2098 mm)

315o

6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY
2

INJECTOR
POWERHEAD

.
Figure 6-6-1 Suspension System

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-6-2
6—DISASSEMBLY

This page intentionally left blank.

REASSEMBLY

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-7-1

6.7 ACCESSORY ITEMS

HAND BUTTON START SWITCH ASSEMBLY
P/N 802620 Cable length 1.8 m (6.0 feet)
P/N 802622 Cable length 6 m (19.68 feet)

DATA CABLE POWER SUPPLY TO CONSOLE

Note: The total cumulative length of cable from the Power Supply to the
console should not exceed 100 feet.
P/N 800113 Cable length 3 m (10 feet)
P/N 800105 Cable length 15 m (50 feet)
P/N 800106 Cable length 23 m (75 feet)

6—DISASSEMBLY
P/N 800107 Cable length 30 m (100 feet)

REASSEMBLY
POWERHEAD EXTENSION CABLE TO POWER SUPPLY
Note: The total cumulative length of extension cable from the Power Supply to
the powerhead should not exceed 100 feet.
P/N 844410S Cable length 3 m (10 feet) Kit, Ceiling Susp., ext. cable
P/N 800109 Cable length 15 m (50 feet)
P/N 800110 Cable length 23 m (75 feet)
P/N 800111 Cable length 30 m (100 feet)

SERIAL COMMUNICATION CABLE

(SERVICE KEY/SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD)
P/N 844382 Cable length 3 m (10 feet)

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-7-2

FLOW CONTROL VALVE FIXTURES

P/N 844927S Fixture to hold Flow Control Valve P/N 844924.

6—DISASSEMBLY
REASSEMBLY

Flow
Control
Valve

P/N 844924 Single Flow Control Valve (no gauge or quick disconnect)

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-7-3

QUICK DISCONNECT FOR PRESSURE GAUGES

Coupling for Quick

Disconnect
Threaded on gauge

Note:
Apply Teflon tape Quick Disconnect
to threads when Shut Off
installing Threaded on fixture

P/N 844926 includes Quick Disconnect Shut Off and Coupling for Quick Disconnect

6—DISASSEMBLY
PRESSURE GAUGES

REASSEMBLY
300
200
400
100

500

600

P/N 844920S 600 psi Liquid Filled Pressure Gauge only

FACEPLATES AND ACCESSORIES

P/N 844850 200 mL Faceplate assembly
P/N 844425 125 mL Faceplate assembly
P/N 800114 200 mL Heater Blanket

847503-E 2017-04-21
 6-7-4

SYRINGE CALIBRATION KIT

P/N 844910S 200 mL syringe Multipak (1), 125 mL empty syringe (6)

REMOTE STAND
P/N 844500 Complete assembly

SUSPENSION SYSTEM
Call Technical Service for part number information
(1-800-877-0791).

MANUALS
6—DISASSEMBLY

P/N 847501 Printed English Operator manual

REASSEMBLY

P/N 847503 Printed English Service and Parts manual

P/N 847507 Printed English Installation Instructions
P/N 847502 CD, Translated Operator manuals

CD SERVICE PRODUCTION SOFTWARE KIT

For CD software part number, call Technical Service for
information (1-800-877-0791).
Kit contains the following items:
1 CD Injector software
Operator manual (English)
Operator manual CD (Contains all multi-language documents)
Service/Parts manual
FCC Label

847503-E 2017-04-21
 7-1-1

7 THEORY OF
OPERATION

7.1 THEORY OF OPERATION

This chapter describes design and function of the OptiOne Single-Head
Contrast Delivery System. Block diagrams for the system are included for each
assembly described. This chapter is divided into the following sections:
Note: For additional information refer to Chapter 11 Schematics.
Section 7-2 System Block Diagram
Section 7-3 Power Supply
Section 7-4 Powerhead

7—THEORY OF
Section 7-5 Console

OPERATION

847503-E 2017-04-21
 7-1-2

This page intentionally left blank.

7—THEORY OF
OPERATION

847503-E 2017-04-21
 7-2-1
847300
OptiOne
Power Supply

AC Input 844460-1
Line and Switch Power
Voltage Supply PCB

Connectors
Optional 844100

OEM
OptiBolus OptiOne
Key Console
Console #1
24 Volt
Power J10B
Supply Switched
J10A 15 Pin D Shell Cable 24 Volts, 640 x 480
CAN, LCD Display
On/Off
J1
Unswitched 24V
Switched
24 Volts

7—THEORY OF
25 Pin D Shell Cable

OPERATION
847100
OptiOne
Powerhead
847170
847140 847160 Powerhead
LED PCB Power and Logic PCB
Knob Light Motor PCB

Switched 320 x 240

24 Volts, LCD Display
CAN, 844376
On/Off Brushless
RS422 DC Motor Syringe
I²C & Gearbox
Heater

7.2 SYSTEM OVERVIEW BLOCK DIAGRAM

Figure 7-2-1 System Overview Block Diagram

847503-E 2017-04-21
 7-2-2
7—THEORY OF
OPERATION

This page intentionally left blank.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 7-3-1

7.3 POWER SUPPLY

The Power Supply assembly houses a +24VDC nominal power supply, and
interface board. The interface board provides the following functions:
• Switching of the +24VDC to the system
• Communication pass through from the powerhead to the console
• Handswitch logic
• OEM Interface connectors
• Connector for attaching the OEM Interface board
• RS232 Interface for downloading new software to the powerhead,
consoles and OEM Interface board
• Circuit to check for the OptiBolus key
Refer to the Power Supply block diagram Figure 7-3-1.
Connector J10A and J10B are wired identically and can be used for either
console 1 or console 2.

POWER SUPPLY

7—THEORY OF
When the blue LED on the Power Supply top panel is on, the +24VDC is present

OPERATION
inside the power supply assembly. The +24VDC is applied to J1, J10A and J10B
through a solid state device switched by a momentary closure from the console
ON/OFF switch or depressing the powerhead touch panel for more than 1
second.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 7—THEORY OF
OPERATION 7-3-2
POWER SUPPLY

847503-E 2017-04-21
847300
OptiOne
Power Supply

844665-1
Relay Interface Board OEM Interface Connections J6 25 Pin D Shell Pins - Parallel I/O
(Optional Kit) J5 9 Pin D Shell Socket - RS422/RS232
Parallel I/O J3 8 Pin RJ45 - Ethernet
RS422/RS232 P4 15-Pin D-shell (Optional Kit)
Ethernet
OEM CAN

844460-1 J2 8 Pin Circular DIN - Hand Switch

Power Supply PCB

Start
J7
Service Mode
RS422 to RS232 RS232
Power Switch Converter
Line Voltage

J10B 15 Pin D Shell Socket - Console #2

24 VDC
CAN
On/Off Closure
Console ID
Aux Start
I2C
J10A 15 Pin D Shell Socket - Console #1
Local
5 VDC
24 Volt 24 VDC
Power Supply CAN
On/Off Closure
Console ID

Figure 7-3-1 Power Supply Block Diagram

Aux Start
Debounce
J4
J1 25 Pin D Shell Socket - Power Head
4A Switched
Unswitched 24 V SS
Unswitched 24 V 24 Volts
Fuse MOSFET Switch 24 VDC
CAN
On/Off Closure
Aux Start
I2C
RS422
 7-4-1

7.4 POWERHEAD OVERVIEW

The powerhead provides a user interface through the color LCD touch screen, a
beeper and lighted manual knob. The LCD and touchscreen allows the user the
same functionality as the Console with the exception of:
• Protocols can only be selected, there are no protocol management features,
(saving, renaming, etc...)
• There are no system setup functions
The Powerhead consists of a main structure with a ballscrew, ram, and motor.
The motor is a brushless DC (BLDC) and has an integral (19.7:1) gear box, 1000
line encoder and Hall effect sensors. The Powerhead logic board, motor drive
board, and the knob light board are also mounted to the main structure.
The diagram below shows the electronic components, assemblies, and cables
within the Powerhead and their interconnections.

7.4.1 INTERCONNECTION DESCRIPTIONS

7—THEORY OF
This section details all interconnections internal to the Powerhead subsystem.

POWERHEAD
OPERATION
(Refer to Figures 7-4-14, 7-4-15, 7-4-16, and 7-4-17).
[Link] Logic to Motor Board to Board Interconnect
The Logic PCBA mates to the Motor PCBA as a board-to-board mate (J7). This
brings the motor power and ground return directly to the motor drive PCB.
A mechanical solution secures the PCBAs in place and provides a reliable
connection across all environments as specified for this product.
[Link] LED Cable
The Logic PCBA mates to the LED PCBA through a cable assembly called the
LED Board Cable. The connectors are single (J3 and P1) row, five positions, and
have a locking feature; and the pins are rated to carry at least +24 VDC and 100
mA across the specified temperature range for this product. The connector pins
on the PCBAs are plugs, while the connector pins on the cable assembly are
sockets. Connections are straight through 1:1.
[Link] LCD Cable
The Logic PCBA mates to the LCD via a flat flexible cable (J2). The type of
connector and cable used is dictated primarily by the LCD, since the LCD is a
commercial piece of hardware.
[Link] Backlight Power Cable
This cable provides power and ground for the LED backlight integrated into the
LCD Module (J4).

847503-E 2017-04-21
 7-4-2

[Link] Touch Cable

This cable is an integrated part of the touch screen overlay built into the LCD
Module. It consists of 4 wires representing connections for top, right, bottom,
and left (J8).
[Link] DB25 Cable Termination to Logic PCB Wiring
The Logic PCBA mates to the Main Power Supply cable through a cable
assembly (J1). Refer to Figures 7-4-14 and 7-4-18. The connector on the
Logic PCBA has a locking feature and mates to one end of the cable assembly.
The other end of the cable assembly is a 25 pin DSUB connector plug that is
mounted to the back housing of the Powerhead assembly and mates to the
Main Power Supply cable.
[Link] Faceplate Cable
The faceplate cable carries power, ground, and an I2C interface (J10).

7.4.2 POWERHEAD SUBASSEMBLIES

7—THEORY OF

The Powerhead subsystem contains three separate PCBA subassemblies: the

POWERHEAD
OPERATION

Logic board, Motor board, and LED board. Refer to Figures 7-4-14, 7-4-15, and
7-4-16 respectively. In addition, an LCD/Touchscreen Module is mounted to the
front of the Logic Board and provides user input/output.
[Link] Logic PCBA Subassembly
The Logic PCBA (refer to Figure 7-4-14) holds the main microprocessor (U1)for
the system, the CPLD (U10), as well as all sensor and power circuitry. A 5x7 LCD
display with touchscreen is mounted on the board and controlled by circuitry
on it. The Logic Board connects to the Power Supply subsystem via a cable, the
motor driver board via a board-to-board mate, the LED board via a cable, and it
has a connector for the optional heater control of a syringe head unit.
Power
The Logic Board 24VDC input is received from the Power Supply input cable.
This voltage input passes through a resettable fuse followed by a pi filter. The
resettable fuse will trip when current is higher than 6A. The time to trip the fuse
decreases as the current increases above 6A, typically from 1 min. down to 12
sec. at 10A. Most 24V power is consumed by the motors, but it also provides
power for lower voltage supplies.
• On-board regulators
The Logic Board produces 12VDC, 5VDC, 3.3VDC, and 2.5VDC for use locally and
on the Motor Board. The 2.5V device is an LDO regulator, dropping down from
24V. The rest are switchers.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 7-4-3

• Power ON/OFF
Power is supplied to the Logic board by the Power Supply. Signal ON/OFF_SW
is pulled up to 5V on the Power Module when it is powered on but before
24V is turned on to the Logic Board. The Logic Board can request power by
pulling ON/OFF_SW low to notify the Power Supply to apply power to the
Logic Board. There is a push-button switch on the board to accomplish that,
or it can be accomplished by touching the touchscreen. When power to the
Logic Board is off, a relay interrupts the connection between the touchscreen
and the touchscreen controller. The relay routes the Y- signal to a circuit that
asserts ON/OFF_SW low when the touchscreen is pressed. When the Power
Module responds by turning on 24V the relay switches the Y- signal back to the
touchscreen controller.
LCD Interface
The Logic Board includes an attached 5.7” TFT LCD display with 320x240
pixel resolution. The board design accommodates an LCD from either of two
vendors. The installed LCD type is configured via Switch S3. The LCD Controller
provides a 256KB display buffer with a 6-6-6 parallel RGB interface to an LCD.
This function is provided by the Epson S1D13A05 LCD/USB Companion IC.

7—THEORY OF
POWERHEAD
OPERATION
There is different software initialization for the LCD unit. A processor GPIO is
assigned to identify the LCD unit attached to the board. The GPIO is controlled
by the slide switch S3 and is pulled up to logic 1 for the Landmark.
• J2 - LCD DATA connector
33 1
J2

32 2 TP53

J2
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 GND 10 RED[4] 19 GND 28 3.3V

2 LCD CLK 11 RED[5] 20 BLUE[0] 29 3.3V
3 HSYNC 12 GND 21 BLUE [1] 30 DPSH
4 VSYNC 13 GREEN[0] 22 BLUE [2] 31 DPSV
5 GND 14 GREEN[1] 23 BLUE [3] 32 No connect
6 RED[0] 15 GREEN[2] 24 BLUE [4] 33 GND
7 RED[1] 16 GREEN[3] 25 BLUE [5]

8 RED[2] 17 GREEN[4] 26 GND

9 RED[3] 18 GREEN[5] 27 LCD_OE

Figure 7-4-1 J2 LCD Data Connector

847503-E 2017-04-21
 7-4-4

• J4 - Backlight connector
Only the J4 connector is needed. The other (J5) may not be populated. The J4
(Landmark) is the initially populated connector.
J4
1
SEE VIEW A 2
VIEW A
J4 - Landmark Display: JST SM02B-BHSS-1-TB
Pin Signal

1 Anode
2 Cathode

Figure 7-4-2 J4 Backlight Connector

• J8 - Touchscreen connector
Only the J8 connector is needed. The other (J9) may not be populated. The J8
(Landmark) is the initially populated connector.
7—THEORY OF

POWERHEAD
OPERATION

J8 4321

J8 - Landmark Display: Molex 52030-0429

Pin Signal on PCB Signal on Cable

1 PX2 Top
2 PY2 Right
3 PX1 Boom
4 PY1 Le

Figure 7-4-3 J8 Touchscreen Connector

847503-E 2017-04-21
 7-4-5

Touchscreen Interface
A touchscreen is integrated with the LCD module to provide tactile control of
the Power Head. The touchscreen provides analog X-Y coordinates to pinpoint
where pressure is applied to the touchscreen. The touchscreen controller
passes these coordinates through an internal A/D converter which can be read
by the CPU over the SPI interface. An interrupt to the CPU is produced when
the touchscreen is touched.
The touchscreen connector also provides 2 battery monitor inputs and 2
auxiliary analog inputs as selectable inputs to the internal A/D converter. One
of the auxiliary inputs is used to measure the y-axis output of the accelerometer
(U32); the other 3 inputs are not used.
J3 - LED Board connector
J3 1 2 3 4 5

J3 - Molex 55932-0510
Pin Signal

7—THEORY OF
POWERHEAD
OPERATION
1 DGND
2 RED_EN
3 +24V
4 BLUE_EN
5 GREEN_EN

Figure 7-4-4 LED Board Connector

J6 - CPLD JTAG Connector
J6
10 9
8 7
6 5
4 3
2 1

J6 - AMP/TYCO 5103309-1

Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 TCK 6 NC
2 GND 7 NC
3 TDO 8 NC
4 3.3V 9 TDI
5 TMS 10 GND

Figure 7-4-5 CPLD JTAG Connector

847503-E 2017-04-21
 7-4-6

Heater Interface
Heaters in the faceplate can be controlled by the CPU using one of its PWM
outputs to vary the flow of current on the HEATER_A_OUT pin. A software
controlled enable pin closes a relay by connecting one terminal of the coil to
ground through an NMOS FET. The other terminal is connected to 24V. Closing
the relay passes 12V to the source pin of a PMOS FET whose gate is controlled
by the PWM signal from the CPU. When the FET is closed the voltage is
presented to the heater out pin through a 1W, 0.47 ohm resistor. The voltage on
the HEATER_A_OUT pin is monitored through an A/D converter in the CPU after
being divided by 2.5 through a pair of resistors. FACEPLATE_A_HEATER_CHECK
is the signal resulting from that division. Since the maximum voltage on the
heater out signal is 12V, the FACEPLATE_A_HEATER_CHECK signal can be no
more than 4.8V.
Also on the heater connector are 2 pins that can be configured by software.
There is a relay on the board that switches between the 2 functions on those
pins. Connector pins 1 and 4 provide signals HEATER_A_SCL=5/THERM_2
and HEATER_A_SDA=5/THERM_1, respectively. The thermistor signals are
forwarded to the CPU A/D converter through the analog multiplexor. The
thermistor signals indicate the temperature at the syringe.
7—THEORY OF

POWERHEAD
OPERATION

J10 - Heater Connector

J10
1
2
3
4

J10 - Hirose DF13-4P-1.25DSA

Pin Signal

1 HEATER_A_SCL+5/THERM_2
2 HEATER_A_OUT
3 GND
4 HEATER_A_SDA+5/THERM_1

Figure 7-4-6 J10 Heater Connector

847503-E 2017-04-21
 7-4-7

Onboard Features
SRAM
The design provides a 512KB SRAM for application data storage. This memory
resides on the processor data bus using CS6. The 512KB data storage is a 16-bit
wide memory that must meet a 12ns access time, but a faster chip may be used
if desired. An additional 64KB SRAM is provided inside the CPU chip
EEPROM
A 256Kbit EEPROM chip (U3) resides on the SPI bus. This component is available
for software to use for calibration data or other information that must be saved
between power cycles.
Accelerometer
A 3-axis accelerometer (U32) identifies when the Power Head has been tilted
up. Only the y-axis is used for this indication, providing a single analog voltage
that is monitored by the CPU through one of the auxiliary analog inputs of
the touchscreen controller. An accelerometer chip from Kionix (P/N KXTC9-
2050) is used for this function. The nominal output voltage when the Power

7—THEORY OF
Head is horizontal is 1.65V. Fully tilting the Power Head up, or down, changes

POWERHEAD
OPERATION
the output voltage by +/-660mV. The output of the accelerometer is fed into
the negative input of an op amp whose positive input is biased to 1.5V. The
amplifier has a gain of 2V/V so that the amplifier output produces the full
reference voltage range over the full range of tilt angle.
CPLD
The Power Head design includes a CPLD (U10) that implements several
independent functions. The CPLD firmware is the same as that used on the
dual-head version of the Power Head product. Unused functions are made
benign by hard wiring pins on the PCB. The CPLD is controlled by the CPU over
its data bus when CS1# is asserted low. The CPLD functions are:
• Motor motion and direction detection based on motor hall signal
transitions
• Watchdog timer that stops motor commutation within 200ms if
software fails
• PWM counters that control Knob LED brightness
• Motor fault interrupt to CPU
• Motor control GPIO for enabling the motor and monitoring its position.
• Service UART buffer
The Motor PWM signals come into the CPLD from the Motor Board Connector
(J7), are gated in the CPLD, and sent back to the Motor Board connector.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 7-4-8

Analog Multiplexor
The CPU provides 2 signals, MA[1:0], to select 1 of 4 analog inputs to an
external multiplexer (U19) chip. The multiplexer chip has two 4:1 multiplexers,
so analog signals are selected in pairs and are placed on 2 inputs to the CPU.
These inputs are available for the CPU’s internal 10-bit A/D converter. The table
below identifies the sensor outputs selected by MA[1:0]. Analog signals must
be no more than 5V.
MA[1:0] Analog signal selected
Analog1 input Analog0 input
00 SIDE_A_LATCH_SENSOR FACEPLATE_A_THERMISTER_INPUT_2

01 FACEPLATE_A_SENSOR_2 (125ml vs. 200ml) FACEPLATE_A_THERMISTER_INPUT_1

10 2.5V SIDE_A_RETRACT_POS_SENSOR

11 MOTOR_A_CURRENT_AB&C SIDE_A_EXPEL_POS_SENSOR

Figure 7-4-7
Hall Effect Sensors
7—THEORY OF

Hall effect sensors are placed on the PCB in such a way that they can detect
POWERHEAD
OPERATION

the presence or absence of magnets located on the ram assembly or the

faceplate. When the associated magnet is close to the sensor, it produces
a voltage that is proportional to the distance between the sensor and
magnet. With the magnet oriented one way the output moves from 2.5VDC
to 5VDC. In the other polar orientation the output moves from 2.5V to 0V.
Some sensors are connected directly to the analog multiplexor, while others
produce logic signals conditioned by a threshold detector that can be varied
by software through adjustable potentiometers residing on the I2C bus. The
adjustable potentiometers allow software to control the switching point
of the comparators. The software sets these potentiometers during RAM
position calibration to enable the output of the comparators to be used to limit
maximum allowed RAM travel. There are two comparators used in this mode
to produce signals: MOTOR_A_EXPEL_LIMIT and MOTOR_A_RETRACT_LIMIT.
These signals are connected to the MC3310 motor controller chip as NEG_LIM
and POS_LIM.
The sensors detect Home Position, Full Extend, Full Retract, Faceplate Type, and
Faceplate Latched. All of these sensors provide information to software so that
decisions can be made regarding control of the motor.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 7-4-9

Analog Analog Signal

Event Sensor name GPIO GPIO generaon
mux input condioner
Faceplate latch Side A Latch Gain of 4.3V/V
X0 no
open/close Sensor above 2.5V
200ml vs 125ml injector Faceplate A
X1 None no
present Sensor 2
125ml Home posion, Non-inverng Schmi trigger with
Motor A Retract None Motor A
200ml retracted Y2 0.5V hysteresis around
Home Sensor Retract Limit
posion programmable threshold.
125ml extended
Motor A 200ml
posion, 200ml home None no
Home Sensor
posion
Y3
Inverng Schmi trigger with no
Motor A Expel Motor A
Fully extended None hysteresis around programmable
Wall Sensor Expel Limit
threshold.

Figure 7-4-8
The analog multiplexor input Y3 can be either of 2 sensors as selected by CPU
GPIO MOTOR_A_EXPEL_SWITCH.
Motor Current
The Motor Board provides an analog voltage level on the signal MOTOR_A_
CURRENT_AB&C that varies between 0V and ~3.6V to indicate the value of
the motor current at any moment in time. This signal is input to the Analog

7—THEORY OF
POWERHEAD
OPERATION
Multiplexor and is used by the software to monitor the motor for proper
operation before the start of every injection and during the injection.
Speaker
The speaker provides a “beep” tone under control of the CPU via a GPIO. The
speaker is powered with 12V on one pin and a 12V op amp controlling the
other pin. If the CPU GPIO “BEEPER” is asserted low the op amp output is high.
No voltage drop occurs across the speaker so no sound is produced. If the
GPIO goes high, the op amp output is low putting 12V across the speaker.
Manipulating this GPIO as a PWM stream produces sound with controlled
volume.

847503-E 2017-04-21
7-4-10

[Link] Motor
The motor used is a Pittman N2311 GN2341A-123-R3 19.1V brushless motor.
The unit has a 4-pole rotor and a 6 slot, 3-phase stator.
Encoder
The encoder is an Avago HEDS-9040 optical encoder with a 1000 line/rotation
(4000 count/rotation) codewheel. The unit provides two outputs for quadrature
data, as well as a third output for index pulsing for each full rotation.
Motor Hall Effect Sensors
Three Hall effect sensors are placed at 120° offsets from one another. They
detect the stator pole positions with one of the three producing a signal
transition for every 30° motor rotation step.

[Link] Motor PCBA Subassembly

The motor controller (U7) generates the signals required to drive the ram
motor and accept feedback signals. The motor is primarily controlled by
7—THEORY OF

the Performance Motion Devices (PMD) MC3310 chip. The subsystem block
POWERHEAD
OPERATION

diagram is shown below. Refer to Figure 7-4-15.

Connectors
The Motor Board includes two connectors, a Molex connector connecting the
motor board to the motor, and a Samtec connector connecting the motor
board to the logic board. The connectors are described below.
J1 - 60-Pin Motor Board Samtec Connector
A male Samtec dual row right angle socket connector connects the Motor Board
to the Logic Board. This connector is a 60-pin connector arranged in two rows with
the odd numbers located on one side and even numbers on the other. The pin
assignments and test points are shown below.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 7-4-11

SIDE VIEW

1
TOP VIEW 59

2 60

Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 24V 2 24V
3 24V 4 24V
5 24V 6 24V
7 NC 8 NC
9 GND 10 GND
11 GND 12 GND
13 GND 14 GND
15 MOTOR_A_CURRENT_ABC 16 MOTOR_A_PWM_A_OUT

7—THEORY OF
POWERHEAD
OPERATION
17 TEST_MOTOR_A_CURRENT 18 MOTOR_A_PWM_B_OUT
19 MOTOR_A_PHASE_A_ENABLE 20 MOTOR_A_PWM_C_OUT
21 MOTOR_A_PHASE_B_ENABLE 22 GND
23 MOTOR_A_PHASE_C_ENABLE 24 MOTOR_A_DRIVE_FAULT#
25 GND 26 MOTOR_A_HALL_A
27 MOTOR_A_EXPEL_LIMIT 28 MOTOR_A_HALL_B
29 MOTOR_A_RETRACT_LIMIT 30 MOTOR_A_HALL_C
31 NC 32 #SA_HOME
33 SA_AXIS_IN 34 SA_AXIS_OUT
35 NC 36 12V
37 RECV_FROM_A_SIDE_SERVO 38 XMIT_TO_A_SIDE_SERVO
39 2.5V 40 GND
41 GND 42 #RESET
43 20MHz 44 GND
45 GND 46 #PMD_IRQ2
47 NC 48 3.3V
49 MOTOR_A_QUAD_A 50 NC
51 MOTOR_A_QUAD_B 52 SA_PWM_A
53 MOTOR_A_INDEX 54 SA_PWM_B
55 SA_FWD/REV 56 SA_PWM_C
57 GND 58 GND
59 5V 60 5V

Figure 7-4-9 J1 60-Pin Motor Board Connector

847503-E 2017-04-21
7-4-12

Connector Pin # Motor Board Test Point Motor Board Signal Name
1 TP27 24V
2 TP27 24V
3 TP27 24V
4 TP27 24V
5 TP27 24V
6 TP27 24V
9 TP5 GND
10 TP5 GND
11 TP5 GND
13 TP5 GND
14 TP5 GND
15 TP51 MOTOR_A_CURRENT_ABC
16 TP30 MOTOR_A_PWM_A_OUT
17 TP54 TEST_MOTOR_A_CURRENT
18 TP37 MOTOR_A_PWM_B_OUT
19 TP31 MOTOR_A_PHASE_A_ENABLE
20 TP45 MOTOR_A_PWM_C_OUT
7—THEORY OF

POWERHEAD
OPERATION

21 TP38 MOTOR_A_PHASE_B_ENABLE
22 TP5 GND
23 TP48 MOTOR_A_PHASE_C_ENABLE
24 TP59 MOTOR_A_DRIVE_FAULT#
25 TP5 GND
26 TP10 MOTOR_A_HALL_A
27 TP17 MOTOR_A_EXPEL_LIMIT
28 TP11 MOTOR_A_HALL_B
29 TP16 MOTOR_A_RETRACT_LIMIT
30 TP12 MOTOR_A_HALL_C
36 TP19 (23.7kΩ) 12V
38 TP22 XMIT_TO_A_SIDE_SERVO
39 TP1 2.5V
40 TP5 GND
41 TP5 GND
42 TP21 #RESET
43 TP23 20MHz
44 TP5 GND
45 TP5 GND

Figure 7-4-10a J1 60-Pin Motor Board Connector

847503-E 2017-04-21
 7-4-13

48 TP2 3.3V
49 TP13 MOTOR_A_QUAD_A
51 TP14 MOTOR_A_QUAD_B
52 TP6 SA_PWM_A
53 TP15 MOTOR_A_INDEX
54 TP7 SA_PWM_B
55 TP9 SA_FWD/REV
56 TP8 SA_PWM_C
57 TP5 GND
58 TP5 GND
59 TP4 5V

Figure 7-14-10b J1 60-Pin Motor Board Connector

J2 - 14-Pin Motor Molex Connector
The current connection between the Motor Board and the motor is a 14-pin
Molex Mini-Fit Jr. dual row, vertical, snap-in plastic peg PCB lock connector
(part number: 39-29-9146) which connects to the motor via a mating cable
assembly. The pin assignment and test points for the connector are given in the

7—THEORY OF
POWERHEAD
OPERATION
table below.
J2 MOTOR CABLE COLOR CODES/SIGNALS
Pin 14 Pin 8
(Pink) (Black)

Pin 7 Pin 1
(Orange) (Red)
Pin Connecon Test Points
1 +5V TP4
2 Quadrature output B from the motor encoder TP14
3 Hall effect sensor A from the motor TP10
4 Hall effect sensor B from the motor TP11
5 +5V TP4
6 No connecon
7 PWM motor input, 3rd phase TP49
8 Ground TP44
9 Quadrature output A from the motor encoder TP13
10 Index output from the motor encoder TP15
11 Hall effect sensor C from the motor TP12
12 Ground TP44
13 PWM motor input, 1st phase TP43
14 PWM motor input, 2nd phase TP47

Figure 7-4-11 J2 14 Pin Motor Connector

847503-E 2017-04-21
7-4-14

Critical Component Placement

The 60-pin Samtec connector is placed on the side of the board adjacent to
the Logic Board. The 14-pin Molex connector is placed on the opposite side.
The MC3310 motion controller is placed as close to the Samtec connector as
possible. The drive circuitry, power transistors, and associated 330µF power
supply capacitors are placed near the Molex connector with the power
transistors in close proximity to the Molex connector. Keep out areas on the top
side are 0.2” on the top and bottom of the board. This area is expanded on the
bottom side to 0.53” to avoid damaging mounted components on the screw
mounts. These are all shown graphically below in Figure 7-4-11.

PCB top side PCB boom side

keep out
keep out
connector
Samtec

MC3310
7—THEORY OF

POWERHEAD
OPERATION

Transistors and
Drive Circuitry

connector
Power

Molex

keep out
keep out

screw holes

Figure 7-4-12 Motor Board Keep Out Areas

847503-E 2017-04-21
 7-4-15

PMD MC3310 and Supporting Electronics

The MC3310 is a single-axis motion processor capable of driving the 3-phase
brushless motor with user-defined trajectories. In addition, the chip allows for
external sensors and feedback signals to be used in the control of the motor.
MC3310 Motion Controller Signals Gated by the Programmable Logic Device
The 3-phase pulse-width modulation (PWM) signals are created by pins 100-
102 (PWM_MAG1, PWM_MAG2, and PWM_MAG3), as is the directional indicator
signal available at pin 96 (PWM_SIGN1) although the directional indicator
signal is not used. In this design, all four of these signals are fed through the
programmable logic device (PLD) located on the logic board which employs
a watchdog timer and set of enable registers to gate the PWM signals. Fault
signals from the motion controller, the half-bridge power MOSFET drivers, or
the current limit monitoring circuitry, result in the blocking of signals through
the CPLD, stopping all motor motion.

Hall Effect and Encoder Feedback Use by the MC3310 Motion Controller

7—THEORY OF
The received signals from the Hall effect sensors (HALL_A, HALL_B, and

POWERHEAD
OPERATION
HALL_C) provide actual positioning information at 120⁰ increments, while
the quadrature information (QUAD_A and QUAD_B) provided by the motor’s
encoder can be used to determine the actual direction and velocity of rotation
of the rotor. Although these quadrature signals are connected to the CPLD,
they are only used by the motion controller as a method to confirm the actual
trajectory is tracking the expected trajectory.
In addition to rotor-sensing information, the MC3310 also accepts feedback
from the ram assembly hall sensors to ensure the motor does not drive the
ram beyond limits in either direction detected by sensors on the assembly and
accepted by the motion processor as logical inputs at pins 63 and 64 (POS_LIM
and NEG_LIM, respectively).

Motor Driver Circuitry

Each phase of the 3-phase motor is driven by identical circuitry comprising a
Linear Technology LT1158 half bridge N-channel power MOSFET driver, two
power MOSFETs, and related supporting components. Together, the circuitry
accepts the pulse-width modulation (PWM) and enable signals from the PLD,
and outputs PWM drive signals for the motor with maximum drive currents
possible in excess of 80A, but limited to approximately 3.6A by feedback in the
circuitry. The traces on the PCB along the current paths to and from the motor
should be sized to allow for high currents of 10A.

847503-E 2017-04-21
7-4-16

[Link] LED PCBA Subassembly

The LED PCBA provides illumination to the knob. It connects to the logic board
via a cable. (Refer to Figure 7-4-16). By varying the PWM rate of each signal
(Red, Green, Blue) the software can control the color of the LEDs.
P1 - Detailed Connector and Subsystem Interfaces
The sole connector on the LED PCBA is Molex part number 43650-0524. This is
a 5 position, single row surface mount header with a positive latch and keyed
polarization. The connector allows for an interface between the LED and Logic
PCBAs and delivers power (+24 VDC, 100 mA maximum) and 3 PWM signals
from the Logic PCBA to the LED PCBA. The connector has the following pin
assignments:

5 1

Pin Funcon Net Name

7—THEORY OF

POWERHEAD
OPERATION

1 Digital Ground DGND

2 Drives FET, sinks current through Red LEDs RED_EN
3 +24 VDC +24V_A
4 Drives FET, sinks current through Blue LEDs BLUE_EN
5 Drives FET, sinks current through Green LEDs GREEN_EN

Figure 7-4-13 LED PCBA Connector

847503-E 2017-04-21
 7-4-17

J7

On Off Switch

I2C Hall Effect U10

Inputs (3)
J1
*Altera
1 Wire On/Off Input UART 1 PLD Motor
PWM Enable
2 Wires Console Serial Data CAN Outputs
PWM
2 Wires Interface I2C Serial Data I2C Drive
4 Wires RS422 Serial Data *Altera UART 0
PLD U10 DTIN0 & 2 Hall Effect
Outputs (2)
1 Wire Start Aux Start Input
J6 Motor Current
25 Pin D-Shell 125ml or 200ml Faceplate
U19
Connector J TAG
From Power MCF5282 200ml/Expel Limit
J10
Supply Microcontroller Analog Retract Limit Heater/ 125ml Faceplate PCB
Heater Control/ Faceplate I2C Interface
Power Supply Multiplexer Syringe In Place Sensor
Analog Inputs I2C Interface Cable 200ml Heater
10 Wires 24 Volts 3.3 V, 5 V, and Thermistors (2)
Touch Faceplate Sensors (2)
12 V Panel Thermistors (2)
On U1 Multiplexer
Outputs
Knob Led PCB 847140-1
Tri-Color LEDs

7—THEORY OF
J3

POWERHEAD
U10

OPERATION
Shield Heater Control
12V *Altera LED
1 Wire 12V Board Knob Light
24V PLD
Cable
Beeper

Beeper Output

U42
SRAM

U10
*Altera Data and Address Bus Data and
PLD Address Bus

U2 U6

FLASH Epson U32

ROM S1D13A05 Tilt Sensor

Display Controller J17
with 256K SRAM BDM/JTAG
U30 PORT
J2
Touch Screen
Controller
Touch Screen

Display SPI
J8
320x240
J4 U3 NOTES:
Backlight
Inverter U37 Backlight 2 Serial *All of the Altera PLD blocks are
EEPROM located in the same IC.

Figure 7-4-14 Powerhead Logic Board Block Diagram

847503-E 2017-04-21
 7-4-18

J1 J2

Power Supply References

A to D Coverter U2
To J7
UART 1

To J7
PWM Encoder
Outputs
MC3310
PMD Servo Controller

Hall
Effect
Sensors
7—THEORY OF

POWERHEAD
OPERATION

To J7
844376 Brushless
Hall DC
Effect
Inputs
Motor

To J7
Motor
DC Brushless
Enable
Motor DC
Motor Drive Circuit Power Motor
To J7
PWM 24 Volts
Drive

Motor Current

To J7
Motor
Current

Figure 7-4-15 Motor Board Block Diagram

847503-E 2017-04-21
 7-4-19

Constant Local
Current 5 VDC
Supplies
847170-1
Powerhead
Logic
Board
+24 V

7—THEORY OF
POWERHEAD
R Red PWM 847141

OPERATION
G Transistor Green PWM LED Red
B Drivers Blue PWM P1 Board J3 Green
Cable Blue
Assy.

Figure 7-4-16 LED Board Block Diagram

847503-E 2017-04-21
 7-4-20

Touch
Panel
Display
controller

Backlights
Hall Effect
Sensors
J4 J2 J8

J7 Brushless
DC Motor

From Encoder
7—THEORY OF

POWERHEAD

Power
OPERATION

J1 J17
Supply

BDM/JTAG

J3 J10

Note: Connector positions illustrated

are for reference only.

Knob
Heater
Light
Faceplate
Cable
Cable

Figure 7-4-17 Powerhead Logic Board Connectors

847503-E 2017-04-21
 7-4-21

J1 POWERHEAD CABLE
CONNECTOR PIN SIDE VIEW
Pin 13 Pin 1

Pin 25 Pin 14

CABLE COLOR CODES/SIGNALS

Power Supply J1 BLK (C GND) J1 Powerhead
Connector J2 BRN (I2C DATA) J2 Connector
J3 RED (I2C_CLOCK) J3
J4 ORANGE (CANH) J4

7—THEORY OF
J5 YELLOW (CANL) J5

POWERHEAD
OPERATION
J6 GREEN (OEM_XMIT+) J6
J7 BLUE (OEM_XMIT-) J7
J8 VIOLET (OEM_REC+) J8
J9 GRAY (OEM_REC-) J9
J10 WHITE (NC) J10
J11 PINK (NC) J11
J12 TAN (NC) J12
J13 WHITE/BLK (GND) J13
J14 WHITE/TAN (NC) J14
J15 WHITE/RED (+24VDC) J15
J16 WHITE/ORANGE (AUX START) J16
J17 WHITE/YELLOW (ON/OFF_SW) J17
J18 WHITE/GREEN (+24VDC) J18
J19 WHITE/BLUE (+24VDC) J19
J20 WHITE/VIOLET (+24VDC) J20
J21 WHITE/GRAY (+24VDC) J21
J22 WHITE/BLK/RED (GND) J22
J23 RED/BLK (GND) J23
J24 RED/TAN (GND) J24
J25 RED/GREEN (GND) J25
J26 CHASSIS GND ( ) J26
J27 CHASSIS GND ( ) J27

Figure 7-4-18 Powerhead Connector Pinouts

847503-E 2017-04-21
 7-4-22
7—THEORY OF

POWERHEAD
OPERATION

This page intentionally left blank.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 7-5-1

7.5 CONSOLE OVERVIEW

The console provides the user interface through the color LCD and the touch
screen. Also, the console provides the system ON/OFF switch that is operable
only with the power pack circuit breaker in the ON position.
Refer to the console block diagram Figure 7-5-1 and Figure 7-5-2.
7.5.1 CONSOLE CPU
The console CPU performs the following functions.
• Serial communications Controller Area Network (CAN) to the powerhead
• Stores all screen information
• Processes touch screen inputs with a PIC processor
• Manages screen generation
• Stores a set of protocols

7—THEORY OF
OPERATION
CONSOLE

847503-E 2017-04-21
 7-5-2

7.5.2 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONS

Interface Connection
The interface connector provides the means for the console to obtain power
from the supply as well as provide the path for the console to communicate
with the system.
CAN Transceiver
The communication channel to and from the console is accomplished using a
controller area network (CAN). This communication is a two wire bidirectional
system running at a rate of 250 kbits/sec.
Touch Screen Control
The quiescent state assumes the screen is not touched. Signal X+ is driven
high and X-, Y+ and Y- are high impedance. During this time the line SY- is
monitored by a comparator. If the screen is touched the comparator’s output
will generate an interrupt to the PIC (Peripheral Interface Control). Upon receipt
of the interrupt, the X- line is driven low thus creating a voltage gradient across
the X-axis. The X coordinate is defined by the value digitized on the SY- channel
corrected by the difference between 5 volts and the value found on the SX+
7—THEORY OF
OPERATION

channel. Then X lines are allowed to float and Y+ is driven high and Y- is driven
CONSOLE

low. The Y coordinate is then defined as the digitized value for the SX- channel
corrected by the difference between 5 volts and the value found on the SY+
channel. The BYTEME signal is asserted and the X and Y coordinates are placed
the SPI transmit buffer.
RAM
The console PCB has a total of 4M bytes of memory organized as 1M x 32. The
RAM is the heart of the console control variables and data storage. All data
within these devices are lost when system power is removed.
Non-Volatile memory/Real Time Clock
The console has a battery backed SRAM used as non-volatile memory for
persistent storage of console calibration data, setup data and up to 40 user-
defined injection protocols. This circuit also supplies the real time clock for the
system that keeps time while the unit is powered off.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 7-5-3

FLASH
The console contains 4M of FLASH memory which consists of 2-2 MB chips.
Each FLASH device is divided up into 32-64 KB sectors which are loaded with
various sections of the console software. The console software is divided as
follows:
These devices contain the product software, all of the bit mapped images used
on the display screens, the basic set of languages used and the fonts sets for all
displayed text. Also, these devices contain the object records which are used
to build the screens. Objects are the devices which combine images, text, and
functionality. The screen records are simply the list of objects and locations.
CPU
The console uses an MCF5307 as its main microprocessor. In addition to the
normal uses of a microprocessor, data flow to and from memory and peripheral
devices, the CPU communicates directly with the SED1355 graphic’s LCD panel
controller. The SED1355 gathers the information from the CPU to build the
various screen images. Once the data is organized the SED1355 will generate
the necessary control signals for the LCD display and display the image. The
image will be maintained by the SED1355 until the CPU provides a new or

7—THEORY OF
OPERATION
updates the current set of images.

CONSOLE

847503-E 2017-04-21
 7—THEORY OF
OPERATION 7-5-4
CONSOLE

847503-E 2017-04-21
Pwr Switch and Led's
802114S

Touch Screen
802104S

Universal Console CPU Bd

844101-1S J3 (Aux RGB)
J9 (Ext Spkr)

J6 (On/Off )
PS1 (Touch Screen)
(Battery)
Inverter bd
Part of Display Kit J2
802116S

J4
Debugg/Programming
J7 J8
(Inverter) J1 (Pic Port) (LCD)

J5 (System Conn)
Inverter Harness
Interface Cable Assy
Part of Display Kit
802110S Display Cable
802116S
Part of Display Kit COLOR LCD
Part of Display Kit 802116S

Figure 7-5-1 Console Wiring Diagram

802116S

J1 J2

J3 (CPU Connector)

OptiVantage Interface Bd
844102-1S

System Comm
Handswitch
15 pin D-SUB
8-pin Mini-Din
 Diag LEDS DS8 - DS 11

System
PIC ICSP J1
Interface Not Used
16F873
J5 U3 Touch J2
844102-1 clock RTC
And SNAP
A0-A14 INV LCD Color
CAN Batt On Balt.
back J7 J8
U4 & U21 12C PS1
SRAM
D24 - D31
buss req. U16
On/Off 16Mhz
Y1
ADDR:A0 - A21
Display Aux
CONTROL Controler RGB
CPU
Panel J6 SED1355 FOA output
MC5307e
U7 J3
DATA:D0 - D15
Isolator
U22
U8
Not Used PROG
:A0 - A21 & DATA
RS422/232 clk
MEM
2 MByte
Hands Display Mem
GP I/O DATA:D0-D15 Flash
1Mx16 DRAM
U19
U6
GND +24V (4 Mbyte total)
Aux Spkr J9
DS2 PROG
TP3 :A0-A21
D1 O & DATA
TP5 SPK MEM

O
TP4 SPK

O
U13 +5 Drvr. 2 Mbyte
DATA:D15 - D31
TP1
O Switch & Jumper U20

+12 Inputs (Config.

Figure 7-5-2 Console Block Diagram

U11 SYS.
Options)
S1:A,B,C,D RAM
U12 +3.3 DATA:D0 - D31 4 Mbyte total
O
DRAM
Reset SW3 TP2 (2 chips)
DS3
DBUG J4 U17
ADDR - A0 - A21 (2X)
+3.3 +5 U18
Diag. LEDs
40 Mhz DS4-DS7
PUP Y2
Reset clk
U14

847503-E 2017-04-21
CONSOLE
OPERATION
7-5-5

7—THEORY OF
 7-5-6

This page intentionally left blank.

7—THEORY OF
OPERATION
CONSOLE

847503-E 2017-04-21
 8-1-1

8 CALIBRATION

8.1 OVERVIEW
When Service mode is activated, the powerhead screen will display the service
mode menu. The functional description of each service feature is defined in the
following sections:
8.2 Touch Screen Calibration
8.3 Powerhead Tilt Position Calibration
8.4 Powerhead Ram Position Calibration
8.5 Pressure Calibration
8.6 Verifying Calibration
8.7 Other Tests
8.8 Other Adjustments

8—CALIBRATION
8.1.1 REQUIRED TOOLS
1 Serial Communication Cable (Service Key) (P/N 844382).
1 Pressure Fixture (P/N 844924) and Fixture Holder (P/N 844927)
1 Pressure Gauge (P/N 844920S, 600# Analog)
1 125 mL Faceplate (P/N 844425) or (P/N 844760)
1 Syringe Calibration Kit (P/N 844910S, contains 200 and 125 mL syringes).
Tap Water
Safety Glasses
1 200 mL Faceplate ( P/N 844850) (for use in Section 8.6 Verifying Calibration)

847503-E 2017-04-21
 8-1-2

8.1.2 FREQUENCY OF CALIBRATION

The OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System should be calibrated in
response to a failed maintenance and checkout procedure, at least every 2
years or whenever either of the following components have been replaced:
• Motor
• Motor Driver PCBA
• Powerhead Logic PCBA 
NOTE: Some software upgrades may require calibration of the injector as well.
8.1.3 ENTERING SERVICE MODE
1. Power off injector.
2. Install a 125 mL faceplate.
3. Using the manual knob, extend the ram approximately 0.25” past flush with
the surface at the base of the faceplate (next to the ram).
4. Connect Service Key/software download cable, P/N 844382, to Power Supply J2
connection.
5. Apply power to the injector. The service screens will be displayed on the
powerhead and the console will display the Injector Setup Screen after homing the
8—CALIBRATION

ram if necessary.
Power Supply Model 847300 (Rear View)

J6 TM

O I
RS232/
RS422 CAN

J3
100-120V~/
230V~
50-60HZ
4 AMP
J2

J5 P4 J10B J10A J1

J2, Service Key

Connection

Figure 8-1-1 Service Key Input Connection

6. When service mode is activated, Page 1 of the Service screens will be displayed on
the powerhead as illustrated in Figure 8-1-2. To advance to the next page, press
the right- arrow button. To return to the previous page, press the left-arrow button.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 8-1-3

Touch Screen Calibration REQUIRED

Powerhead Tilt Position Cal REQUIRED

Powerhead Ram Position Cal REQUIRED

Figure 8-1-2 Page 1 Service Screen

Pressure Ram - 125ml REQUIRED

Powerhead Wear Burn/In Select

8—CALIBRATION
Figure 8-1-3 Page 2 Service Screen

NOTE: When the injector is first powered on, the “Pressure Ram 125 mL’” button
will not be active (in a gray field). This indicates pressure calibration cannot
be performed until after Powerhead Ram Position Cal (calibration) has been
performed. This is true at every power up, even if the Powerhead Ram Position
Cal button indicates COMPLETE. After the Powerhead Ram Position Cal is
completed (the button will state COMPLETE), the Pressure Ram button will
become active.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 8-1-4

7. When service mode is activated, the Injector Setup screen will be displayed on the
console as illustrated in figure 8-1-4.

MAY 02 2007 20:57 Injector Set Up

Console: DV00.00.34 PowerHead: D03.00.34 OEM Interface: [Link]

Touch Screen Calibration Complete

Figure 8-1-4 Console Service Screen

8—CALIBRATION

8.1.4 EXITING SERVICE MODE

1. Remove Power.
2. Remove Software Service Key.
3. Turn Power Back On. The console and the powerhead will display the Main Screen.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 8-2-1

8.2 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION

Touch screen calibration procedures below can be used for both powerhead
and console.
1. Activate service mode as previously described in section 8.1.
2. For console touch screen calibration, press the “Touch Screen Calibration”
REQUIRED button on the console. For powerhead touch screen calibration, touch
the “Touch Screen Calibration” REQUIRED button on the powerhead Page 1 Service
Screen.
3. Touch upper left corner red square.
4. Touch lower right corner red square.
5. Touch the center red square.
6. When screen calibration is completed, the service screen will be displayed and the
“Touch Screen Calibration” button will indicate “Complete”.
NOTE: If the red touch targets continue to reappear, this means a touch target
was missed during the calibration process. Simply repeat the calibration
process until the service screen is displayed.

8—CALIBRATION
Touch Screen Calibration REQUIRED

Power Head Tilt Position Cal REQUIRED

Power Head Ram Position Cal REQUIRED

MAY 02 2007 20:57 Injector Set Up

Console: DV00.00.34 PowerHead: D03.00.34 OEM Interface: [Link]

Touch Screen Calibration Required

Figure 8-2-1 Touch Screen Calibration

847503-E 2017-04-21
 8-2-2

This page intentionally left blank.

8—CALIBRATION

847503-E 2017-04-21
 8-3-1

8.3 POWERHEAD TILT POSITION CALIBRATION

Enter service mode as previously described in section 8.1 of this manual.
1. Press the “Powerhead Tilt Position Calibration” REQUIRED button.

Touch Screen Calibration COMPLETE

Remove the Heater and Faceplate.

Powerhead Tilt Position Cal REQUIRED
Position Powerhead 60 degrees above
Powerhead Ram Position Cal REQUIRED
horizontal.

Ensure the Powerhead is motionless and

press next.

Next Cancel

Figure 8-3-1 Tilt Sensor Calibration

2. Point the powerhead up 60° above horizontal.
3. Ensure the powerhead is motionless and press the “Next” button.
4. Point the powerhead to 30° below horizontal.
5. Ensure the powerhead is motionless and press the “Next” button.
6. The powerhead display will return to page 1 of the Service Screen.

8—CALIBRATION
7. When Powerhead Tilt Position Calibration is complete, the Powerhead Tilt Position
Cal button will display COMPLETE.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 8-3-2

This page intentionally left blank.

8—CALIBRATION

847503-E 2017-04-21
 8-4-1

8.4 POWERHEAD RAM POSITION CALIBRATION

NOTE: Because Ram Position Calibration affects Pressure Calibration, after Ram
Position Calibration is completed, Pressure Calibration will be required.
1. Enter service mode as described in section 8.1 of this manual.
NOTE: Before powering on in Service Mode, ensure a 125 mL faceplate is installed
and the ram is extended past the surface at the base of the faceplate (next to the
ram) by approximately .25” (.64 cm).
2. Remove faceplate adapter.
3. Press the “Powerhead Ram Position Calibration” button

Touch Screen Calibration COMPLETE

Remove the syringe faceplate, and move the

Powerhead Tilt Position Cal COMPLETE ram until flush with the metal frontplate.
This must be done with the
Powerhead Ram Position Cal REQUIRED Manual Knobs.

NOTE: Final ram movement must be in the

expel direction.

Next Stop

Figure 8-4-1 Ram Calibration

8—CALIBRATION
4. Using the manual knob, retract the ram slightly past the faceplate flush position.
Then move the ram in the expel direction until it is flush with the main frame.
NOTE: When settling at the flush position, the last ram movement should be in the
expel direction. This eliminates motor backlash from the calibration process

Ram Aligned
Flush with
Powerhead
Faceplate

Figure 8-4-2 Ram Positioning

5. Press the Next button.
6. The procedure is now ready to be initialized. Press the Next button and follow user
prompt message on the powerhead display.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 8-4-2

7. Once initialized, the following will automatically occur:

The ram will move automatically to the following incremental positions:
After a short delay, ram moves .060” from the flush position.
After a short delay, ram moves 0.125”. This move represents the flush position for
the 200 mL adaptor.
After a short delay, ram moves 0.125”. This 0.25” move represents the flush position
for the 125 mL adaptor.
After a short delay, the ram moves out to calibrate the 200 mL ram expel positions
for the 200 mL adapter.
After a short delay, the ram then moves out to calibrate the 125 mL ram expel posi-
tion for the 125 mL adapter.
After a short delay, the ram then moves out 0.10” to calibrate the front wall posi-
tion. This distance represents the ram crash value.
Then the ram will retract to its home position.
8. If position calibration is successful, the values are stored in memory and the
Powerhead Ram Position Calibration button will display COMPLETE.
9. Do not power down the injector. Pressure Calibration must be completed
before the injector is powered OFF.
8—CALIBRATION

847503-E 2017-04-21
 8-5-1

8.5 PRESSURE CALIBRATION - 125 ML

NOTE: Pressure Calibration and Powerhead Ram Position Calibration are
interrelated. In order to perform Pressure Calibration, Ram Position Calibration
must be performed first. Once Ram Position Calibration is performed, Pressure
Calibration will be required.
8.5.1 OVERVIEW

CAUTION!

Only Qualified Service Personnel should perform this procedure.

CAUTION!

Pressure limit calibration may run the injector at pressures higher than those
occurring in normal use. Safety goggles should be worn at all times.

Pressure Calibration establishes a flow rate to pressure relationship. To achieve

this relationship, the pressure is measured and the flow rate is adjusted through
an externally-mounted calibration fixture.
Before performing these procedures, carefully read all instructions. Also, take

8—CALIBRATION
note of the bullet items listed below:
• During calibration, when the ram position indicates 120 mL or greater for
a 125 mL syringe, the system will automatically enable.
• After the calibration injection, the achieved flow rate field will update
when the ram completes its stroke. 
8.5.2 REQUIRED TOOLS
1 Serial Communication Cable (Service Key) (P/N 844382).
1 Pressure Fixture (P/N 844924) and Fixture Holder (P/N 844927)
1 Pressure Gauge (P/N 844920S, 600# Analog)
1 125 mL Faceplate (P/N 844425) or (P/N 844760)
1 Syringe Calibration Kit (P/N 844910S, contains 200 and 125 mL syringes)
Tap Water
Safety Glasses
1 200 mL Faceplate ( P/N 844850) (for use in Section 8.6 Verifying Calibration)

847503-E 2017-04-21
 8-5-2

8.5.3 PRESSURE GAUGE CALIBRATION

We recommend that any psi gauge be re-calibrated at least every 12 months
using a NIST traceable method, or equivalent national standard. If removed,
the gauge should be reattached to the fixture using PTFE tape or equivalent,
nonpermanent sealant.
8.5.4 PRESSURE SLEEVE AND SYRINGE INSPECTION

CAUTION!

Always inspect the pressure sleeve for crazing, opacity, scratches and other
damage. The damaged item must be replaced if any of these defects are found.
Pressure jackets should be replaced after two (2) years of use, or between 500
and 1,000 injections, depending on the physical condition. Use of a damaged
or deteriorated pressure sleeve may result in rupture during an injection.

Inspect the plunger backplate and button for damage or deterioration.

Replace regularly, depending on the physical condition. Continual application
of high pressure, as found during pressure calibration, can deform the
backplate and button. A damaged or deteriorated plunger can blow-by during
an injection or fail to properly latch to the ram during filling
8—CALIBRATION

200
300 Gauge
400
100

500

600

Coupling and
Quick Disconnect

Flow
Control
Valve

Flow Control Valve P/N 844924 with 600 psi gauge P/N 844920

Figure 8-5-1a. Pressure Fixture for Powerhead Calibration

847503-E 2017-04-21
 8-5-3

Figure 8-5-1b. Pressure Fixture Holder

8—CALIBRATION

847503-E 2017-04-21
 8-5-4

8.5.5 PRESSURE CALIBRATION INSTRUCTIONS

NOTE: If the “Pressure Ram” button is in a gray field in Figure 8-5-2, a Ram
Position Calibration (Section 8.4) will need to be performed . The injector must
be left ON after the Ram Position Calibration takes place. This section can then
be performed.
NOTE: Before using a syringe for calibration or verification, inspect the syringe
and plunger to ensure the plunger can be moved in the syringe without undo
sticking. If required, lubricate the syringe plunger with a small amount of silicon
grease such as DOW CORNING® 111 VALVE LUBRICANT or Boss® 411 Silicone
General Purpose Compound.

1. Install the 125 mL faceplate on the injector.

0
Pro
to
co
lN
50
To

am
ta

e
lm

Timpti
O

19
L

in o

7
B
g
Bos
lu

lu
s
A
0:0Tota
En

A
a b
0l:0Time

le

C
h
1

eck
fo
In

r
je

air
ct
0 Dela
Sca

0
n
Pe
3

y
ela
2 PSI
ka

y
8—CALIBRATION

Ram fully retracted

Figure 8-5-2 Installing 125 mL Faceplate

2. After the 125 mL faceplate is installed, the screen below will be displayed. Press the
“Continue” button to proceed.

A new Faceplate Adapter has been detected.

Make sure the new Adapter is properly
installed.

Press Continue and the ram automatically

move forward to lock the faceplate.

Continue

Figure 8-5-3 Continue Screen

847503-E 2017-04-21
 8-5-5

3. Install 125 mL syringe.

Press up to
load syringe
Press down to

0
Pro
to
co
lN
50
To
lock syringe in place
am
ta

0
e
lm

Timpti
O

19
L

in o

7
B
g
Bos
lu

lu

Pro
s

to
A
0:0Tota
En

co
A

lN
a

50
To
b

am
0l:0Time

le

ta

e
lm

Timp
C

19
h
1

L
ec

in olu
ti

7
k

B
g s A
fo
In

Bo
r
je

ai

lu
ct
0 Dela
Sca

s
0
n
Pe
3

0:0Tota
En
y
ela
2 P SI
ak

A
a
5

b
0l:0Time

le

C
h
1

ec
k
fo
In

r
je

ai
ct
0 Dela
Sca

r
0
n
Pe
3

y
ela
2 PSI
ak

y
Figure 8-5-4 Loading 125 mL Syringe
4. Install the Pressure Calibration Holder and Fixture according to Figure 8-5-5.
NOTE: Only use the extension tubing provided in the Pressure Fixture Kit for
calibration.

8—CALIBRATION
300
200 400

500
100
600
300
200 400

500
100
600
Peak PSI
325
Scan Delay
Inject Delay
0
0

Total Time
[Link]
Check for air

Peak PSI
Enable

325
Scan Delay
0.1

Inject Delay
A

0
A
A

Total Time
Timing Bolus

[Link]
OptiBolus

Check for air

Total mL
2

50

Enable
197

Protocol Name

0.1 A A
A
Timing Bolus

A
OptiBolus

Total mL
2

50
197

Protocol Name
0

Fixture on Remote Stand Fixture on J-bow

Figure 8-5-5 Fixture Installation

847503-E 2017-04-21
 8-5-6

5. On the powerhead screen, touch the arrow button to select Service Screen 2. Then
at the powerhead, press the “Pressure Ram” REQUIRED button. The screen shown in
Figure 8-5-6 is displayed.
NOTE: If the “Pressure Ram” button is in a gray field in Figure 8-5-6, a Ram
Position Calibration (Section 8.3.2) will need to be performed and the injector
must be left ON after this calibration takes place. This section can then be
performed.

124
Pressure Ram A - 125ml Required

Powerhead Wear In/Burn In Select

Pressure calibration shot will run at 7.0 mL/s.
Use a 21-T needle or equivalent.
Enter the measured pressure when the shot
completes.

Start Back

Figure 8-5-6 Pressure Calibration Screens

6. Open the flow-control valve fully. The fixture has a check valve that allows filling
8—CALIBRATION

at any time, whether the valve is open or closed. To purge through this valve,
however, leave the valve open until most of the air is removed.
7. Fill and purge the syringe with water by use of the powerhead touchscreen fill/
expel arrows.
8. Close the flow-control valve fully and then open the valve four (4) full turns.
This action will ensure that the first pressure injection starts in a safe pressure
range.

If the ram is positioned to indicate at least 120 mL, the manual knob will illuminate
blue to indicate the injector is enabled.
9. Press the “Start” button to proceed. The screen shown in Figure 8-5-7 is displayed.

Allow the injection to run completely. If required, adjust the flow control valve
during the injection to obtain the desired 200 psi. The manual knob will remain
illuminated during the injection and turn off at the end of the injection when the
achieved flow rate is displayed.
A Stop button is displayed as shown in Figure 8-5-7. If the Stop button is pressed,
the injection will stop and the display will revert to the previous screen to allow
refilling and restarting of the injection.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 8-5-7

DANGER!

Do not exceed 300 psi reading on gauge when performing calibration. Failure
to follow this information could result in damage to equipment or cause
personnel injury.

Stop

Allow the pressure calibration shot to run to

completion.

Figure 8-5-7 Allow the pressure calibration shot...

10. When the injection is complete, the following screen is displayed.

8—CALIBRATION
Set

Enter the pressure value that was measured

by the pressure gauge.

Achieved Flow Rate: 7.1

Figure 8-5-8 Enter the pressure value...

11. Verify that achieved flow rate is 7.0 mL/s +/-.1 mL/s.
12. Using the arrow keys, select the steady-state pressure reported on the pressure
gauge during the last second of the injection. NOTE: The selected pressure must
be between 190 and 210 psi for the calibration to be valid.
13. Once the pressure is selected, press the Set button. The injector saves the pressure
entered by the user and the Main Calibration screen is displayed.
14. Upon pressure calibration completion, review Main Calibration screen to verify
that REQUIRED calibration is complete. The injector may now be powered off.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 8-5-8

Service Screen 1

Touch Screen Calibration COMPLETE

Powerhead Tilt Position Cal COMPLETE

Powerhead Ram Position Cal COMPLETE

Service Screen 2

Pressure Ram - 125ml COMPLETE

Powerhead Wear/Burn In Select

8—CALIBRATION

Figure 8-5-9 Main Calibration screens showing REQUIRED Calibrations Now

Complete

847503-E 2017-04-21
 8-6-1

8.6 VERIFYING CALIBRATION

After completing calibration,turn power OFF, remove Software Service Key,
then turn power back ON. The console and the powerhead will display the Main
Screen.
The two tables listed in this section contain injection shots that must be
performed in order to verify calibration. Table 1 contains parameters to perform
for each syringe size.
NOTE: All of these injection shots will be pressure limited shots.
Verify that the pressure limit is within the specified range as described, then
record the results in the table.

NOTE: Before using a syringe for calibration or verification, inspect the syringe
and plunger to ensure the plunger can be moved in the syringe without undo
sticking. If required, lubricate the syringe plunger with a small amount of silicon
grease such as DOW CORNING® 111 VALVE LUBRICANT or Boss® 411 Silicone
General Purpose Compound.

8—CALIBRATION

847503-E 2017-04-21
 8-6-2

8.6.1 VERIFYING CALIBRATION

Program 7.6 mL/s flow rate @275 peak psi. Enable and perform programmed
injection. During the injection close the flow control valve until the injector first
reports that it is pressure limiting. The injection should pressure limit at
250 psi within +/- 50 psi.

Injection Gauge Reading @ Pressure Limiting

Shot 200ml 125ml

7.6ml/s @
275 PSI

Table 1 Testing
Pressure Limiting Example for Testing
Achieved Pressure: 250 psi ± 50 psi. NOTE: for a peak pressure entry of 275 psi,
the software will target a steady state of 250 psi ± 50 psi.
300 psi Operator Selected
Designed Peak PSI
8—CALIBRATION

Pressure
250 psi
Limiting Nominal
Range
200 psi Low Limit
Tolerance

Pressure
(psi)

0 Time

Figure 8-6-1 Pressure Limiting Graph

847503-E 2017-04-21
 8-7-1

8.7 OTHER ADJUSTMENTS

NOTE: The following items do not have to be performed as part of a regular
calibration process.
8.7.1 POWERHEAD WEAR IN/BURN IN
For factory use only

MAY 02 2007 20:57 Injector Set Up

Console: DV00.00.34 PowerHead: D03.00.34 OEM Interface: [Link]

Touch Screen Calibration Complete

8—CALIBRATION
Figure 8-7-1 Injector Set Up Screen

847503-E 2017-04-21
 8-7-2
8—CALIBRATION

This page intentionally left blank.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 9-1-1

9 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD
AND UPGRADE
9.1 OVERVIEW
The OptiOne Single-Head CT Contrast Delivery System software resides
in FLASH memory that can be reprogrammed without chip removal and
replacement. This configuration uses a personal computer to download the
code to memory via the RS232 serial port J2 located at the rear of the Power
Supply.
Power Supply Model 847300 (Rear View)

J6 TM

O I
RS232/
RS422 CAN

J3
100-120V~/
230V~
50-60HZ
4 AMP
J2

J5 P4 J10B J10A J1

J2, RS232 Serial

Connection

Figure 9-1-1 RS232 Serial Port Location

AND UPGRADE

9—SOFTWARE
Equipment needed:

DOWNLOAD
• PC with Windows 2000, or Windows XP SP3, Windows 7 SP1 and Windows 8.
• Service Key/Software Download Cable P/N 844382.
• Software CD containing:
Injector Software (Powerhead and Console)
OEM Interface Software
Software Download program for PC.
Note: Main injector software is composed of the following:
OptiOne Single-Head CT Powerhead Software (OptiOne_Powerhead.S19)
OptiOne Single-Head Console Software (OptiOne_Console.S19)
An executable Loader Program (Loader [Link])
A read-me file containing software revision history

Note: OptiOne Single-Head OEM Interface Software is composed of the following:

OptiOne Single-Head OEM Interface software (OptiOne_OEM Interface.S19)

847503-E 2017-04-21
 9-1-2

9.1.1 SOFTWARE TRANSFER FROM CDTWARE TRANSFER FROM CD

1. Insert software CD into your laptop CD drive.
2. If the CD does not open up automatically, use My Computer to open and view the
contents of the CD.
There should be two files, OptiOne Loader Utility [Link], [Link] and 2
folders, DotNetFX40 and Windowsinstaller4_5, on the CD.
3. Run the setup file by double-clicking on the file name or icon.
4. The Loader Utility installer will now verify if the “Net Framework 4.0” and “Windows
installer 4.5” or later versions have been previously installed on the PC.
• If required versions of the .NET Framework and Windows installer have
not been previously installed, the Loader Utility installer will install .NET
Framework 4.0 and Windows installer 4.5.
• If the required versions of the .NET Framework and Windows installer
have already been installed on the computer, the OptiOne Single-Head
Loader Utility installer wizard in step 5 will be displayed.

NOTE: After installation of .NET Framework 4.0 and/or Windows installer 4.5
you may be prompted to reboot the PC. The PC will reboot to the
OptiOne Single-Head Loader Utility installer wizard in Step 5.

5. Click ‘Next’ to install the OptiOne Single-Head Loader Utility.

AND UPGRADE
9—SOFTWARE
DOWNLOAD

847503-E 2017-04-21
 9-1-3

6. Click ‘Next’ to accept to default installation location or click ‘Browse’ to specify a

different location. You may also type a different location in the Folder edit box.

7. Click ‘Next’ to confirm the installation location.

AND UPGRADE

9—SOFTWARE
DOWNLOAD

847503-E 2017-04-21
 9-1-4

8. The OptiOne Single-Head Loader Utility is being installed.

9. Click ‘Close’ to complete the installation and exit the installer.

AND UPGRADE
9—SOFTWARE
DOWNLOAD

847503-E 2017-04-21
 9-1-5

9.1.2 UNINTALL THE OPTIONE SINGLE-HEAD LOADER UTILITY

The OptiOne Single-Head Loader Utility may be uninstalled as follows:
1. On Windows 7, select the uninstall utility provided with loader by clicking on Start-
>All Programs->OptiOne Single-Head Injector->VXXX->Uninstall OptiOne Single-
Head Loader Utility
Where VXXX is the version of the OptiOne Single-Head Software (e.g. V01.03)
2. On Windows 7 and 8, you may also click ‘Uninstall a program’ in the Control Panel
and double-click the “OptiOne Single-Head Loader Utility’ program as in the
windows below.

AND UPGRADE

9—SOFTWARE
DOWNLOAD

847503-E 2017-04-21
 9-1-6

3. On Windows XP, select the uninstall utility provided with loader by clicking on
Start->Programs->OptiOne Single-Head Injector->VXXX->Uninstall OptiOne
Single-Head Loader Utility
Where VXXX is the version of the OptiOne Single-Head Software (e.g. V05.03)
AND UPGRADE
9—SOFTWARE
DOWNLOAD

4. You may also click ‘Add or Remove Programs’ in the Control Panel and double-
click the “OptiOne Single-Head Loader Utility’ program as in the windows below.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 9-1-7

5. On Windows 8, you may also right-click the’ OptiOne Single-Head Loader Utility’
application on the ‘Start’ screen to select it and select ‘Uninstall’ from the popup
menu at the bottom of the screen as shown below.

AND UPGRADE

9—SOFTWARE
DOWNLOAD

847503-E 2017-04-21
 9-1-8

9.1.3 DOWNLOAD AND UPGRADE PROCEDURES

Note: Read through all download procedures first before performing upgrade

CAUTION!

Close all windows applications/programs before performing the soft-

ware download procedures below.

1. With the injector OFF (Power Supply OFF), connect one end of the Software Down-
load Cable to the serial port, COM1 on the PC.
NOTE: A USB to serial port adapter cable may be used.

2. Connect note: the other end of the Software Download Cable to J2 on the back of
the Power Supply.
3. Turn injector Power Supply ON. Do not turn ON injector at Console until directed.
4. Boot the PC, if not already on.
5. To launch the OptiOne Single-Head Loader Utility, perform one of the following
actions:
• On Windows XP, 7 and 8, double-click the ‘OptiOne Single-Head
LoaderUtility-VXXX’ shortcut (the OptiOne Single-Head powerhead icon)
AND UPGRADE
9—SOFTWARE
DOWNLOAD

on the PC desktop.
• On Windows XP, click “Start->Programs->OptiOne Single-Head Injector-
>OptiOne Single-Head Loader Utility”
• On Windows 7, click “Start->All Programs->OptiOne Single-Head
Injector->OptiOne Single-Head Loader Utility”
• On Windows 8, you may also click or touch, if the laptop is equipped
with a touch screen, the OptiOne Single-Head Loader Utility” application
on the Start screen.
NOTE: VXXX is the OptiOne software version.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 9-1-9

6. The main Software Download screen will appear. Select the ‘SELECT COMM PORT
AND TARGET DEVICE’, gray button to select a serial communication port and tar-
get device to program.

7. If your serial communication port is not set to ‘COM1’, or if you are using a USB to
RS232 adapter, select a serial communication port from the drop-down list. Click
on one of the subsystem picture, (Powerhead, Console, or OIM), to select a target
to program. For this example, click the powerhead picture.

AND UPGRADE

9—SOFTWARE
DOWNLOAD

847503-E 2017-04-21
9-1-10

8. Ensure that the desired Target Device and Target Device S19 software come up on
the screen. Click on the ‘Get SRECORD’ button to browse and select a different S19
file. Click on the green ‘GO’ button and turn ON the injector at the console.

9. After the injector has been turned ON in step 8, the “software download in prog-
ress” message will be displayed on the OptiOne Single-Head console. In addition,
the software loading status bar will be displayed on your laptop screen with the
message “Downloading!” above it.
AND UPGRADE
9—SOFTWARE
DOWNLOAD

Note: If the injector is powered up close to the 30 second time out, the
software loading status bar may not update until download is complete.
While download is in progress, the ‘SELECT COMM PORT AND TARGET
DEVICE’, ‘GO’, and the ‘Get SRECORD’ buttons will not be available – They will
be either hidden or disabled to prevent unintended use errors.

Note: Once the download has started the serial cable must not be
disconnected. If connection is lost with three or more green bars on the
progress bar the download procedure may be re-started from the beginning.
If connection is lost with less than three green bars the PC board that was the
target may be unusable.

847503-E 2017-04-21
9-1-11

9—SOFTWARE
DOWNLOAD
AND UPGRADE

847503-E 2017-04-21
9-1-12

10. After the download has been completed, the message “Download: Successful”
will be displayed on your PC screen. The injector will automatically reset and come
up in Service Calibration Mode when downloading to the powerhead. Ignore any
Alarms that may come up.
Also, the ‘SELECT COMM PORT AND TARGET DEVICE’ gray button will
reappear and the ‘Get SRECORD’ button will remain deactivated until a target
is selected.
11. Turn injector power OFF at the console switch
AND UPGRADE
9—SOFTWARE
DOWNLOAD

13. Turn the injector back ON at the console.

14. View the OptiOne Single-Head console or powerhead screen at power up and
check that the correct software was downloaded into the selected target device.
Note: If upgrading to a higher version of software, an alarm 2023, 2024,
2007, 2025, or 3005 may appear until software has been download-
ed to all target devices.

15. Turn power OFF at the console switch.

16. If downloading to another target device, proceed to step 17. If not, remove ser-
vice key and close the loader utility on the PC.
17. Repeat steps 6 thru 16 to download software to additional target devices.

847503-E 2017-04-21
 9-1-13

9.1.4 LOADER PROGRAM TROUBLESHOOTING

Message Meaning Action

Error! Begin Communication with the target Cancel loader program, turn off
device could not be established. injector at power supply, verify all
injector and software download cable
connections and retry.

Error, No target The target device that was to be Ensure that target PCB is connected
device found downloaded was not found. properly and retry.
(Example: OEM Interface PCB
not installed)

Resend Error During Download, data was Cancel loader program, turn off
found to be corrupt 3 times injector at power supply, verify all
in row. injector and software download cable
connections and retry.

Error! Time-out Communication with the target Cancel loader program, turn off
device has been lost for more injector at power supply, verify all
than 5 seconds. injector and software download cable
connections and retry.

A window error Appropriate software S19 file Ensure that the software folder that is
message appears was not found in the software being used has all the appropriate S19
after a target folder that is being used. files. (One for the Powerhead, Console,
device is selected and OEM Interface).

AND UPGRADE

9—SOFTWARE
DOWNLOAD

847503-E 2017-04-21
9-1-14

This page intentionally left blank.

AND UPGRADE
9—SOFTWARE
DOWNLOAD

847503-E 2017-04-21
 10-1-1

10 SCHEMATICS

10.1 OVERVIEW
Schematics presented in this chapter are divided into the following sections:
• Section 10-2 Power Supply
• Section 10-3 Console
• Section 10-4 Powerhead
• Section 10-5 Hand Button
• Section 10-6 Cabling
• Section 10-7 Accessories

NOTE: For OEM Interface Board Schematic information refer to Appendix B

10—SCHEMATICS

847503-E 2017-04-21
10-1-2

This page intentionally left blank.

10—SCHEMATICS

847503-E 2017-04-21
 10-2-1

10— SCHEMATICS
POWER SUPPLY
POWER SUPPLY SCHEMATIC 844460-2 REV D (1 OF 2)

847503-E 2017-04-21
 10-2-2
10— SCHEMATICS
POWER SUPPLY

POWER SUPPLY SCHEMATIC 844460-2 REV D (2 OF 2)

847503-E 2017-04-21
 10-3-1

10—SCHEMATICS
CONSOLE
CONSOLE SCHEMATIC 802101-2 REV G (1 OF 5)
847503-E 2017-04-21
10-3-2
10— SCHEMATICS
CONSOLE

CONSOLE SCHEMATIC 802101-2 REV F (2 OF 5)

847503-E 2017-04-21
 10-3-3

10—SCHEMATICS
CONSOLE
CONSOLE SCHEMATIC 802101-2 REV G (3 OF 5)
847503-E 2017-04-21
10-3-4
10— SCHEMATICS
CONSOLE

CONSOLE SCHEMATIC 802101-2 REV F (4 OF 5)

847503-E 2017-04-21
 10-3-5

10—SCHEMATICS
CONSOLE
CONSOLE SCHEMATIC 802101-2 REV F (5 OF 5)
847503-E 2017-04-21
10-3-6

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF MALLINCKRODT, CINCINNATI, OHIO, AND IS SUBJECT TO BEING RETURNED UPON REQUEST. IT SHALL NOT PAGE REVISIO N HISTO RY
BE REPRODUCED IN WHOLE OR PART WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF MALLINCKRODT. ANY AUTHORIZED REPRODUCTION MUST BEAR THIS ENTIRE LEGEND
LTR REVISION DESCRIPTION ECO DATE BY

Console #1
+24V
F1 L1 L2
Pins 16 and 17 are 17
2 1
34
BEAD BEAD
Mounting Holes

1
16 C17 SMD100 33
A CGND A
1200 pF C7

1
2
15 C8

1
C1 C2 + 32

R10

27K
14 .1uf

2
CGND 220uF
.1uf .1uf

2
13 50 V 31

1
12
Console Attached -- DGND
Console 11
30

1
15 Pin DShell 10
C19 C18 29
Pins ON /OFF_ SW 1200 pF 1200 pF

2
9
28
8
I2C _DISABL E R2 CGND
1 2
Second console connected 7 27
D4

1
10

1
6 C9 R8 1 MMBZ5V6ALT1 GP1
26
C AN _L
5
10pF 240

2
3
C AN _H C AN _H GP2

2
4 25
2
C
AU X_ STAR T
3
R3 24
C ON SOL E_ ID C AN _L 1 2
2
C23 C11 10pF
1
2 1 10 1 2
23

J10 DIAG1
1200 pF ON /OFF_ SW D3
1 3
22
C24
DIAG0

1
2 1
R4 C20 BAS19 21

1
1200 pF AU X_ STAR T 1 2 C3
1200 pF C _ID

2
Was C\T\S\1\
C25 .1uf 20

2
2 1 10
CGND R TS1
19
1200 pF
CGND R1
C ON SOL E_ ID 1 2
18

100
1
C21 17

1
B C22 1200 pF R XD 1 B
16
2

2
D5

2
1200 pF TXD 1 15
AZ23C3V9
CGND
C TS0
14

C
3
R6
2

STAR T
1

B 1 2
C26 R7 Was R\T\S\0\ 13

100 Q4 4.7K
1200 pF R XD 0
2

12
MMBT3904LT1

E
1

CGND TXD 0
11

C AN H
10

C AN L
9

R XD R 3
8

TXD R 3
7

X3 EN
6

SYSPU P
5

A_ STAR T +5V
4

1
C10 +

2
2
10— SCHEMATICS

1 uF, 16 V

4.7K

4.7K

4.7K

4.7K
R11

R21

R23

R25

2
1

1
J3
+5V

2
U1
CONSOLE

C C

4.7K
R16

4.7K

4.7K

4.7K

4.7K
R20

R22

R24

R26
9 1
C1+ Vcc

1
1

C4 C6
.1uf .1uf
2

2 10
C1- GND
2 1 8
V-

.1uf C5 INVALID
3

7 4

6 5

RS TTL/
232 CMO S

MAX3313

L7 +5V +5V
8
BEAD L6
Flt_ DIAG0
7 U6

C
5
BEAD 1 R5 Q3
N.C . L3 4 1 2 B
6
+5V 2 T08 MMBT3904LT1
BEAD 4.7K
2
R9 1
5

E
3

390
U2
5

4
2
R12 1 1
HAND SWITCH 4
SW _PR ESEN T 390 2 GT02
3 L5
D 2
R13 1 D
3

2 BEAD 390
L4
N.O. 2
R14 1
1
BEAD 390
J2
1

C15 C12 C13 C14 C16

1

.1uf .1uf .1uf .1uf .1uf

2

D1 D2
AZ23C3V9 AZ23C3V9
Schematic,
Title:
3

MAL L I NCK R OD T OPTIVANTAGE CONSOLE NTER.

I
PRODUCT: OPTIVANTAGE Size: D
2111 EAST GALBRAITH ROAD
DRAWN: MAC 01/20/03 Sheet 2 of 2
CINCINNATI, OH 45237, USA
CHECKED: SGR 06/29/04 DRAWING NO. Rev
APPROVED: CSN 06/29/04 844102-2 C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CONSOLE INTERFACE SCHEMATIC 844102-2 REV C (2 OF 2)

847503-E 2017-04-21
 10-4-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF MALLINCKRODT, CINCINNATI, OHIO, AND IS SUBJECT TO BEING RETURNED UPON REQUEST. IT SHALL NOT PAGE REVISION HISTORY
BE REPRODUCED IN WHOLE OR PART WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF MALLINCKRODT. ANY AUTHORIZED REPRODUCTION MUST BEAR THIS ENTIRE LEGEND
+5VANA
C2 C3 +5V
0.1 uF 0.1 uF LTR REVISION DESCRIPTION ECO DATE BY
PWR
16 V 16 V L5
i 10 % 10 %
+3.3V R1 BLM18PG471SN1D
10 C1

1
+ 1 uF
L23 16 V D[0..31]
BLM18PG471SN1D C6 D[0..31] 3,4,8

1
C5 C4

2
Note 4 +3.3V
+ 0.1 uF A[0..21]
10 uF 16 V 100 pF A[0..21] 3,4,8
10 % 10 % 5% i

D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20
D21
D22
D23
D24
D25
D26
D27
D28
D29
D30
D31
2
16 V AGND

D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
PWR
AGND
AGND
U1

N11

M4

M3

M2

M1
N8

N5

N3

N2

N1

H4

H3

H2

H1

G4

G3

G2

G1
T5

R5

T1

R6

T6

K3

K2

K1
P8

P4

P2

P5

P6

P1

F3
L4

L3

L2

L1

J4

J3

J2

J1
MCF5282
SERVICE/RFID_XMIT

VSTBY

VDDPLL

VSSPLL

VRH

VRL

VDDH

D0/PD0

D1/PD1

D2/PD2

D3/PD3

D4/PD4

D5/PD5

D6/PD6

D7/PD7

D8/PC0

D9/PC1

D10/PC2

D11/PC3

D12/PC4

D13/PC5

D14/PC6

D15/PC7

D16/PB0

D17/PB1

D18/PB2

D19/PB3

D20/PB4

D21/PB5

D22/PB6

D23/PB7

D24/PA0

D25/PA1

D26/PA2

D27/PA3

D28/PA4

D29/PA5

D30/PA6

D31/PA7
VDDA

VSSA

VSSA
A 4 SERVICE/RFID_XMIT
T7
UTXD0/PUA0
A

4 SERVICE/RFID_RECV
SERVICE/RFID_RECV N6
URXD0/PUA1
XMIT_TO_A_SIDE_SERVO TP1
4,8 XMIT_TO_A_SIDE_SERVO
P7
UTXD1/PUA2

4,8 RECV_FROM_A_SIDE_SERVO
RECV_FROM_A_SIDE_SERVO TP2 R7
URXD1/PUA3 A0/PH0
F2 A0

A1/PH1
F1 A1
TP3
6,7,8 SCL
SCL
TP4
E15
SCL/PAS0/UTXD2 Coldfire CPU A2/PH2
E4 A2
6,7,8 SDA E14 E3 A3
SDA SDA/PAS1/URXD2 A3/PH3
TXCAN TP5 A4
6,8 TXCAN
E13
CANTX/PAS2/UTXD2 A4/PH4
E2

RXCAN TP6 A5
6,8 RXCAN
D16
CANRX/PAS3/URXD2 A5/PH5
E1

B10
EMDC/PAS4/UTXD2
+3.3V
A6/PH6
D4 A6
A6
VPP A7
C10 D3
EMDIO/PAS5/URXD2 A7/PH7
C11
VPP C7 A8/PG0
D2 A8
TP7 0.1 uF
4 SA_AXIS_IN
SA_AXIS_IN K13
DTOUT2/PTC0/UCTS1/0 VDDF
C5 16 V 10 % A9/PG1
D1 A9

4 MOTOR_A_HALL_RETRACT_COUNT
MOTOR_A_HALL_RETRACT_COUNT TP8 K14
DTIN2/PTC1/UCTS1/0 VDDF
D5
A10/PG2
C3 A10
K15
DTOUT3/PTC2/URTS1/0 VDDF
D11 C8 A11/PG3
C2 A11
0.1 uF
K16
DTIN3/PTC3/URTS1/0 VDDF
A12 16 V 10 % A12/PG4
C1 A12

TP9 A13/PG5
B2 A13
4 SA_AXIS_OUT
SA_AXIS_OUT J13
DTOUT0/PTD0/UCTS1/0 VDD
F5
B1 A14
J14
DTIN0/PTD1/UCTS1/0 VDD
G5 C9 A14/PG6
0.1 uF A15/PG7
A2 A15
TP10 J15
DTOUT1/PTD2/URTS1/0 VDD
H5 16 V 10 %
A16/PF0
A3 A16 +3.3V
J16 J5
DTIN1/PTD3/URTS1/0 VDD A17
B5 B3
VDD
K5 C10 VSSF A17/PF1
0.1 uF A18
FACEPLATE_A_HEATER_PWM TP11
B12 A4
16 V 10 % VSSF A18/PF2
7 N13 L5

8
FACEPLATE_A_HEATER_PWM GPTA0/PTA0 VDD
B4 A19
P13
GPTA1/PTA1 VDD
E6 A1
VSS
A19/PF3
CS RN1D RN1C RN1B RN1A R2 R3
TP12 C4 A20 i 1K 1K 1K 1K 1K 1K
4 SPARE_PLD_I/O_3
SPARE_PLD_I/O_3 R13
GPTA2/PTA2 VDD
G6 C11 E5
VSS
A20/PF4
0.1 uF A21
MOTOR_A_HALL_EXPEL_COUNT TP13
A5
FLASH

1
16 V 10 % A21/PF5/CS4
4 MOTOR_A_HALL_EXPEL_COUNT
T13
GPTA3/PTA3 VDD
H6 M5
VSS CS5 Off Board Instrumentation
B
A22/PF6/CS5
B6
CS5 8 B

TEST_MOTOR_A_CURRENT TP14 VDD

J6 F6
VSS CS6 SRAM
4 TEST_MOTOR_A_CURRENT
N12
GPTB0/PTB0
K6 C12 L6
A23/PF7/CS6
C6
CS6 8
P12
GPTB1/PTB1
VDD 0.1 uF VSS U2
TP15 M6 16 V 10 % G7 S29AL016J +3.3V
6 BEEPER
BEEPER R12
GPTB2/PTB2
VDD VSS
CS0/PJ0
L13 CS0 Data Flash CS0 8
E7 H7 A1 25 37
T12
VDD VSS
L14 CS1 PLD Select 4,8
A0 Vcc
GPTB3/PTB3 C15 CS1/PJ1 CS1 A2 C14 C13

1
F7 J7 24
VDD
0.1 uF VSS
CS2/PJ2
L15 CS2 Off Board SRAM CS2 8
A1
0.1 uF +
10 uF
TP16 L7 16 V 10 % K7 A3 23 16 V 10 %

A
MA0 VDD VSS CS3 LCD DS9 DS10 DS11 DS12 DS13 DS14 A2 10 % 16 V

2
5 MA0
R4
AN52/PQA0/MA0 CS3/PJ3
L16
CS3 3,8 A4 NC
10

MA1 TP17 VDD

M7 G8
VSS
22
A3 NC
13
5 T4
C16
14

C
MA1 AN53/PQA1/MA1 A5 NC
TP18
FACEPLATE_A_HEATER_CHECK P3
VDD
E8
0.1 uF
H8
VSS
M14
TP19 DS9
21
A4
7 FACEPLATE_A_HEATER_CHECK AN55/PQA3/ETRIG1 16 V 10 % TIP/PE0/SYNCB A6
R3
VDD
F8 J8
VSS
M15
TP20 DS10
20
A5
27
AN56/PQA4/ETRIG2 TS/PE1/SYNCA A7 Vss
VDD
L8 K8
VSS
M16
TP21 DS11
19
A6
46
5 AN0
AN0 T3
AN0/PQB0/ANW VDD
M8 C17 G9
VSS
SIZ0/PE2/SYNCB
TP22 A8 18
A7
Vss
0.1 uF N14 DS12
AN1 16 V 10 % SIZ1/PE3/SYNCA A9
5 AN1
R2
AN1/PQB1/ANX VDD
E9 H9
VSS R45 10 R/W
8
A8
AN2 R/W/PE4
N15
R/W 3,4,8 A10 D16
TP86 T2
AN2/PQB2/ANY VDD
F9 J9
VSS
P15
TP23 DS13
7
A9 DQ0
29

AN3 R1 L9 C18 K9
TEA/PE5 A11 6 31 D17
TP87 AN3/PQB3/ANZ VDD 0.1 uF VSS
TA/PE6
P16 TA TA 3,8
A10 DQ1

VDD
M9 16 V 10 % G10
VSS
A12 5
A11 DQ2
33 D18
TP24 OE/PE7
N16 OE OE 3,8
6,8 MISO
MISO E16
QSPI_DIN/PQS0 VDD
E10 H10
VSS
A13 4
A12 DQ3
35 D19
MOSI TP25 C19 A14 D20
U3
+3.3V 6,8 MOSI
F13
QSPI_DOUT/PQS1 VDD
F10
0.1 uF
J10
VSS TP26 DS14
3
A13 DQ4
38
+3.3V
M95256-W SPICLK TP27 16 V 10 % SCKE/PSD0
H14
A15 D21
6,8 SPICLK
F14
QSPI_CLK/PQS2 VDD
L10 K10
VSS TP28 POWER_OFF_OUTPUT
2
A14 DQ5
40

SPI_CS0 TP29 RAS0/PSD1

G16
POWER_OFF_OUTPUT 6 A16 D22
7
HOLD WP
3 6,8 SPI_CS0
F15
QSPI_CS0/PQS3 VDD
M10 F11
VSS TP30 START_OUTPUT
1
A15 DQ6
42

SPI_CS1 TP31 C21 RAS1/PSD2

H13
START_OUTPUT 6 A17 D23
8
VCC CS
1 F16
QSPI_CS1/PQS4 VDD
E11
0.1 uF
L11
VSS
G15
TP32 SPARE_OUT_TO_OPTISTAT
48
A16 DQ7
44

6 SPICLK TP33 G13 G11 16 V 10 % E12

DRAMW/PSD3
TP34 A18 17 30 D24
C20 SCLK QSPI_CS2/PQS5 VDD VSS
SCAS/PSD4
H16 LCD_ON/OFF LCD_ON/OFF 7
A17 DQ8
0.1 uF SO
2 MISO TP35 G14
QSPI_CS3/PQS6 VDD
H11 M12
VSS TP36 A19 16
A18 DQ9
32 D25
16 V LCD_LANDMARK/KYOCERA

10— SCHEMATICS
10 % MOSI
+3.3V
C22 SRAS/PSD5
H15
LCD_LANDMARK/KYOCERA 7 A20 D26
4 5 97R08SRT J11 A16 9 34
GND SI R4 10 K VDD 0.1 uF VSS A19 DQ10
SW1A 16 1 SW1A B8 K11 16 V 10 % T16 15 36 D27
R5 ERXER/PEL0 VDD VSS
BS0 RY/BY DQ11

POWERHEAD
10 K R16 8
SW1B 15 2 SW1B C9 M11
BS0/PJ4/CAS0 BS0 RESET 12 39 D28
C R6 10 K
ERXD1/PEL1 VDD
R15 BS1 8
RESET DQ12
C
SW1C 14 3 SW1C B9 F12 C23 BS1/PJ5/CAS1 BS1
CS0 26 41 D29
R7 10 K
ERXD2/PEL2 VDD 0.1 uF T15 BS2 3,8
CE DQ13
SW1D 13 4 SW1D A9 G12 16 V 10 % BS2/PJ6/CAS2 BS2 R/W 11 43 D30
R8 10 K
ERXD3/PEL3 VDD
P14 BS3 3,8
WE DQ14
SW1E 12 5 SW1E D10 H12
BS3/PJ7/CAS3 BS3
+3.3V OE 28 45 D31
R9 10 K
ETXER/PEL4 VDD OE DQ15/A-1
SW1F 11 6 SW1F C7 J12 C24 BS i
47
R10 10 K ETXD1/PEL5 VDD 10 uF BYTE
SW1G 10 7 SW1G B7 K12 16 V
R11 10 K
ETXD2/PEL6 VDD 10 %
SW1H 9 8 SW1H A7
ETXD3/PEL7 VDD
L12 1 2

U4
+

+3.3V
TP37 A11
ECRS/PEH0
74LCX245
7 FACEPLATE_A_HEATER_ENABLE
FACEPLATE_A_HEATER_ENABLE TP38 VCC
20
TP39 D9
ERXD0/PEH1 IRQ1/PNQ1
D15 TOUCH_IRQ1 TOUCH_IRQ1 6 1
DIR
7 FACEPLATE_A_HEATER_SELECT TP40
FACEPLATE_A_HEATER_SELECT
C8
ERXDV/PEH2 IRQ2/PNQ2
D14 PMD_IRQ2 PMD_IRQ2 4 C25
TP41 0.1 uF
A10
ERXCLK/PEH3 IRQ3/PNQ3
C16 IRQ3 RESET 19
OUTENA
TILT_SELF_TEST TP42 B11 C15
TP43 PLD_IRQ4 10
6 TILT_SELF_TEST ECOL/PEH4 IRQ4/PNQ4 PLD_IRQ4 4 GND
SPARE_PLD_I/O_1 TP44 TP45 USB_IRQ
4 SPARE_PLD_I/O_1
D7
ETXD0/PEH5 IRQ5/PNQ5
C14
USB_IRQ 3 D21
TP46 TP47
DDATA0/PDD4

DDATA1/PDD5

DDATA2/PDD6

DDATA3/PDD7

2 18
SPI_A/D_DATA_VALID START_INPUT A0 B0
DSCLK/TRST

D6 B16 6
PST0/PDD0

PST1/PDD1

PST2/PDD2

PST3/PDD3

6 SPI_A/D_DATA_VALID ETXEN/PEH6 IRQ6/PNQ6 START_INPUT

BKPT/TMS

D19

CLKMOD0

CLKMOD1
TP48 TP49
DSO/TDO
JTAG_EN

3 17
DSI/TDI

CLKOUT

SPARE_PLD_I/O_2 ON/OFF_INPUT A1 B1
4 A8 B15 6

EXTAL
RCON
RSTO
TCLK

TEST
SPARE_PLD_I/O_2 ETXCLK/PEH7 IRQ7/PNQ7 ON/OFF_INPUT

XTAL
D26
RSTI
NC1

4 16
NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

A2 B2
D18 5
A3 B3
15
R9

P9

T9

P10

R10

T10

A15

B14

A14

C13

B13

A13

D12

C12

N7

F4

K4

N4

D8

N9

D13

M13

R11

P11

N10

R14

T14

T11

R8

T8
D25 6 14
R12 2.2 K A4 B4
D17 7 13 +3.3V
R13 2.2 K R14 1M A5 B5
+3.3V D24 8 12
RN2 A6 B6
1K D16 9
A7 B7
11
1 8
+3.3V RN3
4.7K 2 7 1 3 Y1
1 8 R46
10 3 6 ECCM1-20-8.000M Parameter Bits Setting
2 7 2 4
4 5
3 6 Chip Mode D[26,17,16]=[1,1,1] Master
C26 C27
D 4 5 i CLK 10 pF 10 pF S1 +3.3V Boot Device D[19:18]= [0,0] Internal, 32 bits D
10 % 10 % +3.3V PTS635SK25SMTR LFS
Output Drive D[21]=[0] Partial Strength
TP52 TP50 R15 R16
390 100 Port F D[25:24]=[0,1] PF[7:5]=CS6/CS5/A21

A
8 JTAG_EN
JTAG_EN DS2 2 1

DSCLK/TRST PSTCLK SML-LX0603SRW-TR

8 3,8 U5

C
DSCLK/TRST PSTCLK
RESET RESET 3,4,8
8 TCLK DDATA3 8 ADM809
TCLK DDATA3 TP51 3
8 BKPT/TMS DDATA2 8 8 R18 VCC
BKPT/TMS DDATA2 3.3V_RESET 1K C28
8 DSI/TDI
DSI/TDI DDATA1 DDATA1 8 0.1 uF
16 V
Schematic,
Title:

8 DSO/TDO DDATA0 8 3.3V_RESET 2 10 % MALLINCKRODT OPTIONE LOGIC BOARD

DSO/TDO DDATA0 RESET
1 PRODUCT: OPTIONE Size: D
ADDITIONAL NOTE: 8 PST0 PST3 8
i DDATA GND
2111 EAST GALBRAITH ROAD
PST0 PST3 DRAWN: J NGUYEN Sheet 2 of 8
4. PLACE L23 CLOSE TO U1. PST1 PST2 CINCINNATI, OH 45237, USA
8 PST1 PST2 8 CHECKED: SEE AGILE DRAWING NO. Rev
APPROVED: SEE AGILE 847170-2 B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

POWERHEAD LOGIC BOARD SCHEMATIC 847170-2 (1 OF 7)

847503-E 2017-04-21
10-4-2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF MALLINCKRODT, CINCINNATI, OHIO, AND IS SUBJECT TO BEING RETURNED UPON REQUEST. IT SHALL NOT PAGE REVISION HISTORY
BE REPRODUCED IN WHOLE OR PART WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF MALLINCKRODT. ANY AUTHORIZED REPRODUCTION MUST BEAR THIS ENTIRE LEGEND
LTR REVISION DESCRIPTION ECO DATE BY

+3.3V

47 LCD_G5
47 LCD_G4
47 LCD_G3

47 LCD_G2
47 LCD_G1
47 LCD_G0
47 LCD_R5
47 LCD_R4
47 LCD_R3

47 LCD_R2
47 LCD_R1
47 LCD_R0
47 LCD_B5
47 LCD_B4
47 LCD_B3

47 LCD_B2
47 LCD_B1
47 LCD_B0
A A
C32 C33 C34 C35 C36 C37 C31

1
0.1 uF 0.1 uF 0.1 uF 0.1 uF 0.1 uF 0.1 uF + 10 uF

8
16 V 16 V 16 V 16 V 16 V 16 V 10 %
10 % 10 % 10 % 10 % 10 % 10 % 16 V

RN5D 4
RN8B 2
RN5C 3
RN5A 1
RN5B 2
RN8A 1
RN6C 3
RN6A 1
RN6D 4
RN6B 2
RN4D 4
RN4C 3
RN7D 4
RN7C 3
RN4B 2
RN4A 1
RN7B 2
RN7A 1
+2.5V

+3.3V
C61 C63 C38 C39
0.1 uF 0.1 uF 0.1 uF 0.1 uF L1
16 V 16 V 16 V 16 V 1uH
10 % 10 % 10 % 10 %

H11

G10

G11

D11

D10

C10
B10

K10

A10

E11

E10
L10

F11

F10
J10

H6

D8

D9
G5

G4

G8

G9

G7
A2

C2

B2

K2

E8

E9
F2

F9

L2

L9

F8

F7
C29

1
10 uF + C30

FPDAT0

FPDAT1

FPDAT2

FPDAT3

FPDAT4

FPDAT5

FPDAT6

FPDAT7

FPDAT8

FPDAT9

FPDAT10

FPDAT11

FPDAT12

FPDAT13

FPDAT14

FPDAT15

FPDAT16

FPDAT17
COREVDD

COREVDD

COREVDD

COREVDD

IOVDD

IOVDD

IOVDD

IOVDD

IOVDD

IOVDD
VSS

VSS

VSS

VSS

VSS

VSS

VSS
16 V 0.1 uF
A[0..21] 10 %

2
2,4,8 A[0..21] NC
A1

A0 D1
AB0 NC
A8 LCD
A1 D2
AB1 NC
A11

A2 D3 L1
J2
AB2 NC FH12-33S-0.5SV
A3 C3 L11
TP53 28
AB3 NC
A4 A3
AB4
29

A5 B3
AB5 FPSHIFT
H10 RN8C 3 6 47 LCD_CLK 2

A6 C4
AB6 FPFRAME
J9 RN9A 1 8 47 VSYNC 4

A7 A4
AB7 FPLINE
H9 RN8D 4 5 47 HSYNC 3

A8 D4
AB8 DRDY
K9 RN9B 2 7 47 LCD_OE LCD_R0 6

A9 C5
AB9
LCD_R1 7

A10 B5
AB10
LCD_R2 8

B A11 A5 LCD_R3 9 B
AB11
A12 D5
AB12 LCD Controller GPO0
K1 RN9C 3 6 47 DPSH LCD_R4 10

A13 E6
AB13 GPO1
J1 RN9D 4 5 47 DPSV LCD_R5 11

A14 B6
AB14 GPO2
H5 LCD_G0 13

A15 A6
AB15 GPO3
J6 LCD_G1 14

A16 C6 F6 LCD_G2 15
AB16 U6 GPO4
A17 D6
AB17
S1D13A05 GPO5
H8 LCD_G3 16

A18 E3
M/R GPO6
K11 LCD_G4 17

GPO7
J11 LCD_G5 18
2,4,8 D[0..31]
D[0..31]
GPO8
C11 LCD_B0 20
D16 L5
DB0 LCD_B1
B11 21
D17 GPO9
K5
DB1 LCD_B2
B4 22
D18 GPO10
J5
DB2 LCD_B3 23
D19 L4
DB3
LCD_B4 24
D20 K4
DB4
GPIO0
L8 LCD_B5 25
D21 J4
DB5
GPIO1
J7 LCD_OE 27
D22 J3
DB6
GPIO2
K7 DPSH 30
D23 L3
DB7
GPIO3
L7 DPSV 31
D24 K3
DB8
H7 32
D25 GPIO4
J2
DB9
G6 1
D26 GPIO5
H3
DB10
K6 5
D27 GPIO6
H2
DB11
L6 12
D28 GPIO7
H1
DB12
19
D29
10—SCHEMATICS

H4
DB13
26
D30 G3
DB14
A9 LCONTRAST 7 33
POWERHEAD

D31 PWMOUT LCONTRAST

USBOSCO

USBOSCI
G2

TESTEN
USBCLK
DB15
RD/WR

RESET

C 34 C

CLKI2
WAIT

CNF0

CNF1

CNF2

CNF3

CNF4

CNF5

CNF6
TAB

CLKI
WE0

WE1

IRQ
RD

R52
CS

BS

35
TAB
200 K
E4

G1

F3

E1

E5

F4

F1

K8

E2

F5

B9

J8

C1

B1

E7

A7

B7

C7

D7

B8

C8

C9
36
1% TAB

2,8 CS3
CS3 37
TAB

2,8 TA
TA

4
2,8 OE
OE RN11
RN10 1K
+3.3V
C135
0.1 uF 1K

5
16 V +3.3V
10 %
5

2,8 BS2
BS2 1
4 WE0
R/W i CLK
2,4,8 R/W
2
U7
MC74VHC1GT32
3

+3.3V +3.3V
C40
0.1 uF
+3.3V 16 V
10 % U8
ASV-27.0000MHZ-EJ
5

4
Vcc
1 1
ENABLE
4 WE1
2,8 BS3
BS3 2 C41
0.1 uF
U9 16 V
MC74VHC1GT32 10 %
3

CLK_48MHZ_USB 3
OUT
2
GND
R19
10

2,4,8 RESET
RESET DNP R134
D 0 D
2 USB_IRQ
USB_IRQ
PSTCLK TP66
2,8 PSTCLK

Schematic,
Title:
MALLINCKRODT OPTIONE LOGIC BOARD
PRODUCT: OPTIONE Size: D
2111 EAST GALBRAITH ROAD DRAWN: J NGUYEN Sheet 3 of 8
CINCINNATI, OH 45237, USA CHECKED: SEE AGILE DRAWING NO. Rev
APPROVED: SEE AGILE 847170-2 B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

POWERHEAD LOGIC BOARD SCHEMATIC 847170-2 (2 OF 7)

847503-E 2017-04-21
 10-4-3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF MALLINCKRODT, CINCINNATI, OHIO, AND IS SUBJECT TO BEING RETURNED UPON REQUEST. IT SHALL NOT PAGE REVISION HISTORY
BE REPRODUCED IN WHOLE OR PART WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF MALLINCKRODT. ANY AUTHORIZED REPRODUCTION MUST BEAR THIS ENTIRE LEGEND
LTR REVISION DESCRIPTION ECO DATE BY

TP67 SERVICE_XMIT SERVICE_XMIT 6,8

+24V TP68 SERVICE_RECV SERVICE_RECV 6,8
SERVICE/RFID_XMIT SERVICE/RFID_XMIT 2
SERVICE/RFID_RECV SERVICE/RFID_RECV 2
SPARE_PLD_I/O_3 SPARE_PLD_I/O_3 2
SPARE_PLD_I/O_2 2
5 SIDE_A_GREEN R21 100 TC_GREEN_SIDE_A SPARE_PLD_I/O_2 Motor Board
SPARE_PLD_I/O_1 2 J7
4 SIDE_A_BLUE R22 100 TC_BLUE_SIDE_A SPARE_PLD_I/O_1
+24V_MOTOR
PLD_IRQ4 PLD_IRQ4 2 ERF8-030-05.0-L-DV-TR
3
A 61 A
2 SIDE_A_RED R20 100 TC_RED_SIDE_A Mounting Pins
62
1
C141 C142 MOTOR_A_HALL_EXPEL_COUNT 2
220 pF 220 pF MOTOR_A_HALL_EXPEL_COUNT
J3 MOTOR_A_HALL_RETRACT_COUNT 2 1 14
55932-0510 C143 MOTOR_A_HALL_RETRACT_COUNT
220 pF 2 13
LED Board

129

130

131

132

133

135

136

137

138

139

140

157

156

155

154

153

159

160

161

162

163

164

166

167

142

141

144

145

146
3 12

73

71

70

69

68

67

66

65

64
4 11

Q4

Q5

Q6

R1

R2

R3

R4

R5

R6

I1

I2

I3

I4

I5

H1

H2

H3

H4

H5

H6

E5

E4

E3

E2

E1

D1

D2

D3

D4

C1

C2

C3

C4

G1

G5

G2

G3

G4
76 +5V +3.3V +2.5V +12V
Q3
147 5 10
F1
77
Q2
148 6 9
F2
78
Q1
149 7 8
F3
5 MOTOR_A_EXPEL_LIMIT
MOTOR_A_EXPEL_LIMIT 7
AA4
150
MOTOR_A_RETRACT_LIMIT F4
5 MOTOR_A_RETRACT_LIMIT
8
AA3
36

SA_HOME TP69 9
F5
151
39
AA2
54
R23 0 10
AA1 U10
T3
48
EPM3512A 55
R24 0 11
Z5
T2
59 57
56
T1
12 60 58
Z4
57
ALTERA CPLD
S6 MOTOR_A_CURRENT_AB&C
13
Z3 +3.3V 5 MOTOR_A_CURRENT_AB&C
15
58
S5 TEST_MOTOR_A_CURRENT
15
Z2
59
2 TEST_MOTOR_A_CURRENT
17
S4
16
Z1
S3
60 R25 SA_PWM_A 52
17 +3.3V 10 K
Y6
61 R26 0 SA_PWM_B 54
18
Y5
C42 S2

TP70 0.1 uF S1
62 SA_PWM_C 56
SA_PWM_A 19
Y4
16 V 10 %
TP71 SA_FWD/REV 55
SA_PWM_B 20
Y3 GNDIO
6
P1
79

SA_PWM_C TP72 21 14 C43 80

TP73 MOTOR_A_PWM_A_OUT
Y2 GNDIO 0.1 uF P2
SA_FWD/REV TP74 22 32 16 V 10 % 81
TP75 MOTOR_A_PWM_B_OUT MOTOR_A_HALL_A 26
Y1 GNDIO P3
MOTOR_A_HALL_A TP76 24 40 5 86
TP77 MOTOR_A_PWM_C_OUT MOTOR_A_HALL_B 28
X5 GNDIO VCCIO P4
B
MOTOR_A_HALL_B TP78 25 50 C44 23 87
TP79 MOTOR_A_PHASE_A_ENABLE MOTOR_A_HALL_C 30
B
X4 GNDIO 0.1 uF VCCIO P5
MOTOR_A_HALL_C TP80 26 51 16 V 10 % 41 88
TP81 MOTOR_A_PHASE_B_ENABLE
X3 GNDIO VCCIO O1 MOTOR_A_QUAD_A
MOTOR_A_QUAD_A 27 72 63 89
TP82 MOTOR_A_PHASE_C_ENABLE
49
X2 GNDIO VCCIO O2 MOTOR_A_QUAD_B 51
MOTOR_A_QUAD_B 28
X1 GNDIO
84 C45 85
VCCIO O3
90 MOTOR_A_PWM_CURRENT_LIMIT MOTOR_A_PWM_CURRENT_LIMIT 5
0.1 uF TP83 MOTOR_A_INDEX 53
MOTOR_A_INDEX 29
W5 GNDIO
94 16 V 10 % 105
VCCIO O4
91 MOTOR_A_DRIVE_FAULT#
+3.3V 31
W4 GNDIO
108 107
VCCIO
SA_HOME 32

33
W3 GNDIO
116 C46 125
VCCIO O5
92 MOTOR_A_RETRACT_LIMIT 29
0.1 uF
34
W2 GNDIO
134 16 V 10 % 143
VCCIO O6
93 MOTOR_A_EXPEL_LIMIT 27
C161 C162 C163 C164 C165 C166 35 152 165 95
0.1 uF 0.1 uF 0.1 uF 0.1 uF 0.1 uF 0.1 uF W1 GNDIO VCCIO N1

10 % 10 % 10 % 10 % 10 % 10 % R27 0 36
V5 GNDIO
158 C47 191
VCCIO N2
96
0.1 uF MOTOR_A_PWM_A_OUT 16
16 V 16 V 16 V 16 V 16 V 16 V R28 0 37
V4 GNDIO
174 16 V 10 % 207
VCCIO N3
97
MOTOR_A_PWM_B_OUT 18
R29 0 38
V3 GNDIO
200
N4
98
MOTOR_A_PHASE_A_ENABLE 19
39
V2
C48 N5
99
0.1 uF MOTOR_A_PWM_C_OUT 20
42
V1
16 V 10 % N6
100
More decoupling caps for CPLD MOTOR_A_PHASE_B_ENABLE 21
43
U6 M1
101 MOTOR_A_EXPEL_SWITCH MOTOR_A_EXPEL_SWITCH 5 MOTOR_A_PHASE_C_ENABLE 23
44
U5
C49 M2
102
0.1 uF MOTOR_A_DRIVE_FAULT 24
45
U4 GNDINT
75 16 V 10 % 74
VCCINT M3
103

46 82 83 104
U3 GNDINT VCCINT M4
47 180 179 106
U2 GNDINT VCCINT M5
22
BD_SW_5 48
U1 GNDINT
185 186
VCCINT L1
109
25
BD_SW_4 49
T6 L2
110

52 111
T5 L3

10— SCHEMATICS
53 112
T4 L4
208
BB5 L5
113 2 SA_AXIS_IN
SA_AXIS_IN 33

POWERHEAD
1
BB4 L6
114 2 SA_AXIS_OUT
SA_AXIS_OUT 34
C +3.3V C
2 115 45
BB3 K1
BD_SW_3 3
BB2 K2
117 2 PMD_IRQ2
PMD_IRQ2 46 44

2,3,8 A[0..21]
A[0..21] BD_SW_2 4
BB1 K3
118 R136 CLK_20MHZ_MOTOR 43 41
2.2K
A1 198 119 RESET 42 40
DD4 K4
A2 199
DD3 K5
120 MOTOR_WATCHDOG_TEST TP123
+3.3V
A3 201
DD2 K6
121

A4 202
DD1 J1
122 2,8 XMIT_TO_A_SIDE_SERVO
XMIT_TO_A_SIDE_SERVO 38
R30 BD_SW_1 RECV_FROM_A_SIDE_SERVO
10 K 203
CC4 J2
123 2,8 RECV_FROM_A_SIDE_SERVO
37

INPUT/OE2/GCLK2
BD_SW_0 204 124
CC3 J3
+3.3V

INPUT/GCLRn

INPUT/GCLK1
SH/DH 205 126

INPUT/OE1
CC2 J4
31
TC_INVERT 206
CC1 J5
128

TDO
TMS
DD5

TCK

TDI
EE4

EE3

EE2

EE1

35
FF4

FF3

FF2

FF1

C5

B1

B2

B3

B4

A1

A2

A3

A4 +3.3V
47
187

188

190

192

193

194

195

196

197

168

169

170

171

172

173

175

177

178

181

182

183

184

30

127

176

189
+3.3V JTAG 50

+3.3V
J6
C51 5103309-1 63
0.1 uF 4
64
Mounting Pins
6

3
L2
D20
D28

D21
D29
D22
D30
D23
D31

D16
D24
D17
D25
D18
D26
D19
D27

+3.3V
BLM18PG471SN1D R31 C50 RN14DRN14C 7
10 K 0.1 uF 1K 1K
16 V 8
10 %

6
2,3,8 D[0..31]
D[0..31] JTAG_A-TDO 3

2,3,8 R/W JTAG_A-TDI 9

U12 R/W
U11 NL27WZ16 2,3,8 RESET
RESET JTAG_A-TMS-IN 5
CB3LV-3C-20M0000
4 5 2 2,8 CS1 JTAG_A-TCK-IN 1
Vcc VCC GND CS1
1
ENABLE TP84 2
C52

8
0.1 uF R32 R33 10
D 16 V 10 10 RN14A D

2
10 % CLK_20MHZ CLK_20MHZ_CPLD 1K

2
2
OUT
3 3
A2 Y2
4
D4 D3
GND i i MMBZ15VALT1G
CLK
C53 CLK
1 MMBZ15VALT1G
18 pF
1 6 5% TP85

3
A1 Y1

3
7
R34 RN14B
10 1K
CLK_20MHZ_MOTOR
i 2
C54
18 pF CLK Schematic,
Title:
5% MALLINCKRODT OPTIONE LOGIC BOARD
PRODUCT: OPTIONE Size: D
2111 EAST GALBRAITH ROAD DRAWN: J NGUYEN Sheet 4 of 8
CINCINNATI, OH 45237, USA CHECKED: SEE AGILE DRAWING NO. Rev
APPROVED: SEE AGILE 847170-2 B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

POWERHEAD LOGIC BOARD SCHEMATIC 847170-2 (3 OF 7)

847503-E 2017-04-21
10-4-4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF MALLINCKRODT, CINCINNATI, OHIO, AND IS SUBJECT TO BEING RETURNED UPON REQUEST. IT SHALL NOT PAGE REVISION HISTORY
BE REPRODUCED IN WHOLE OR PART WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF MALLINCKRODT. ANY AUTHORIZED REPRODUCTION MUST BEAR THIS ENTIRE LEGEND
LTR REVISION DESCRIPTION ECO DATE BY

+3.3V

TP90
Control section of

13
U15 is found on the
C55 U15C
+2.5V 0.015 uF Power page (07). 90K 7 +3.3V
DS3903 128ct

8
R36 C56
R35 0.1 uF R138
A 100 K 330 K 16 V 10 K A
+5V
1% 10 %

8
SIDE A LATCH SENSOR +5VANA
2
- TP89
D1 R137 1 MOTOR_A_PWM_CURRENT_LIMIT 4
A C L3 10 K MOTOR_A_PWM_CURRENT_LIMIT

BLM18PG471SN1D U13 4 MOTOR_A_CURRENT_AB&C 3

S1G-13-F A1324 MOTOR_A_CURRENT_AB&C + U14A
LM393A

4
1 4
DNP Vcc -

D1 and D2 are to be placed on C57 R37 V+

1 C136
0.1 uF 2.2 K DNP
each side of U13. 16 V 3 3 V-
0.1 uF
10 %
Out + U16 R53 0
LT1783 16 V

2
2
GND
D2 C58 10 %
A C
0.01 uF
10 %
S1G-13-F
DNP

+5V
6
-

FACE PLATE A SENSOR 2 7

L4 5
+
BLM18PG471SN1D U17 U14B
A1324 TP91 LM393A
1
Vcc
+5VANA
C59
0.1 uF 3
16 V Out
10 % 2
GND
C60
0.01 uF
10 %

R38 R39 R51

Standoff X1 and Hall-effect 3.32 K 3.32 K
B 1% 1% 10 K +5VANA B
Sensor U17 must be assembled X1
together before soldering onto Standoff U19
the PCB. TP93 74HC4052
SIDE_A_LATCH_SENSOR 12
X0 VCC
16

FACE_PLATE_A_SENSOR_2 14
X1 C62
15
X2
0.1 uF
16 V
MOTOR_A_CURRENT_AB&C 11
X3
10 %
8
GND
TP94 FACEPLATE_A_THERMISTOR_2
7 FACEPLATE_A_THERMISTOR_2
1
Y0 VEE
7
TP95 FACEPLATE_A_THERMISTOR_1 5
7 FACEPLATE_A_THERMISTOR_1 Y1
SIDE_A_RETRACT_POS_SENSOR 2
Y2 EN
6

SIDE_A_EXPEL_POS_SENSOR 4
Y3
13 10 MA0 2
X A MA0

R139 3
Y B
9 MA1 MA1 2
10 K
R144 2.2 K TP96 AN1
Control section of +5V
AN1 2
U15 is found on the R145 2.2 K TP97 AN0 AN0 2
Power page (07). C64
0.1 uF C65 C66
16 V +5V 100 pF 100 pF
+5V 10 % 5% 5%
+5V
TP98
TP99
R40

11
10 K
U15D

8
+5V 10K 12 2
DS3903 128ct -
1 MOTOR_A_RETRACT_LIMIT MOTOR_A_RETRACT_LIMIT 4
MOTOR A RETRACT HOME SENSOR
10—SCHEMATICS

9
3
L7 + U20A
U21 LM393A

4
BLM18PG471SN1D A1324 TP100
POWERHEAD

C 1 C
Vcc

C67
0.1 uF Out
2 SIDE_A_RETRACT_POS_SENSOR
16 V
10 % 3 R41 R42
GND C68 10 K 100 K
0.01 uF
10 %

4 MOTOR_A_EXPEL_SWITCH
MOTOR_A_EXPEL_SWITCH

+5V U22 +5VANA

MOTOR A 200ml HOME SENSOR NLASB3157
5
L8 Vcc

BLM18PG471SN1D U23 C69

A1324 0.1 uF
1 6 Select 16 V
Vcc 10 % TP101
C70 GND
2
0.1 uF 2 A_SIDE_200ML_HOME_SENSOR 1
16 V Out 1
10 % 3 4
GND C71 SIDE_A_EXPEL_POS_SENSOR
0.01 uF 3
10 % 0

+5V

+5V

MOTOR A EXPEL WALL SENSOR TP102

L9 R43
BLM18PG471SN1D U24 10 K
A1324 6
-
1
Vcc MOTOR_A_EXPEL_LIMIT
D +5V 7 4 D
TP103 MOTOR_A_EXPEL_LIMIT
C72
0.1 uF 2 A_SIDE_WALL_SENSOR
5
+ U20B Hall Effect Sensors
16 V Out LM393A
15

10 %
3
GND C73 U15B 10K 14
0.01 uF DS3903 128ct
10 % R44
100 K
6

Control section of
North = <50% = 0V to 2.5V U15 is found on the
South = >50% = 2.5V to 5V Schematic,
Title:
Power page (07). MALLINCKRODT OPTIONE LOGIC BOARD
PRODUCT: OPTIONE Size: D
2111 EAST GALBRAITH ROAD DRAWN: J NGUYEN Sheet 5 of 8
CINCINNATI, OH 45237, USA CHECKED: SEE AGILE DRAWING NO. Rev
APPROVED: SEE AGILE 847170-2 B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

POWERHEAD LOGIC BOARD SCHEMATIC 847170-2 (4 OF 7)

847503-E 2017-04-21
 10-4-5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF MALLINCKRODT, CINCINNATI, OHIO, AND IS SUBJECT TO BEING RETURNED UPON REQUEST. IT SHALL NOT PAGE REVISION HISTORY
BE REPRODUCED IN WHOLE OR PART WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF MALLINCKRODT. ANY AUTHORIZED REPRODUCTION MUST BEAR THIS ENTIRE LEGEND
LTR REVISION DESCRIPTION ECO DATE BY

+12V +5V
A A
U25
MAX488
1
C74 VCC
TP104 0.1 uF J1
C75 C144 C145 C146 C147
+12V 0.1 uF 220 pF 220 pF 220 pF 220 pF 5748027-1
R54 16 V
100 K 10 % 240L3522
4
GND
+
SPKR1 5 RN16D 4 5 10 OEM_XMIT+ 6

1
+12V 3
AI-1440-TWT-12V-R 6 RN16C 3 6 10 OEM_XMIT- 7
4,8 SERVICE_XMIT
R55 R56 SERVICE_XMIT OEM_RECV+ 8
10 K 10 K 8 RN16B 2 7 10
BEEPER SERVICE_RECV R57 2.2 K OEM_RECV-

2
2 BEEPER
4
- 4,8 SERVICE_RECV
2
RN16A 10
9
7 1 8
V+
1 BEEP R58 I2C_CLK 3

1
C76 +
3 V-
120 I2C_DATA 2
R59 1 uF + U26 +5V
2.2 K 16 V LT1783 ON/OFF_SW

2
+3.3V 17
+3.3V U27
P82B96 +24V_PS 10
8
VCC
2 14
C77 RCL
0.1 uF TCL
3 15
16 V
+12V 10 % R60 R61 18
R62 R63 R64 4
GND
560 560
10 K 2.2 K 2.2 K 19

20
1
SCL RDA
6 R65 10 I2C_CLK
2,7,8 SCL 21
R66 SCL
7
SDA TDA
5 R67 10 I2C_DATA
2.2 K 2,7,8 SDA
SDA 11

12
C148 C149

2
+3.3V
D6 S2 220 pF 220 pF 22

+5V
MMBZ15VALT1G PTS645VL58 LFS 23

R68

3
1 2 24
10 K
B U28 TP105 3 4 25 B
PS2811-1
2 ON/OFF_INPUT 4 1 13
ON/OFF_INPUT R69
1K CANH 4
C78 3 2 ON/OFF_SW
0.1 uF CANL 5
C79 16 V

1
+ 150 uF 10 % AUX_START 16
6.3 V C150

1
10 % D7 D8 220 pF

2
BAT54 1
MMBZ15VALT1G
2 26
R70 R71 PWR i
1M 1M

3
3 27

1
R72

5
4
- 2.2 K CGND
V+
+24V 1
Power On Enable Relay R73 C80
75 K 1 uF 3 V-

1% -20, +80 % + U29

LT1783

2
K1
2 nc
Kyocera: 1
3 c PWR i
4 - Right TOP PY1_SW D9

3
1 4 no 6
3 - Bottom BAS19L +24V_MOTOR
2 RIGHT 9 nc 5 R74 DNP Q2
2 - Left 1M 2 POWER_OFF_OUTPUT 1 3 1
2N7002L
1 - Top 3 BOTTOM 8 c R75 POWER_OFF_OUTPUT TP106
10 1M
LEFT PY2_SW R76 L10

2
4 7 no
200 K HI1206T500R-10 PWR RF1
J9 TQ2SA-24V 1% i
2 1 +24V_PS
39-53-2045 PWR i

Kyocera TOUCH_SW +3.3V

C81 C82 RXEF375

Landmark: 0.1 uF 0.1 uF 3.75 A
U30
TSC2000

10— SCHEMATICS
+5V
1 - Top 1 PX2 LEFT (X+) L11 BLM18PG471SN1D LEFT 2
X+ +Vdd
1
2 - Right 2 PY2 TOP (Y+) L12 BLM18PG471SN1D TOP 3
C83 U31
3 - Bottom Y+ 0.1 uF TJA1050

POWERHEAD
PX1 RIGHT (X-) L13 BLM18PG471SN1D RIGHT 16 V
C 4 - Left 3 4
X- 10 % Vcc
3 C
6
2,8 TXCAN 1
4 PY1 BOTTOM (Y-) L14 BLM18PG471SN1D BOTTOM 5
GND TXCAN TxD
Y-
NC
10 C84 C85
J8 0.1 uF 0.1 uF
52030-0429 C86 C87 C88 C89 Vref
9 5
Ref
16 V
Landmark 0.01 uF 0.01 uF 0.01 uF 0.01 uF 10 %
10 % 10 % 10 % 10 % AREF 17
16 V 10 % TOUCH_IRQ1 2
Aout GND
R77 200 K 18
PENIRQ
16
TOUCH_IRQ1 2 8
ARNG SPI_A/D_DATA_VALID S
1

D10 D11 1% DAV

14
SPI_A/D_DATA_VALID 2
7
MMBZ5V6ALT1G MMBZ5V6ALT1G 200 K
CANH CANHI R78 10 CANH
R79 7 12 SPI_CS0 2,8 4
VBAT1 SS SPI_CS0
2,8 RXCAN RxD
6 CANLOW R80 10 CANL
1% MISO RXCAN CANL
3

8
VBAT2 MISO
15
MISO 2,8
DNP MOSI
13 MOSI MOSI 2,8 R81 120
TILT

2
+3.3V R82 20
AUX1 SPICLK D12 C151 C152
SCLK
11
SPICLK 2,8 220 pF 220 pF
R47 270 19
AUX2 MMBZ15VALT1G
1.5 K

3
DNP R84
C90 R49 R85 200 K +3.3V
0.1 uF 100 K 8.45K 1%
16 V 1%
10 % R83 +5V +5V

200 K R87
+3.3V C160 1% 10 K
U33 R89
0.1 uF PS2811-1 560 R90
U32 10 % +3.3V 2 START_INPUT
START_INPUT 4 1 10 K
KXTC9-2050 16 V +3.3V
R86 1
22 VDD
3 2 1 3 AUX_START#
2
VDD X_OUT
6 R88 TP107 C92

3
100 K 0.1 uF D13
5

7 4 16 V BAS19L
Y_OUT -
10 % Q3 C153
4
EN Z_OUT
8
V+
1 2 START_OUTPUT
START_OUTPUT 1 2N7002L 220 pF
C91
R48 0.1 uF 3
+
V-
U34

2
10 K 5 10 16 V
NC NC LT1783
2

10 %

D
R91 D
TILT_SELF_TEST 8.45K
2 TILT_SELF_TEST
3
ST 1%
9
GND

Tilt Sensor
Schematic,
Title:
MALLINCKRODT OPTIONE LOGIC BOARD
PRODUCT: OPTIONE Size: D
2111 EAST GALBRAITH ROAD DRAWN: J NGUYEN Sheet 6 of 8
CINCINNATI, OH 45237, USA CHECKED: SEE AGILE DRAWING NO. Rev
APPROVED: SEE AGILE 847170-2 B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

POWERHEAD LOGIC BOARD SCHEMATIC 847170-2 (5 OF 7)

847503-E 2017-04-21
10-4-6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF MALLINCKRODT, CINCINNATI, OHIO, AND IS SUBJECT TO BEING RETURNED UPON REQUEST. IT SHALL NOT PAGE REVISION HISTORY
BE REPRODUCED IN WHOLE OR PART WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF MALLINCKRODT. ANY AUTHORIZED REPRODUCTION MUST BEAR THIS ENTIRE LEGEND
LTR REVISION DESCRIPTION ECO DATE BY
+3.3V +5V +12V +24V

+24V_MOTOR +24V

A
DS5 DS1

A
DS3

A
DS4 SML-LX0603SRW-TR SML-LX0603SRW-TR
SML-LX0603SRW-TR SML-LX0603SRW-TR

C
C
+3.3V

C
L15 D14
39 uH U35 BAS19L
D15 LT1766 R92
A C 4
VIN BOOST
6 3 1 TP108 R94 R95 4.99 K R93
1K 2.2 K 1% 10 K
MBRS240LT3G 3 C93 +24V +12V
A C94 15
SHDN
NC
0.33 uF A
4.7 uF 25 V
-20,+80 % SW
2 L16 39 uH
11
VC K2 F1 PWR i
C95 C96 HE3621A2410

1
7 SMD100F
NC +
C97 14 D16 0.1 uF 150 uF 1.1 A
R96 220 pF
SYNC
13 10 % 2 PWR
2.2 K NC SS14-E3 6.3 V

2
i

A
1 5 c 4 1 2
GND NC
8 PWR
GND
10 i
BIAS
C99 9
GND
no 1
i PWR 0.015 uF 16 12 3
GND FB

3
R99 C98 R97
8.45K 0.1 uF 10 K
R100 1% 2 FACEPLATE_A_HEATER_ENABLE
FACEPLATE_A_HEATER_ENABLE 1 Q4
4.99 K 2N7002L
1% TP109

2
R98

3
10 K
+5V 1 Q6
D17 IRFR9024NTRPBF
U36 BAS19L
LT1766
TP110

2
4 6 3 1
VIN BOOST
3 C100 Q7 PWR i
C101 15
SHDN
NC 0.33 uF 2 FACEPLATE_A_HEATER_PWM
FACEPLATE_A_HEATER_PWM 1 2N7002L C154
4.7 uF 25 V
-20,+80 % SW
2 L17 15 uH
R102

2
11
VC
C102 R101 0.47 220 pF

C
7 10 K +5VANA
NC
D19 0.1 uF C103

1
R105 C104 14
SYNC
13
+ 150 uF C155
2.2 K 220 pF NC SS14-E3 10 V

3
D18

2
A
1 5
GND NC PWR i
BAS19L 220 pF
8
GND
R103
15.0 K

1
10
BIAS 1%
C105 9
GND
FACEPLATE_A_HEATER_CHECK
0.015 uF 16 12
2 FACEPLATE_A_HEATER_CHECK Heater
GND FB
B R106 J10 B
15.4 K R104 DF13-4P-1.25DSA
R107 1% 10 K HEATER_A_OUT 2
4.99 K
1% 1

+2.5V C106 4
U38 0.1 uF C156
LM317MDTG 220 pF 3

3
VIN VOUT
2 5 FACEPLATE_A_THERMISTOR_1
FACEPLATE_A_THERMISTOR_1
5 FACEPLATE_A_THERMISTOR_2
FACEPLATE_A_THERMISTOR_2
C109 ADJ
0.1 uF
C107 C108 +24V K3
0.1 uF 0.1 uF R108
1

nc 2
1 10
c 3 HEATER_A_SCL+5/THERM_2
R110
237 C110

3
6 no 4
1% 4.7 uF D20
R111 -20,+80 % BAS19L 5 nc 9 HEATER_A_SDA+5/THERM_1
237 R109
TP111 TP112 TP113 TP114

1
8
+3.3V 1% 10
c
10
no 7
Slide Switch S3 selects which LCD is

1
installed. Connecting 1 and 2 selects TQ2SA-24V
Q8 D21
Landmark. Connecting 2 and 3 selects R118 FACEPLATE_A_HEATER_SELECT MMBZ5V6ALT1G
Kyocera. Landmark position is shown. 2 FACEPLATE_A_HEATER_SELECT
1 2N7002L
200 K
1%

3
S3 C111
2.2uF
1 35 V
i 10 %
2 LCD_LANDMARK/KYOCERA
LCD_LANDMARK/KYOCERA 2 +5V PWR

3
Landmark Backlight +3.3V +3.3V

JS102011SAQN J4 U15A
L18 D22 R112 SM02B-BHSS-1-TB DS3903
10—SCHEMATICS

+5V
A C 2 3 LANDMARK_BACKLIGHT_ANODE 1
A0
3 U39
20 PCA9515
10 uH SS14-E3 1.62 2 3 potentiometer VCC
2 +5V 8 1
C114 Q9
POWERHEAD

SCL VCC nc
2.2uF 1% Si2301 R115 sections of U15 are

1
C
35 V
3
TAB C112 SDA
1 C113 C

C157 found on the Sensor 0.1 uF 0.1 uF

+3.3V 10 % 24.0 K 4 16 V 4 16 V 5
U40 page (05).
19

18

17

16
1% 220 pF TAB
10 %
WP EN
NLASB3157 R116 10 R113 R114 10 % 4
LANDMARK_PWM DGND 2.2 K 2.2 K GND
SW1

CAP1

LED1

TG1
5 4 1K 19
Vcc PWM1 NC
15
OVP1
5 18
C134 VREF_2V 8
CTRL1
NC NC SCL_+5V 7
SCL1 SCL0
2
0.1 uF Select 6
VC1
12 16
NC NC
17
16 V SDA_+5V 6
SDA1 SDA0
3
10 % 2 U37B R117
GND
490L1012 10 K C115
1 LANDMARK_PWM 220 pF 2,6,8 SDA
1
C116 SDA

3 LCONTRAST
LCONTRAST 4 2.2UF 2,6,8 SCL
SCL
35 V
0
3 KYOCERA_PWM 10 %
+5V
Kyocera Backlight
J5
L20 D23 R119 B4B-PH-SM4-TB
R132 R133 A C 2 3 KYOCERA_BACKLIGHT_ANODE1 1 +24V
10 K 10 K
10 uH SS14-E3 1.62 2 +12V
C119 1% Q10 L19 D24
2.2uF Si2301 R120 U41 BAS19L
1

3 HI1206T500R-10
35 V LT1766
10 % 24.0 K C158 4 4 6 3 1 TP115
24

25

26

27

220 pF VIN BOOST

1% R121 5 3 C120
KYOCERA_PWM TAB C121 NC
0.33 uF
LED
SW3

CAP3

TG3

3 1K 15
PWM2 4.7 uF SHDN 25 V
13 6
+5V
OVP3 TAB -20,+80 % 2 L21 39 uH
VREF_2V 7 11
SW
U37A CTRL2
VC3
10
VC
490L1012

1
7
28 5 VREF_2V U37C R124 i PWR C124 14
NC
D25 C122 + C123
VIN VREF
490L1012 10 K C125 R123 220 pF
SYNC
13 0.1 uF 100 uF
C117 C118 C126 220 pF 2.2 K NC SS14-E3 16 V

2
2.2uF 0.1 uF R135 2.2uF

A
1 5
35 V 16 V 35 V GND NC
10 % 10 % 200 K 10 %
29
GND 1% +5V
8
GND
10
BIAS
9
1
SHDN FADJ
9 C127 GND

2 LCD_ON/OFF
LCD_ON/OFF 0.015 uF 16
GND FB
12

D L22 D26 R127 R125 D

A C 2 3 KYOCERA_BACKLIGHT_ANODE2 R126 35.7 K
R122 4.12 K 1%
10 K 10 uH SS14-E3 1.62 1%
C128 1% Q11
2.2uF Si2301
1

35 V R128
10 % C159
23

22

21

20

24.0 K 220 pF
1% R129
KYOCERA_PWM
SW2

CAP2

LED2

TG2

2 1K
PWM3
14
OVP2
VREF_2V 6
CTRL3 Schematic,
Title:
11
VC2 MALLINCKRODT OPTIONE LOGIC BOARD
LCD Backlight Current Source U37D R130 C129
PRODUCT: OPTIONE Size: D
490L1012 10 K 220 pF
2111 EAST GALBRAITH ROAD DRAWN: J NGUYEN Sheet 7 of 8
CINCINNATI, OH 45237, USA CHECKED: SEE AGILE DRAWING NO. Rev
APPROVED: SEE AGILE 847170-2 B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

POWERHEAD LOGIC BOARD SCHEMATIC 847170-2 (6 OF 7)

847503-E 2017-04-21
 10-4-7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF MALLINCKRODT, CINCINNATI, OHIO, AND IS SUBJECT TO BEING RETURNED UPON REQUEST. IT SHALL NOT PAGE REVISION HISTORY
BE REPRODUCED IN WHOLE OR PART WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF MALLINCKRODT. ANY AUTHORIZED REPRODUCTION MUST BEAR THIS ENTIRE LEGEND
LTR REVISION DESCRIPTION ECO DATE BY

A REMOVE U43 FROM BOM 26717 08/04/14 HH

Test Connector SRAM

A A

2,3,4 A[0..21]
A[0..21]

2,3,4 D[0..31]
D[0..31]
U42
J17 +3.3V
D0 11 49 A0
11
Vcc A0
1 A1
D1 12 48 A1
33
Vcc A1
2 A2
D2 9 50 A2
A2
3 A3
D3 15 56 A3
C130 C131 A3
4 A4
D4 34 52 A4 0.1 uF 0.1 uF
16 V 16 V A4
5 A5
D5 16 55 A5 10 % 10 %
A5
18 A6
D6 35 53 A6 12
Vss
A6
19 A7
D7 36 54 A7 34
Vss
A7
20 A8
D8 17 51 A8
A8
21 A9
D9 19 57 A9
D16 7
D0 A9
22 A10
D10 37 60 A10
D17 8
D1 A10
23 A11
D11 38 58 A11
D18 9 24 A12
D12 A12 D2 A11
21 59
D19 10
D3 A12
25 A13
D13 24 62 A13
D20 13
D4 A13
26 A14
D14 39 61 A14
D21 14
D5 A14
27 A15
D15 40 66 A15 U42 can be poulated with 512KB or 1MB SRAM. In the
D22 15 42 A16
D16 25 68 A16 D6 A15
512KB case, pin 28 is NC. Pin 28 is A19 for the 1MB part.
D23 16
D7 A16
43 A17
D17 41 65 A17
D24 29
D8 A17
44 A18 The default is 512KB.
D18 42 70 A18
D25 30
D9 A18/NC
28 A19
D19 28 69 A19
D26 31
D10
D20 29 67 A20
D27 32
D11
B D21 43 73 A21 B
D28 35
D12 LB
39 BS2
D22 44 74 CS5 CS5 2 D29 36 41 OE
D23 CS6 D13 OE
32 63
CS6 2 D30 37 17 R/W
D24 BS0 D14 WE
27 1
BS0 2 D31 CS6
38 6
D25 BS1 D15 CS
20 3
BS1 2 40 BS3
UB
D26 23 4 BS2 BS2 2,3
D27 45 5 BS3 BS3 2,3
D28 CS0 AS7C34098A
31 13
CS0 2
D29 46 8 CS1 CS1 2,4
D30 47 7 CS2 CS2 2
D31 33 75 CS3 CS3 2,3
TP116 2 71 RESET
RESET 2,3,4
TP117 6 64 R/W R/W 2,3,4
TP118 10 72 OE OE 2,3
TP119 14 76 TA
TP122 TP120 18

TP121 22 +3.3V

PST_ENABLE 26 77

PSTCLK_TST 30 78
+3.3V C132
Do Not Install U43 (A) 79 0.1 uF
16 V
U43 +3.3V 80 10 % MTH1-MTH4 are connected to the RAM, which provides chassis
NLASB3157
R131 ground.
10 K Vcc
5 PEM1 MTH1 C137 DNP
103 CGND is the chassis GND connection on the Power Input connector,
C133
J1. Installing R147 connects that CGND to the LCD bracket. R50 DNP 0.01 uF

10— SCHEMATICS
0.1 uF 100
1 1 1
6 Select 16 V 107 SERVICE_XMIT SERVICE_XMIT 4,6 Installing R143 and R154 connects the RAM to the LCD bracket.
10 % 91 0
2 108 SERVICE_RECV 4,6 Installing both connects the RAM, LCD bracket, and power cable 10 %

POWERHEAD
GND
+3.3V 85
SERVICE_RECV
CGND. SMTSO-M3-2ET
C 1 109 XMIT_TO_A_SIDE_SERVO XMIT_TO_A_SIDE_SERVO 2,4 C
1
83
4 110 RECV_FROM_A_SIDE_SERVO 2,4
105
RECV_FROM_A_SIDE_SERVO Capacitors on the mounting holes MTH1-MTH4 provide high
3 111 SCL 2,6,7 frequency conductive paths between DGND and chassis ground. PEM2 DNP
2,3 PSTCLK
PSTCLK 0
89
SCL MTH2 C138
SDA 2,6,7
102
112
SDA R140 DNP 0.01 uF
TXCAN 1 1 1
101
113
TXCAN 2,6
RXCAN 0
JTAG_EN
114
RXCAN 2,6 SMTSO-M3-2ET 10 %
2 JTAG_EN
81
115
2 DSCLK/TRST
DSCLK/TRST 84
116
2 TCLK
TCLK 86
117 MISO 2,6 STDOFF1 PEM3 DNP
2 BKPT/TMS
BKPT/TMS 82
MISO
DNP MTH3 C139
MOSI 2,6
DSI/TDI
118
MOSI R142 R143 DNP 0.01 uF
2 DSI/TDI
88
119 SPICLK 1 1 1 1
DSO/TDO SPICLK 2,6
2 DSO/TDO
90
SPI_CS0 0 0
PST0 95
120
SPI_CS0 2,6 SMTSO-M3-2ET 10 %
2 PST0 SMTSO-3.6-3ET
2 PST1
PST1 94

2 PST2
PST2 93

PST3 STDOFF2 PEM4 MTH4 C140 DNP

2 PST3
92
DNP
+3.3V DDATA0 R146 DNP R147 R154 DNP 0.01 uF
2 DDATA0
99
1 1 1 1

2 DDATA1
DDATA1 98 0 0 0
DDATA2 SMTSO-M3-2ET 10 %
R17 2 DDATA2
97
SMTSO-3.6-3ET
1K 2 DDATA3
DDATA3 96
CGND
PSTCLK_TST 104

2,3 TA
TA 106

3.3V_RESET STANDOFFS BETWEEN RAM AND BOARD PEM NUTS FOR LCD BRACKET PLATED MOUNTING HOLES
2 3.3V_RESET
87

BSH-060-01-F-D-A

D D

Schematic,
Title:
MALLINCKRODT OPTIONE LOGIC BOARD
PRODUCT: OPTIONE Size: D
2111 EAST GALBRAITH ROAD DRAWN: J NGUYEN Sheet 8 of 8
CINCINNATI, OH 45237, USA CHECKED: SEE AGILE DRAWING NO. Rev
APPROVED: SEE AGILE 847170-2 B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

POWERHEAD LOGIC BOARD SCHEMATIC 847170-2 (7 OF 7)

847503-E 2017-04-21
10-4-8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF MALLINCKRODT, CINCINNATI, OHIO, AND IS SUBJECT TO BEING RETURNED UPON REQUEST. IT SHALL NOT PAGE REVISION HISTORY
BE REPRODUCED IN WHOLE OR PART WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF MALLINCKRODT. ANY AUTHORIZED REPRODUCTION MUST BEAR THIS ENTIRE LEGEND
LTR REVISION DESCRIPTION ECO DATE BY

2 CHANGED FOOTPRINT C21-C26,C30-C35, C37-C42 TO MATCH PCB LAYOUT 26305 02/27/14 HH

TP25 TP26

D1 BAS19
TP27
1 3
+24V

U3
1 16
BST_DR BST
+24V + C12 + C13

1
C14
10 330uF 330uF
V+ .1uf TP28

2
2
2 IRF3315S Q1
V+
A R13 10 A
15 1 DGND
C15 TG_DR
R14 47k
14
4.7uF TG_FB

3
7
GND
13 TP29
T_SOURSE R15
TP30
DGND 6 12 0
MOTOR_A_PWM_A_OUT INPUT SENSE+
11 MOTOR_A_PHASE_A
SENSE-
5
FAULT
TP31 R16 10

2
4 9 IRF3315S Q2
MOTOR_A_PHASE_A_ENABLE ENABLE BG_DR
3 8 1
BIAS BG_FB
C16 LT1158
TP32 TP33

3
+3.3V .01uF
TP34
D2 BAS19
1 3

2
R17
DGND
TP59
U4
10K 1 16
BST_DR BST
+24V

1
MOTOR_A_DRIVE_FAULT C17
10
V+ .1uf TP35

2
2
C18 2 IRF3315S Q3
V+
R18 10
.1uf 15 1 +5V
C19 TG_DR

2
R19 47k
14
4.7uF TG_FB

3
7
GND

RN3C
DGND TP36

RN3A

RN3B
13
T_SOURSE R20
TP37

6
DGND 6 12 0
MOTOR_A_PWM_B_OUT INPUT SENSE+
11 MOTOR_A_PHASE_B
SENSE-
5
FAULT

5.1K
5.1K

5.1K
TP38

3
R21 10

2
4 9 IRF3315S Q4
MOTOR_A_PHASE_B_ENABLE ENABLE BG_DR R22 10
MOTOR_A_HALL_A
3 8 1 C20 C21
BIAS BG_FB R23 10

C22 LT1158 .01uF .01uF C23 C24 10

R24
B B
TP39 TP40 MOTOR_A_HALL_B

3
.01uF .01uF .01uF
C26 C25
TP41 DGND
D3 BAS19 .01uF .01uF +5V
1 3 DGND
MOTOR_A_HALL_C
DGND
DGND J2
U5 1
1 16 .1 .1 .1 2
BST_DR BST

1
+24V C27 3

1
C28 4
10 GND TP56 R30
0 TP43 .1uf 5
V+ .1uf TP42

2
R25 R26 R27 6

2
2
2 IRF3315S Q5 TP44 7
V+ C31
1 C30 8
R28 10 .01uF
15 1 .01uF 9
C29 TG_DR
R29 47k 10
14 11
4.7uF TG_FB
DGND DGND DGND 12

3
7 13
GND
13 14
T_SOURSE R31
TP45 TP46 TP57 R33 TP47
DGND 6 12 0 MOLEX 14 pin MINI-FIT JR
MOTOR_A_PWM_C_OUT INPUT SENSE+
C33
11 MOTOR_A_PHASE_C C32 0
SENSE- .01uF
5 .01uF
FAULT
TP48 R34 10

2
4 9 IRF3315S Q6
MOTOR_A_PHASE_C_ENABLE ENABLE BG_DR
DGND
3 8 1 TP58 0 TP49
BIAS BG_FB
C36 LT1158
R32 C35
C34
.01uF

3
.01uF .01uF
TP50

DGND
DGND

R35 10
MOTOR_A_INDEX
R36 10
C37 C38
.01uF
.01uF R37 10
10—SCHEMATICS

C39 C40
.01uF
.01uF
C41
DGND C42
.01uF

RN3D

RN4A

RN4B
POWERHEAD

.01uF
C DGND C

7
MOTOR_A_QUAD_A
DGND

MOTOR_A_QUAD_B

5.1K

5.1K

5.1K
4

2
+5V

C43 0.01uF
+5V

40.2K, 1%

1
C44
R38
R39 1.5K .1uf

2
+5V
TP51
DGND DGND

8
2
TP52 TP53 - MOTOR_A_CURRENT_AB&C
D U1A D
1
R40 10K
1 2 3
+
LM358

4
TP54

DGND
D4
R41
3 1
TEST_MOTOR_A_CURRENT
Motor Drive
BAS19
75.0K,1% Title: Schematic,
MALLINCKRODT OPTIONE PH MOTOR BOARD
PRODUCT: OPTIONE Size: D
2111 EAST GALBRAITH ROAD
DRAWN: DPP 02/28/13 Sheet 2 of 3
CINCINNATI, OH 45237, USA
CHECKED: SEE AGILE DRAWING NO. Rev
APPROVED: SEE AGILE 847160-2 A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

POWERHEAD MOTOR DRIVER PCBA 847160-2 (1 OF 2)

847503-E 2017-04-21
 10-4-9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF MALLINCKRODT, CINCINNATI, OHIO, AND IS SUBJECT TO BEING RETURNED UPON REQUEST. IT SHALL NOT PAGE REVISION HISTORY
BE REPRODUCED IN WHOLE OR PART WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF MALLINCKRODT. ANY AUTHORIZED REPRODUCTION MUST BEAR THIS ENTIRE LEGEND
LTR REVISION DESCRIPTION ECO DATE BY

2 CHANGED FOOTPRINT C1-C9, C45-C51 TO MATCH PCB LAYOUT 26305 02/27/14 HH

J1
+24V
A 1 A
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12 DGND
13
14
TP1

1
+12V C1 C3 C4 C9 C45 C46
36 +2.5V C2 C47

2
TP2

23.7K, 1%
.1uf .1uf .1uf .1uf .1uf .1uf .1uf .1uf

1
2

2
39 C5 TP3 C6 C7 C8 C51 C48 C49 C50
+3.3V

R1
48 .1uf GND .1uf .1uf .1uf GND .1uf .1uf .1uf .1uf

2
1

1
59 +5V DNP
TP4 +5V
60

1
103

121

104

113

120
15 DGND

13

21

36

40

47

50

52

60

62

93

35

14

20

29

37

46

56

59

61

71

92
MOTOR_A_CURRENT_AB&C

8
17 TP5
TEST_MOTOR_A_CURRENT

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND
Vcc

Vcc

Vcc

Vcc

Vcc

Vcc

Vcc

Vcc

Vcc

Vcc

Vcc

Vcc

Vcc

Vcc

PULL_UP_Vcc
RN1 +5V
10K
52 SA_PWM_A TP6 100 9 8 1
PWM_MAG1 D0
54 SA_PWM_B TP7 101 10 7 2
PWM_MAG2 D1
115200 Baud
56 SA_PWM_C TP8 102 11 6 3
PWM_MAG3 D2
55 SA_FWD/REV TP9 96 12 5 4
PWM_SIGN1 D3
97 15 8 1
PWM_SIGN2 D4
16 7 2 No Parity
D5
26 MOTOR_A_HALL_A TP10 73
MOTOR_A_HALL_A HALL_A
17 6 3
D6
28 MOTOR_A_HALL_B TP11 90 2 Stop Bits
MOTOR_A_HALL_B HALL_B
18 5 4
D7
30 MOTOR_A_HALL_C TP12 91
MOTOR_A_HALL_C HALL_C
19 1 2 Point to Point
D8
10K
49 MOTOR_A_QUAD_A TP13 67 22 R2
MOTOR_A_QUAD_A QUAD_A D9
RN2
B 51 MOTOR_A_QUAD_B TP14 68 23 10K DGND B
MOTOR_A_QUAD_B QUAD_B D10
53 MOTOR_A_INDEX TP15 69 24
MOTOR_A_INDEX INDEX D11
25
D12
32 SA_HOME 70
HOME
26
D13
29 MOTOR_A_RETRACT_LIMIT TP16 64
NEG_LIM
27
D14
27 MOTOR_A_EXPEL_LIMIT TP17 63
POS_LIM
28
TP18 D15
+5V +5VANA
+24V L1
16 84 110
MOTOR_A_PWM_A_OUT ANA_Vcc A0
BEAD

1
18 R3 85 111
2

MOTOR_A_PWM_B_OUT + ANA_REF_HIGH A1

1
MC3310
19 23.7K, 1% C10 C11 86 112
MOTOR_A_PHASE_A_ENABLE ANA_REF_LOW A2

2
+12V L2 1 uF .1uf U2

2
20 87 114
MOTOR_A_PWM_C_OUT ANA_GND A3
BEAD
1

21 AGND 115
MOTOR_A_PHASE_B_ENABLE A4
R4 R5 74
2

ANA1
23 DGND 116
2

MOTOR_A_PHASE_C_ENABLE A5
23.7K, 1%

23.7K, 1%

TP55 +5V 89
ANA2
24 117
MOTOR_A_DRIVE_FAULT A6
+2.5V 75
ANA3
118
1

A7
88
1

ANA4
R6 119
A8
1 2 TP20 2.28VOLTS 76
ANA5
R7 122
A9
4.99K,1% 1 2 2.08VOLTS 83
ANA6
+3.3V 123
A10
DGND 4.99K,1% TP19 77
ANA7
124
A11
DGND 82
ANA8
125
A12
AGND
126
A13
33 SA_AXIS_IN 72
AXIS_IN
127
A14
34 SA_AXIS_OUT 94
AXIS_OUT
128

10— SCHEMATICS
A15

46 PMD_IRQ2 98
HOST_INT
4

POWERHEAD
R/W
43 CLK_20MHZ_MOTOR TP21 58
CK_IN
C 132 C
W/R
42 RESET 41
RESET
129
RAM_CS
130
PERIPH_CS
99
SRL_EN
1
WRITE_ENABLE
38 XMIT_TO_A_SIDE_SERVO TP22 43
RCV
6

PRLENABLE

I/OINTRPT
NC/SYNCH
STROBE
37 RECV_FROM_A_SIDE_SERVO TP23 44
XMIT
AGND

AGND

AGND

AGND

VCC
NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC
131

107

109

108

106

105

95

81

80

79

78

66

65

57

55

54

53

51

49

48

45

42

39

38

34

33

32

31

30

5
31 GND
35
47
50
2
+5V
4.99K,1%

1
22 DGND
25
R8

40 TP24
1

41
44 DNP
45
57
58

DGND

ERM8-030-01-L-D-RA-TR
MTH1 MTH2 MTH3 MTH4

R9 R10 R11 R12

0 0 0 0

DGND DGND DGND DGND

D D

Motor Control
Title: Schematic,
MALLINCKRODT OPTIONE PH MOTOR BOARD
PRODUCT: OPTIONE Size: D
2111 EAST GALBRAITH ROAD
DRAWN: DPP 02/28/13 Sheet 3 of 3
CINCINNATI, OH 45237, USA
CHECKED: SEE AGILE DRAWING NO. Rev
APPROVED: SEE AGILE 847160-2 A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

POWERHEAD MOTOR DRIVER PCBA 847160-2 (2 OF 2)

847503-E 2017-04-21
10-4-10

This page intentionally left blank.

10—SCHEMATICS
POWERHEAD

847503-E 2017-04-21
 10-5-1

HAND BUTTON 802620/802622

SEE TABLE

HAND START SWITCH ASS'Y. LENGTH TABLE

PART NUMBER TITLE ASSEMBLED LENGTH REV.

802620 START SWITCH ASS'Y., HAND 2M 6.0' - 7.0" +2.0" A

802622 START SWITCH ASS'Y., HAND 2M 19.0' - 8.0" +4.0" A

WIRING DIAGRAM

Black
C 2
Red

10—SCHEMATICS
SW1 N.C. 6

HAND BUTTON
N.O.
PINS
White
C 3
SW2 N.C.
N.O. Green 1
PENDANT CONNECTOR
ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY

CABLE SHIELD
NOTES: SEE NOTE 2

2. CABLE SHIELD TO BE TERMINATED TO MINI DIN CIRCULAR SHEEL.

847503-E 2017-04-21
10-5-2

This page intentionally left blank.

10—SCHEMATICS
HAND BUTTON

847503-E 2017-04-21
 10-6-1

POWERHEAD EXTENSION DATA CABLE

14 1 25 13
Male P1 S1 Female
Pins Pins
14 1
25 13

P1 SEE CHART +/- 1.0 ft. S1

P2 S2
P3 S3
P4 PART NUMBER LENGTH
S4
P5 800109 50 FT S5
P6 800110 75 FT S6
P7 S7
800111 100 FT
P8 S8
P9 S9
P10 S10
P11 S11
P12 S12
P13 S13
P14 S14
P15 S15
P16 S16
P17 S17
P18 S18

10—SCHEMATICS
P19 S19
P20 S20

CABLES
P21 S21
P22 S22
P23 S23
P24 S24
P25 S25
SHIELD SHIELD

847503-E 2017-04-21
10-6-2

This page intentionally left blank.

10—SCHEMATICS
CABLES

847503-E 2017-04-21
 A-1

APPENDIX A
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION
INFORMATION

A— INSTALLATION
INSTRUCTIONS

847503-E 2017-04-21
 A-2

PLACE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS HERE.

A— INSTALLATION
INSTRUCTIONS

847503-E 2017-04-21
 B-1

B ELECTROMAGNETIC
COMPATIBILITY TABLES
The OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System meets EN 60601-1-2 for
Class A conducted and radiated emissions and EMI immunity.
WARNING!
The OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System should not be used
adjacent to or stacked with other equipment. If adjacent or stacked use is
necessary, the system should be observed to verify normal operation in the
configuration in which it will be used.

WARNING!
Use of accessories, transducers and cables other than those specified or
provided by the manufacturer of this equipment could result in increased
electromagnetic emissions or decreased electromagnetic immunity of this
equipment and result in improper operation.

WARNING!
Portable RF communications equipment (including peripherals such as
antenna cables and external antennas) should be used no closer than 30
cm (12 inches) to any part of the OptiOne Single Head Delivery System,
including cables specified by the manufacturer. Otherwise, degradation of the
performance of this equipment could result.

CAUTION!
Portable and mobile RF communication equipment can affect operations of the
OptiOne Single-Head Contrast Delivery System .

B—ELECTROMAGNETIC
Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic emissions
The OptiOne is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the
COMPATIBILITY

OptiOne should assure that it is used in such an environment.

Emissions Test Compliance Electromagnetic environment - guidance
RF emissions Group 1 The OptiOne uses RF energy only for the internal function. Therefore,
the RF emissions are very low and are not likely to cause any
CISPR 11
interference in nearby electronic equipment.
RF emissions Class A The OptiOne is suitable for use in all establishments other than
domestic and those directly connected to the public low -voltage
CISPR 11
power supply network that supplies buildings used for domestic
Harmonic emissions Class A purposes.
IEC 61000-3-2
Voltage fluctuations/ Complies
flicker emissions

847503-E 2017-04-21
B-2

Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic immunity

The OptiOne is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the
OptiOne should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Immunity Test IEC 60601 test level Compliance level Electromagnetic environment - guidance
Electrostatic ± 2, 4, 6 and 8 kV contact ± 2, 4, 6 and 8 kV contact Floors should be wood, concrete or
discharge (ESD) ceramic tile. If floors are covered with
± 2, 4, 8 and 15 kV air ± 2, 4, 8 and 15 kV air
synthetic material, the relative humidity
IEC 61000-4-2
should be less than 30%.
Electrical Fast ± 1 kV for power supply ± 1 kV for power supply Mains power quality should be that
Transient / Burst lines lines of a typical commercial or hospital
environment.
IEC 61000-4-4 ± 1 kV for input / output ± 1 kV for input / output
lines lines
Surge ± 0.5, 1 kV line to line ± 0.5, 1 kV line to line Mains power quality should be that
of a typical commercial or hospital
IEC 61000-4-5 ± 0.5, 1, 2 kV line to earth ± 0.5, 1, 2 kV line to earth
environment.
Voltage dips, short <5% UT <5% UT Mains power quality should be that
interruptions and (>95% dip in UT ) (>95% dip in UT ) of a typical commercial or hospital
voltage variations on for 0.5 periods for 0.5 periods environment. If the user of the OptiOne
power supply input requires continued operation during
<5% UT <5% UT
lines power mains interruptions, it is
(>95% dip in UT ) (>95% dip in UT )
recommended that the OptiOne be
IEC 61000-4-11 for 1 period for 1 period
powered from an uninterruptible power
40% UT 40% UT supply or battery.
(>60% dip in UT ) (>60% dip in UT )
for 5 periods for 5 periods
70% UT 70% UT
(>30% dip in UT ) (>30% dip in UT )
for 25 periods for 25 periods
<5% UT <5% UT
(>95% dip in UT ) (>95% dip in UT )
for 5 s for 5 s
Power frequency 3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency magnetic fields should
(50/60 Hz) magnetic be at levels characteristic of a typical
30 A/m 30 A/m
field location in a typical commercial or
hospital environment.
IEC 61000-4-8
NOTE UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
B—ELECTROMAGNETIC
COMPATIBILITY

847503-E 2017-04-21
 B-3

Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic immunity

The OptiOne is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the
OptiOne should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Immunity Test IEC 60601 test level Compliance level Electromagnetic environment - guidance
Portable and mobile RF communications
equipment should be used no closer to any
part of the OptiOne, including cables, than the
recommended separation distance calculated
from the equation applicable to the frequency of
the transmitter.
Recommended separation distance
Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms d = 1.2 √P
0.15 to 80 MHz
IEC 61000-4-6
6 Vrms 6 Vrms d = 1.7 √P
0.15 to 80 MHz
Radiated RF 3 V/m 3 V/m d = 1.2 √P
80 MHz to 2.7 GHz (80 MHz to 800 MHz)
IEC 61000-4-3
d = 2.3√P
(800 MHz to 2.7 GHz)
where P is the maximum output power rating
of the transmitter in watts (W) according to
the transmitter manufacturer and d is the
recommended separation in meters (m).

Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters as

determined by an electromagnetic site surveya
should be less than the compliance level in each
frequency rangeb.

Interference may occur in the vicinity of

equipment marked with the following symbol:

NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and
reflection from structures, objects and people.
a Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radios (cellular/cordless) telephones and land mobile
radios, amateur radio, AM, FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess

B—ELECTROMAGNETIC
the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the
measured field strength in the location in which the OptiOne is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above,
COMPATIBILITY
the OptiOne should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures
may be necessary, such as reorienting or relocating the OptiOne.
b Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than 3 V/m.

847503-E 2017-04-21
B-4

Recommended separation distances between portable and mobile RF communications equipment and the OptiOne
The OptiOne is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances are controlled. The
customer or the user of the OptiOne can help prevent electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance
between portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and the "OptiOne" as recommended below,
according to the maximum output power of the communications equipment.
Rated maximum output Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter (m)
power of transmitter 150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
(W)
d = 1.2√P d = 1.2√P d = 2.3√P
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73
1 1.2 1.2 2.3
10 3.8 3.8 7.3
100 12 12 23
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation distance d in meters (m)
can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter, where P is the maximum output power
rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and
reflection from structures, objects and people.
B—ELECTROMAGNETIC
COMPATIBILITY

847503-E 2017-04-21
 I-1

Index
Symbols D
125 ML FACEPLATE KIT 6-3-44 DAILY INSPECTION 4-1-2
DATA CABLE POWER SUPPLY TO CONSOLE 1-7-1
A DATE AND TIME (SETUP) 3-1-13, 3-1-17
ACCESSORIES 1-7-1 DB25 CABLE TERMINATION TO LOGIC PCB WIRING
ACCESSORY ITEMS 6-7-1 7-4-2
ALARM KEY (SETUP) 3-1-13 DELETE A PROTOCOL FROM MEMORY 3-1-12
ALARMS SCREEN 3-1-19 DELETE PROTOCOL MEMORY KEY 3-1-9
AUTO-FILL FEATURE 1-3-1 DIMENSIONS 1-5-1
AUTO-FILL (SETUP) 3-1-14 DISABLE KEY 3-1-8
DISABLE KEY-POWERHEAD 3-2-15
B DISPLAY ORIENTATION-POWERHEAD 3-2-9
DOWNLOAD AND UPGRADE PROCEDURES 9-1-8
BACKLIGHT POWER CABLE 7-4-1 DURATION 3-1-4, 3-2-11
C E
CALIBRATING THE PRESSURE LIMIT 8-5-4 EDIT PROTOCOL MEMORY KEY 3-1-9
CATHETERS, CONNECTORS AND TUBING 1-6-2 ELECTRICAL CHECKS 4-3-1
CHANGE PARAMETER VALUES VIA THE SLIDE BAR ELECTRICAL LEAKAGE 1-5-1, 4-3-1
3-1-6, 3-2-12 ELECTRICALLY ISOLATED SYRINGE 1-4-1
CHECK FOR AIR MESSAGE 3-2-9 ENABLE 3-1-5, 3-2-9
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONS 7-5-2 ENABLED MAIN SCREEN-CONSOLE 3-1-3, 3-1-8
CLEANING 200 ML PRESSURE SLEEVE 4-5-2 ENABLED MAIN SCREEN-POWERHEAD 3-2-6, 3-2-15
CLEANING PROCEDURES 4-5-1 ENCODER 7-4-10
COMPATIBLE SYRINGES 1-6-1 ENTERING SERVICE MODE 8-1-2
COMPATIBLE SYRINGE SIZES 1-5-3 ENVIRONMENTAL 1-5-2
CONNECTORS 7-4-10 EXITING SERVICE MODE 8-1-4
CONSOLE 3-1-2
CONSOLE 2-1-3, 4-5-1 F
CONSOLE ALARMS 5-3-1
CONSOLE BRIGHTNESS-DISPLAY (SETUP) 3-1-14 FACEPLATE CABLE 7-4-2
CONSOLE CPU 7-5-1 FACEPLATE DETECTION CHECK 4-2-4
CONSOLE DISPLAY MODES OF OPERATION 3-1-2 FIELD REPLACEABLE PARTS 6-1-1
CONSOLE MAIN SCREEN 3-1-4 FILL/EXPEL ARROWS 3-2-6
CONSOLE OPERATIONS 4-2-2 FILL/EXPEL ARROWS-POWERHEAD 3-2-8
CONSOLE OVERVIEW 7-5-1 FLOW 3-1-4, 3-2-11
CONSOLE POWER BUTTON 3-1-2 FLOW RATE 1-5-3
CONSOLE REPLACEMENT COMPONENTS 6-2-1 FLOW RATE CHECK 4-2-5
CONSOLE VOLUME-DISPLAY (SETUP) 3-1-14 FREQUENCY OF CALIBRATION 8-1-2
CONSUMABLES 1-6-1 G
CRITICAL COMPONENT PLACEMENT 7-4-14
I—INDEX

CURRENT VALUES 3-1-9 GENERAL 2-1-1

GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDELINES 5-1-2
GROUND CONTINUITY 4-3-1
GROUND IMPEDANCE 4-3-2

847503-E 2017-04-21
 I-2

H J
HALL EFFECT SENSORS 7-4-10 J1 - DETAILED CONNECTOR AND SUBSYSTEM INTER-
HAND BUTTON START SWITCH ASSEMBLY 1-7-1 FACES 7-4-16
HEATER BLANKET CONNECTION 3-2-5 J-BOW ARM VISUAL INSPECTION 4-4-3
HEATER INTERFACE 7-4-6 J-BOW SAFETY COLLAR INSPECTION 4-4-5
HOMING THE RAM 2-1-6
L
I
LANGUAGE 3-1-18
INDICATIONS FOR USE 1-1-2 LANGUAGE KEY (SETUP) 3-1-13
INJECT DELAY 1-5-4, 3-1-5, 3-2-9, 3-2-11 LCD CABLE 7-4-1
INJECT DELAY DISPLAY 3-1-14 LCD INTERFACE 7-4-3
INJECTION DURATION DISPLAY (SETUP) 3-1-14 LED CABLE 7-4-1
INSTALLATION 200 ML FACEPLATE THUMB LED PCBA SUBASSEMBLY 7-4-16
KNOB KIT 6-3-45 LOADER PROGRAM TROUBLESHOOTING 9-1-13
INSTALLATION AC INLET MODULE KIT 6-4-6 LOGIC PCBA SUBASSEMBLY 7-4-2
INSTALLATION BELT KIT 6-3-32 LOGIC TO DRIVE BOARD TO BOARD INTERCONNECT
INSTALLATION BEZEL ASSEMBLY, KIT 6-3-16 7-4-1
INSTALLATION BOTTOM COVER, KIT 6-3-14 LOW PRESSURE TUBING 1-6-2
INSTALLATION CONSOLE COVER KIT 6-2-7
INSTALLATION CONSOLE CPU KIT 6-2-8 M
INSTALLATION COVER KIT 6-4-8 MAIN KEY-POWERHEAD 3-2-12
INSTALLATION DISPLAY SUBASSEMBLY KIT 6-2-9 MAIN SCREEN-CONSOLE (PROTOCOL PARAMETER
INSTALLATION FUSE KIT POWER SUPPLY 6-4-5 ENTRY SCREEN) 3-1-2, 3-1-4
INSTALLATION GASKET KIT 6-3-46 MAIN SCREEN-POWERHEAD 3-2-6
INSTALLATION HORIZONTAL PIVOT KIT 6-3-36 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 4-1-2
INSTALLATION INTERFACE BOARD KIT 6-2-12 MANUAL KNOB 3-2-2
INSTALLATION KNOB, KIT 6-3-17 MEMORY LOCATION 3-1-9
INSTALLATION KNOB LED PROCESSOR BOARD KIT MEMORY PAGE NUMBER 3-1-9
6-3-20 MEMORY-POWERHEAD 3-2-12
INSTALLATION LCD DISPLAY KIT 6-3-26 MEMORY SCREEN-CONSOLE 3-1-3, 3-1-9
INSTALLATION LOGIC BOARD, KIT 6-3-22 MEMORY SCREEN-POWERHEAD 3-2-6
INSTALLATION MOTOR DRIVER BOARD, KIT 6-3-24 MOTOR 7-4-10
INSTALLATION MOTOR KIT 6-3-30 MOTOR DRIVER PCBA SUBASSEMBLY 7-4-10
INSTALLATION PC BOARD KIT 6-4-6 MOVE A PROTOCOL MEMORY 3-1-12
INSTALLATION PIVOT BUSHING KIT 6-3-34 MOVE PROTOCOL MEMORY KEY 3-1-9
INSTALLATION POWERHEAD CABLE KIT 6-3-18
INSTALLATION POWER SUPPLY KIT 6-4-5 O
INSTALLATION PULLEY KIT 6-3-28
INSTALLATION SWITCH KIT 6-2-11 OEM INTERFACE (SETUP) 3-1-13
INSTALLATION TOP COVER, KIT 6-3-14 ONBOARD FEATURES 7-4-7
INSTALLATION TOUCHSCREEN KIT 6-2-10 OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT PROCEDURES 4-2-1
INSTALLATION WIRE HARNESS KIT 6-4-7 OPTIBOLUS® FEATURE (OPTIONAL) 1-3-1
INTERCONNECTION DESCRIPTIONS 7-4-1 OPTIVANTAGE DH TRANSFER SET 1-6-2
ITEMS REQUIRED 4-2-1
I—INDEX

847503-E 2017-04-21
 I-3

P PROTOCOL NAME 3-1-4, 3-2-9

PROTOCOL PARAMETER ENTRY SCREEN-POWER-
PARTIAL PRE-FILLS (SETUP) 3-1-14 HEAD 3-2-6
PASSWORD (SETUP) 3-1-14 PROTOCOL PARAMETERS 3-1-9
PAUSE ON PRESSURE LIMIT (SETUP) 3-1-14
PEAK PSI/PEAK KPA 3-1-5, 3-2-9, 3-2-12 R
PHASE 3-1-4, 3-2-11
PHASE DELAY 1-5-3, 3-1-4, 3-2-11 RECALL A PROTOCOL 3-1-10
PHASE DELAY DISPLAY (SETUP) 3-1-14 RECALLING A PROTOCOL, POWERHEAD 3-2-16
PHYSICAL STABILITY 1-4-2 REMAINING VOLUME 3-1-4
PMD MC3310 AND SUPPORTING ELECTRONICS 7-4- REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION 1-4-1
15 REMOTE STAND 6-5-1, 6-6-1
POSITIVE POSITIONING OF THE POWERHEAD 1-4-2 REMOTE START 2-1-4
POWER 7-4-2 REMOTE START OPERATIONS 4-2-3
POWER CORDS 1-7-1 RENAME (EDIT NAME) A PROTOCOL NAME OR PAGE
POWERHEAD 3-2-1, 4-5-1 3-1-12
POWERHEAD 2-1-2 REQUIRED TOOLS 8-1-1
POWERHEAD ALARMS 5-4-1, 5-5-1 RESULTS SCREEN 3-1-3
POWERHEAD BRIGHTNESS-DISPLAY (SETUP) 3-1-14 RESULTS SCREEN PARAMETERS AND SYMBOLS 3-1-
POWERHEAD DISPLAY MODES OF OPERATION 3-2-6 20
POWERHEAD DOWNWARD PRIOR STARTING INJEC-
S
TION 1-4-1
POWERHEAD EXTENSION CABLE TO POWER SUPPLY SAFETY FEATURES 1-4-1
1-7-1 SCAN DELAY 1-5-4, 3-1-5, 3-2-9, 3-2-11
POWERHEAD KIT COMPONENTS 6-3-2 SCAN DELAY DISPLAY 3-1-14
POWERHEAD MAIN SCREEN 3-2-8 SCHEMATICS 10-1-1
POWERHEAD MEMORY SCREEN 3-2-16 SCREEN CALIBRATION 8-2-1
POWERHEAD OPERATIONS 4-2-3 SELF-TESTING DESIGN 1-4-1
POWERHEAD OVERVIEW 7-4-1 SERVICE 8-1-1
POWERHEAD OVERVIEW 4-2-2 SERVICE KEY (SETUP) 3-1-13
POWERHEAD POWER ON DISPLAY 3-2-1 SERVICE TECHNICIAN QUALIFICATIONS 1-2-1
POWERHEAD PROTOCOL PARAMETER ENTRY SCREEN SETUP SCREEN-CONSOLE 3-1-3
3-2-11 SINGLE HEAD PROCEDURES 1-6-1
POWERHEAD REMOVAL 6-3-12 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD AND UPGRADE 9-1-1
POWERHEAD RESULTS SCREEN 3-2-17 SOFTWARE TRANSFER FROM CD 9-1-2
POWERHEAD STOP BUTTON CHECK 4-2-4 SOFTWARE VERSIONS (SOFTWARE) 3-1-13
POWERHEAD SUBASSEMBLIES 7-4-2 SPECIFICATIONS 1-5-1
POWERHEAD SYRINGE LOAD LATCHES 3-2-4 START KEY 3-1-8
POWERHEAD TILT POSITION CALIBRATION 8-3-1 START KEY-POWERHEAD 3-2-15
POWERHEAD VOLUME-DISPLAY (SETUP) 3-1-14 START/STOP KEY ON POWERHEAD 1-4-1
POWERHEAD WEAR IN/BURN IN 8-7-1 STORE A PROTOCOL IN MEMORY 3-1-11
POWER REQUIREMENTS 1-5-1 STORED PROTOCOLS 1-5-4
POWER SUPPLY 2-1-4, 4-5-2, 6-4-1, 7-3-1 STORE PROTOCOL MEMORY KEY 3-1-9
POWER SUPPLY CHECK 4-2-1 SUSPENSION ARM BALANCE ADJUSTMENT 4-4-2
POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT COMPONENTS 6-4-1 SUSPENSION ARM OPERATIONAL CHECKS 4-4-1
PRESSURE CALIBRATION 8-5-1 SUSPENSION ARM TRAVEL ADJUSTMENT 4-4-1
PRESSURE GAUGE CALIBRATION 8-5-2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM 1-7-2
I—INDEX

PRESSURE LIMIT 1-5-3 SUSPENSION SYSTEM CHECKS 4-4-3

PRESSURE LIMIT CHECK 4-2-6 SUSPENSION SYSTEM VISUAL INSPECTION 4-4-4
PRESSURE LIMITING EXAMPLE FOR TESTING 4-2-6 SYRINGE CLARITY 1-4-1
PRESSURE LIMIT (SETUP) 3-1-14 SYRINGE HEATER 1-5-3
PRESSURE SLEEVE AND SYRINGE INSPECTION 8-5-2 SYRINGE HOLDER AND ADAPTER 4-5-1
PRESSURE UNITS (SETUP) 3-1-14
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 4-1-2
PROTOCOL MEMORY WITH PASSWORD PROTECTION
1-3-2

847503-E 2017-04-21
 I-4

SYRINGE (ML)/FILL/EXPEL-POWERHEAD 3-2-8

SYRINGE (ML)/SYRINGE (ML)-POWERHEAD 3-2-15
SYRINGES 1-6-1
SYRINGE SIZES 1-5-3
SYSTEM FEATURES 1-3-1
SYSTEM GENERATED ALARMS 5-2-1

T
TERMINOLOGY 6-1-1
THEORY OF OPERATION 7-1-1
TIME AND DATE (SETUP) 3-1-17
TIME KEY (SETUP) 3-1-13
TIMING BOLUS 3-1-13, 3-2-12
TIMING BOLUS FEATURE 1-4-1
TOTAL ML (CONTRAST) 3-2-9
TOTAL TIME 1-5-4, 3-1-4, 3-2-11
TOUCH CABLE 7-4-2
TOUCH-SCREEN DISPLAYS 1-3-1
TOUCHSCREEN INTERFACE 7-4-5
TURNING THE SYSTEM POWER OFF 2-1-6
TURNING THE SYSTEM POWER ON 2-1-5

U
UNINSTALL THE OPTIONE SINGLE-HEAD LOADER
UTILITY 9-1-5

V
VERIFYING CALIBRATION 4-2-6
VERIFYING CALIBRATION 8-6-1
VERSATILITY 1-3-1
VERTICAL COLUMN INSPECTION 4-4-4
VOLUME 3-1-4, 3-2-11

W
WEIGHT 1-5-1
I—INDEX

847503-E 2017-04-21
NOTES
Liebel-Flarsheim Company LLC
2111 E. GALBRAITH ROAD CINCINNATI, OHIO 45237-1640 USA